2019 Crosstrek

(1,1)
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C Copyright 2018 SUBARU CORPORATION
北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 3/ 5

(2,1)
Vehicle types
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle types.

(2,1)

(3,1)
1
S00
Warranties & Warranties except for U.S.A. How to use this Owner’s 0
S00AA and Canada Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA06
All warranty information, including details S00AB
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of of coverage and exclusions, is in the & Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United Read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and
States come with the following warranties: extend the service life of your vehicle,
. SUBARU Limited Warranties follow the instructions in this manual.
. Federal Emission Control Systems Failure to observe these instructions may
Warranties result in serious injury and damage to your
. California Emissions Control Sys- vehicle.
tems Warranties This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including applic- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
ability, details of coverage and exclusions, table of contents, so you can usually tell at
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance a glance if that chapter contains the
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
& Warranties for Canada bags
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru This chapter informs you how to use the
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control System Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including applic-
This chapter informs you about the opera-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
to use the instruments and other switches.
Read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –

(4,1)
Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen-
the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A WARNING indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which serious injury or death could
This chapter informs you about your audio Reporting safety defects result if the warning is ignored.
system. This chapter informs you about Uniform
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects. CAUTION
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle, or both, could result if the
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read. caution is ignored.
Chapter 8: Driving tips For models with EyeSight system:
This chapter informs you how to drive your For details about the EyeSight system, NOTE
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement A NOTE gives information or sugges-
plains some safety tips on driving. for the EyeSight system. tions how to make better use of your
Chapter 9: In case of emergency vehicle.
This chapter informs you what to do if you & Safety warnings
S00AB02
have a problem, such as a flat tire or You will find a number of WARNINGs,
engine overheating. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 10: Appearance care These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you how to keep your tial hazards that could result in injury to you
SUBARU looking good. or others.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service Please read these safety warnings as well
This chapter informs you when you need to as all other portions of this manual care-
take your SUBARU to the dealer for fully in order to gain a better understanding
scheduled maintenance and informs you of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.

(5,1)
& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

0
S00AB03 S00AB04
You may find several abbreviations in this LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- children
tions are shown in the following list. LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
Abbreviation Meaning
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
A/C Air conditioner ganese tricarbonyl
ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/ MT Manual transmission
Emergency locking retractor
OBD On-board diagnostics
ABS Anti-lock brake system
RAB Reverse Automatic Braking
AKI Anti knock index
RON Research octane number
ALR Automatic locking retractor
SRF Steering responsive fog lights
AWD All-wheel drive system
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do BSD/RCTA Blind Spot Detection/Rear Steering Responsive Head-
Cross Traffic Alert SRH
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this light
happen”, depending upon the context. CVT Continuously variable trans- Supplemental restraint sys-
mission SRS tem
DRL Daytime running light TIN Tire identification number
EBD Electronic brake force distri- Tire pressure monitoring sys-
bution TPMS tem
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

(6,1)
Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with
S00AC driving considerable speed and force.
There are some of the symbols you may S00AD
Occupants who are out of proper
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
S00AD01 deploys could suffer very serious
For warning and indicator lights, refer to injuries. Because the SRS airbag
“Warning and indicator lights” F23. WARNING
needs enough space for deploy-
Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle must ment, the driver should always sit
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE upright and well back in the seat
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other- as far from the steering wheel as
wise, the possibility of serious practical while still maintaining
injury becomes greater in the full vehicle control and the front
CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci- passenger should move the seat
dent. as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Read these instructions care- . To obtain maximum protection in
fully the event of an accident, the For instructions and precautions, carefully
driver and all passengers must read the following sections.
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
mental Restraint System) airbag belts” F1-12.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric does not do away with the need to . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
acid “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the tem airbag)” F1-39.
Keep children away best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Keep flames away Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
Prevent explosions vehicle has the SRS airbag.

(7,1)
& Child safety with considerable speed and themselves or others through 0
S00AD02
force and can injure or even kill inadvertent operation of the ve-
WARNING children, especially if they are not hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
restrained or improperly re- temperature in a closed vehicle
. Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are could quickly become high en-
in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults, ough to cause severe or possibly
moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from fatal injuries to them.
protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater. . When leaving the vehicle, close
collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT all windows and lock all doors.
be caught between the passen- IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
ger and objects inside the vehi- RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR For instructions and precautions, carefully
cle. DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- read the following sections.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
and small children should always CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. belts” F1-12.
be seated in the REAR seat in an . Always turn the child safety locks . For the child restraint system, refer to
infant or child restraint system to the “LOCK” position when “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
which is appropriate for the children sit in the rear seat. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
child’s age, height and weight. If Serious injury could result if a “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
a child is too big for a child child accidentally opens the door tem airbag)” F1-39.
restraint system, the child should and falls out. Refer to “Child
sit in the REAR seat and be safety locks” F2-27.
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, . Always lock the passenger’s win-
children are safer when properly dows using the lock switch when
restrained in the rear seating children are riding in the vehicle.
positions than in the front seating Failure to follow this procedure
positions. Never allow a child to could result in injury to a child
stand up or kneel on the seat. operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-28.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in . Never leave unattended children,
a child restraint device or in a adults or animals in the vehicle.
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys They could accidentally injure
– CONTINUED –

(8,1)
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
S00AD03 as possible. If you must drive below the legal limit. The safest thing you
WARNING under these conditions, drive can do is never drink and drive. However if
only with all windows fully open. you have no choice but to drive, stop
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while drinking and sober up completely before
Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas getting behind the wheel.
carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
and odorless gas which is dan- & Drugs and driving
S00AD05
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving WARNING
S00AD04
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering There are some drugs (over the
WARNING counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle.
Drinking and then driving is very delay your reaction time and impair
. Never run the engine in a closed your perception, judgment and at-
space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time tentiveness. If you drive after taking
for the brief time needed to drive them, it may increase your, your
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive passengers’ and other persons’ risk
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or fatal
hicle for a lengthy time while the a little – it will increase the risk of accident.
engine is running. If that is un- being involved in a serious or fatal
avoidable, then use the ventila- accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
tion fan to force fresh air into the your passengers and others. In your doctor or pharmacist or read the
vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the to determine if the drug you are taking can
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
or other obstructions to ensure after taking any medications that can make
Please don’t drink and drive. you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent have a medical condition that requires you
. If at any time you suspect that causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects to take drugs, please consult with your
exhaust fumes are entering the all people differently, you may have con- doctor.

(9,1)
Never drive if you are under the influence & Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped 0
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your S00AD07
with navigation system
own health and well-being, we urge you CAUTION S00AD09
not to take illegal drugs in the first place WARNING

and to seek treatment if you are addicted Your vehicle should not be modified
to those drugs. other than with genuine SUBARU Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do
& Driving when tired or sleepy of modifications could affect its not operate the controls of the
S00AD06
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving.
WARNING and may even violate governmental The loss of attention to driving could
regulations. In addition, damage or lead to an accident. If you wish to
When you are tired or sleepy, your performance problems resulting operate the controls of the naviga-
reaction time will be delayed and from modification may not be cov- tion system, first take the vehicle off
your perception, judgment and at- ered under warranties. the road and stop it in a safe
tentiveness will be impaired. If you location.
drive when tired or sleepy, your,
your passengers’ and other per- & Use of cell phones/texting
sons’ chances of being involved in and driving & Driving with pets
a serious accident may increase. S00AD16 S00AD10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
CAUTION driving and distract your attention from
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
Do not talk on a cell phone or text unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
sleepy. On long trips, you should make while driving; it may distract your
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
attention from driving and lead to an your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
before continuing on your journey. When accident. If you use a cell phone to
possible, you should share the driving with hurt under these situations. It is also for
talk or text, first pull off the road and their own safety that pets should be
others. park in a safe place. In some States/ properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on strain a pet with a special traveling harness
a phone while driving, but only if the which can be secured to the rear seat with
phone is hands-free. a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
– CONTINUED –

(10,1)
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the & Attaching accessories General information
front passenger’s seat. For further infor- S00AD15
S00AK
mation, consult your veterinarian, local WARNING & California Perchlorate Advi-
animal protection society or pet shop. sory
. Do not attach any accessories, S00AK03
Certain vehicle components such as air-
& Tire pressures labels or stickers (other than
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
S00AD11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres- properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such keyless entry transmitter batteries may
sure of each tire (including the spare) at contain perchlorate material. Special
least once a month and before any long items may obstruct your view.
handling may apply for service or vehicle
journey. . If it is necessary to attach an end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
accessory (such as an electronic hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are toll collection (ETC) device or
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the security pass) to the windshield,
tire pressures to the values shown on the & Noise from under the vehicle
consult your SUBARU dealer for S00AK01
tire placard. For detailed information, refer details on the proper location. NOTE
to “Tires and wheels” F11-21. You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
WARNING after the ignition switch is turned to the
Driving at high speeds with “LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
excessively low tire pressures noise is caused by the operation of the
can cause the tires to deform fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-
severely and to rapidly be- tem and the operation is normal. The
come hot. A sharp increase in noise will stop after approximately 15
temperature could cause tread minutes.
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of & Event data recorder
S00AK04
vehicle control could lead to This vehicle is equipped with an event data
an accident. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag

(11,1)
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
0
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the
designed to record data related to vehicle special equipment, can read the informa-
dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14

(14,1)
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Front wipers (page 3-74)
S00AE 3) Headlights (page 3-64)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-37)
S00AE01
5) Moonroof (page 2-32)
6) Roof rails (page 8-14)
7) Outside mirror (page 3-85)
8) Door locks (page 2-21)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog lights (page 3-71)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

(15,1)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-86)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-27)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 11-37)
6) Rear gate (page 2-30)
7) Towing hook (page 9-13)
8) Rear window wiper (page 3-76)
– CONTINUED –

(16,1)
14
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
& Interior system (page 1-34)
S00AE02
2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
! Passenger compartment area
S00AE0201 3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-2)
5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU
STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-
ual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security.

(17,1)
15
1) Power windows (page 2-28)
2) Door locks (page 2-21) 0
3) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-85)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-21)/
Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-24)
7) Seat heater switches (page 1-10)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) X-MODE switch (page 7-39)
10) Center console (page 6-6)
11) Parking brake lever (page 7-43)
– CONTINUED –

(18,1)
16
1) Steering responsive fog lights OFF
& Instrument panel switch (page 3-71)/Steering Responsive
S00AE03
Headlight off switch (page 3-69)
2) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-12)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Type A multi-function display (black and
white) (page 3-40)/Type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 3-45)
5) Audio and navigation system*
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
7) Climate control (page 4-2)
8) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-87)
9) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-53)
10) Fuse box (page 11-35)
11) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)
12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-37)
*: For details about how to use the audio
and navigation system, refer to the sepa-
rate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.

(19,1)
17
1) Audio control switches*
2) INFO button for type A multi-function 0
display (black and white) (page 3-40)/
INFO button for type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 3-45)
3) Cruise control (page 7-48)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-26)
5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-
88)
6) SRS airbag (page 1-39)
7) Horn (page 3-89)
8) Combination meter display (color LCD)
control switches (page 3-33)
9) Talk switch for voice command system*/
Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the
switches, refer to the separate naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –

(20,1)
18
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-73)
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 2) Mist (page 3-74)
S00AE04
3) Windshield washer (page 3-75)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-76)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-75)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-73)
7) Light control switch (page 3-63)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-71)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-64)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 3-65)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-72)

(21,1)
19
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
& Combination meter 2) Select lever/gear position indicator 0
S00AE05
(page 3-30)
! U.S.-spec. models (type A)
S00AE0538 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

(22,1)
20
! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator
S00AE0549
(page 3-30)
(page 3-33)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

(23,1)
21
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator 0
S00AE0531
(page 3-30)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
– CONTINUED –

(24,1)
22
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator
S00AE0519
(page 3-30)
(page 3-33)

(25,1)
23
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
0
S00AE06
AT OIL TEMP warning 3-18 High beam assist indi- 3-30
Mark Name Page light (CVT models) cator light (if equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-13 Automatic headlight

ABS warning light 3-20 beam leveler warning 3-31
light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-13 Steering Responsive
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-21
light Headlight warning
light/Steering Respon- 3-31
SRS airbag system sive Headlight OFF in-
warning light 3-15 Door open warning dicator light (if
/ light 3-22
equipped)
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indi- 3-15 AWD warning light Front fog light indicator 3-31
cator (CVT models) 3-22 light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag OFF in- 3-15 Power steering warn- Access key warning 3-25
dicator ing light 3-23 indicator (if equipped)
CHECK ENGINE Hill start assist warning

warning light/Malfunc- 3-15 light/Hill start assist 3-22 Security indicator light 3-29
tion indicator light OFF indicator light
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics Headlight indicator
low indicator light/ light (if equipped) 3-31
3-16 Control warning light/
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics 3-23
high warning light Control operation indi-
cator light Cruise control indica- 3-30
tor light (if equipped)
Charge warning light 3-17 Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 3-24 Cruise control set indi-
light cator light (if equipped) 3-31
Oil pressure warning 3-17
light
Turn signal indicator 3-30
lights X-MODE indicator (if 3-32
Engine oil level warn- equipped)
3-18
ing light
High beam indicator 3-30
light
– CONTINUED –

(26,1)
24
Mark Name Page
Hill descent control in- 3-32

dicator (if equipped)
Low fuel warning light 3-22
Low tire pressure

warning light 3-18
(U.S.-spec. models)
Windshield washer 3-18

fluid warning light
Steering responsive
fog lights warning indi-
cator/Steering respon- 3-31
sive fog lights OFF
indicator (if equipped)
BSD/RCTA warning 3-32

BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 3-32

cator (if equipped)
RAB warning indicator 3-32

(if equipped)
RAB OFF indicator (if 3-32

equipped)
Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator (if 3-32
equipped)

(27,1)
25
Function settings 0
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF01
If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manually
changed within the display to meet your personal requirements.
NOTE
If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items will need
to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer to“Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer” F28.
Item Page reference

Available settings Factory default setting for the vehicle
1st menu/vehicle system 2nd menu/adjustable
vehicle system setting
3rd menu/selectable ve-
hicle system setting
system opera-
tion
Welcome Screen — On/Off On 3-34
Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 3-34
Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 3-38
U.S.-spec models: mile,
Units — km, km/h, Liter/mile, MPH, Gallon 3-38
Screen Settings MPH, Gallon Other models: km, km/h,
Liter
Tire Pressure Units (if — kPa/PSi PSi 3-38
equipped)
English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec models: Eng-

Languages — çais/Japanese lish 3-38
Other models: Français
– CONTINUED –

(28,1)
26
Item Page reference

Available settings Factory default setting for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
7-57 and 7-71
For details about
EyeSight sys-
Warning Volume* — — Max/Mid/Min Mid tem, refer to the
Owner’s Manual
supplement for
the EyeSight
system.
Lead Vehicle Acquisition — On/Off On
Sound
Refer to the
Eyesight (models with Lead Vehicle Moving — On/Off On Owner’s Manual
EyeSight system) Monitor Function supplement for
the EyeSight
Cruise Control Accel- Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3 system.
eration Characteristics* — (Standard)/Lv.2 (Com- Lv.3 (Standard)
fort)/Lv.1 (ECO)
RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 7-71

(29,1)
27
Item Page reference

for the vehicle 0
Available settings Factory default setting
system opera-
tion
Audible Signal (if On/Off On 2-13
equipped)
Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 3-39
Security Relocking (if 20 seconds/30 seconds/

Keyless Entry System equipped) 40 seconds/50 seconds/ 30 seconds 3-39
60 seconds/Off
Driver Door Unlock (if Driver’s Door Only/All Driver’s Door Only 2-9
equipped)
Rear Gate Unlock (if Rear Gate Only/All Rear Gate Only 3-39
equipped)
Vehicle Setting Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 3-86
Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 6-3

30 seconds/Off
Auto Light Sensor (if — Low/Normal/High/Very High 3-64
equipped) high
Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 3-64

Welcome Lighting (if 90 seconds/Off
equipped) 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds
Leaving Time Set 90 seconds/Off 3-64
One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 3-73

Default Settings — — No/Yes — 3-39
*: You can also set this while driving.
– CONTINUED –

(30,1)
28
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF02
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-19
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-26
& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

S00AF03
A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Keyless Access (if equipped) Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Door unlock selection function (dri- Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
ver’s door unlock)
Door unlock selection function (rear Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
gate unlock)
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention func- Battery drainage prevention func- Operation/Non-operation Operation
tion tion

(31,1)
29
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

0
Alarm system Dome light, cargo area light, and ON/OFF OFF
map lights illumination
Monitoring start delay time (after 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
closure of doors)
Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto dimmer cancel (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
auto dimmer cancel
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off wiper-linked headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation
(if equipped)
High beam assist function (if High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
equipped)
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec models: Non-operation
Other models: Operation
One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane Operation/Non-operation Operation
changer
Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the Low/Normal/High/Very high High
auto on/off headlights
Defogger and deicer system for Rear window defogger, outside mir- Operation for 15 minutes/Continu- Operation for 15 minutes
models with the automatic climate ror defogger and windshield wiper ous operation
control system deicer
Dome light/Map lights/Cargo area Operation of dome light/map light/ OFF/10 seconds/20 seconds/30 30 seconds
light cargo area light OFF delay timer seconds

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(33,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2 Where to place a child restraint system ................ 1-27
S01 Choosing a child restraint system......................... 1-29
1
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-2
Front seats ............................................................ 1-5 Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
Rear seats ............................................................. 1-6 seatbelt ............................................................. 1-29
Head restraints ...................................................... 1-8 Installing a booster seat ....................................... 1-33
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
Seat heater (if equipped) ...................................... 1-10 lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................ 1-34
Safety precautions ................................................ 1-10 Top tether anchorages .......................................... 1-38
Operation.............................................................. 1-11
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
Seatbelts ................................................................ 1-12 airbag) ................................................................ 1-39
Seatbelt safety tips ............................................... 1-12 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)...................... 1-14 system .............................................................. 1-40
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................ 1-14 system for accessories and any objects............. 1-42
Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 1-14 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Fastening the seatbelt........................................... 1-14 system and children .......................................... 1-44
Seatbelt maintenance............................................ 1-20 Components ......................................................... 1-47
Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... 1-21 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-49
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner................ 1-21 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............... 1-60
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt SRS airbag system monitors................................. 1-68
pretensioners...................................................... 1-22 SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-69
System monitors................................................... 1-24 Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-70
System servicing .................................................. 1-24 How to contact the vehicle manufacturer
Precautions against vehicle modification............... 1-24 concerning modifications for persons with
Child restraint systems ........................................ 1-25 disabilities that may affect the advanced
Safety tips for installing child restraint systems .... 1-26 airbag system.................................................... 1-71

(34,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats
Seats always used in the upright posi-

S01AQ tion while the vehicle is running.
& Safety tips If the front seatbacks are not
S01AQ01 used in the upright position in a
! Safety tips for seat collision, the risk of sliding under
S01AQ0101
the lap belt and of the lap belt
WARNING sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Never adjust the seat while driv- serious internal injury or death.
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury. . The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are out of proper
sure the hands and feet of rear position when the SRS airbag
seat passengers and cargo are deploys could suffer very serious
clear of the adjusting mechan- injuries. Because the SRS airbag WARNING
ism. needs enough space for deploy- Place children in the rear seat prop-
. After adjusting the seat, move it ment, the driver should always sit erly restrained at all times. The SRS
back and forth to make sure it is upright and well back in the seat airbag deploys with considerable
securely locked. If the seat is not as far from the steering wheel as speed and force and can injure or
securely locked, it may move or practical while still maintaining even kill children, especially if they
the seatbelt may not operate full vehicle control and the front are not restrained or improperly
properly. passenger should move the seat restrained. Because children are
. Do not put objects under the front as far back as possible and sit lighter and weaker than adults, their
seats. They may interfere with upright and well back in the seat. risk of being injured from deploy-
front seat locking and cause an ment is greater. For that reason, we
accident. strongly recommend that ALL chil-
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- dren (including those in child seats
straint when the occupant sits and those that have outgrown child
well back and upright in the seat. restraint devices) sit in the REAR
To reduce the risk of sliding seat properly restrained at all times
under the seatbelt in a collision, in a child restraint device or in a
the front seatbacks should be seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

(35,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-3
for the child’s age, height and 1

weight. Secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including forward
facing child seat) in the REAR seats
at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- WARNING WARNING
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau- To prevent the passenger from slid- Do not let rear passengers rest their
tions concerning child restraint sys- ing under the seatbelt in the event of feet between the front seatback and
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- a collision, always put the seatback seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
tems” F1-25. in the upright position while the defective operation of the following
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not systems and could result in serious
place objects such as cushions injury.
between the passenger and the seat- . Occupant detection system
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt . SRS side airbag
sliding up over the abdomen will . Seat heater (if equipped)
increase, and both can result in . Power seat (if equipped)
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

(36,1)
! Safety tips for head restraint

S01AQ0102
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
WARNING WARNING you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
Seatbelts provide maximum re- Never stack luggage or other cargo straints correctly to protect vehi-
straint when the occupant sits well higher than the top of the seatback cle occupants.
back and upright in the seat. Do not because it could tumble forward and
. All occupants, including the dri-
put cushions or any other materials injure passengers in the event of a
ver, should not operate a vehicle
between occupants and seatbacks sudden stop or accident.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
head restraints are placed in their
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
proper positions in order to mini-
of the lap belt sliding up over the
mize the risk of neck injury in the
abdomen will increase, and both can
event of a crash.
result in serious internal injury or
death.

(37,1)
& Front seats ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s 1
S01AQ02 S01AQ020102
seat)
! Manual seat (if equipped) S01AQ020103
S01AQ0201
! Forward and backward adjust-

ment
S01AQ020101
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to The seatback placed in a reclined position
the desired position. Then release the can spring back upward with force when The height of the seat can be adjusted by
lever and try to move the seat back and the lever is pulled. While operating the moving the seat adjustment lever up and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked lever to return the seatback, hold the down.
into place. seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
– CONTINUED –

(38,1)
! Power seat (driver’s seat – if & Rear seats ! Folding down the rear seatback
S01AQ03 S01AQ0302
equipped)
S01AQ0202 ! Armrest (if equipped) WARNING
S01AQ0301
. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the rear
seat. Not doing so creates a risk
of injury or property damage if
the seatback suddenly folds
down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
1) Seat position forward/backward con- . Secure all objects and especially
trol switch To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge long items properly to prevent
To adjust the seat forward or backward, of the armrest. them from being thrown around
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad- inside the vehicle and causing
WARNING serious injury during a sudden
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion height. To avoid serious injury, passengers stop, a sudden steering maneu-
2) Seat height control switch must never be allowed to sit on the ver or a rapid acceleration.
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push center armrest.
down the rear end of the control switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.

(39,1)
WARNING 1
When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precaution.
Failure to observe the precaution
may damage the seatbelt, impairing
its effectiveness, and possibly re-
sult in a serious injury.
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, pull the
seatbelt out towards the vehicle
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock exterior so that it will not be Lock release knob
release knob and then fold the seatback caught between the seatback 1) Unlocked
down. and the trim. 2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
! Return the rear seatback
S01AQ0303 To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
longer visible.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease knob is not visible. Also, move
the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely fixed in
place. If the seatback is not securely
fixed in place, the seatback may
– CONTINUED –

(40,1)
suddenly fold down in the event of ! Front seats To install:

S01AQ0401
sudden braking, or objects may Both the driver’s seat and the front Install the head restraint into the holes that
move out from the cargo area, which passenger’s seat are equipped with head are located on the top of the seatback until
could cause serious injury or death. restraints. Both head restraints are adjus- the head restraint locks. Press and hold
table in the following ways. the release button to lower the head
restraint.
& Head restraints ! Height adjustment
S01AQ040101
S01AQ04
WARNING
The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be in-
stalled into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats, or
the rear seat head restraints into the
front seats.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
1) Head restraint that the center of the head restraint is
NOTE 2) Release button closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
It is possible to adjust the angle of the
To raise:
front seat head restraints only. When NOTE
installing the front seat head restraints, Pull the head restraint up.
When the head restraint cannot be
make sure that the angle of the head To lower: pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
restraints can be adjusted. Push the head restraint down while press- cient clearance between the head re-
ing the release button on the top of the straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
seatback. then perform the installation and re-
To remove: moval tasks.
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.

(41,1)
! Angle adjustment ! Rear seats After installing the head restraint, make
S01AQ040102 S01AQ0402
sure it is securely locked.
1
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head ! Rear center seating position
restraints. S01AQ040202
! Rear windows side seating posi- CAUTION

tion
S01AQ040201 The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
1) Head restraint
To tilt: 2) Release button
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the To remove:
preferred position. A click will be audible
While pressing the release button, pull out
when the head restraint is locked.
the head restraint.
To return: 1) Incorrect (retracted position)
To install:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward 2) Correct (extended position)
Install the head restraint into the holes that
as it can go. The head restraint will
are located on the top of the seatback until
automatically return to the fully upright
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
the release button to lower the head
again to the preferred angle.
restraint.
– CONTINUED –

(42,1)
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
When the rear-center seating position is Seat heater (if equipped)

occupied, raise the head restraint to the S01AB
extended position. When the rear center
The seat heater is equipped in the front
seating position is not occupied, lower the
seats.
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity. The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
& Safety precautions

S01AB03
CAUTION
1) Head restraint . People with delicate skin may
2) Release button suffer slight burns even at low
To raise: temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
Pull the head restraint up.
When using the heater, always be
To lower: sure to warn the persons con-
Push the head restraint down while press- cerned.
ing the release button on the top of the
. Do not put anything on the seat
seatback.
which insulates against heat,
To remove: such as a blanket, cushion, or
While pressing the release button, pull out similar items. This may cause the
the head restraint. seat heater to overheat.
To install: . When the seat is warmed enough
Install the head restraint into the holes that or before you leave the vehicle,
are located on the top of the seatback until be sure to turn off the seat heater.
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.

(43,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater 1-11
NOTE & Operation To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or
1
S01AB04 “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
Use of the seat heater for a long period depending on the temperature.
of time while the engine is not running Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
can cause battery discharge. seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side

(44,1)
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
Seatbelts reversed. In an accident, this can

S01AE increase the risk or severity of
& Seatbelt safety tips injury.
S01AE01
. Keep the lap belt as low as
WARNING possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
. All persons in the vehicle should lap belt over stronger hip bones
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE instead of across the weaker
the vehicle starts to move. Other- abdomen.
wise, the possibility of serious
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
injury becomes greater in the
straint when the occupant sits
event of a sudden stop or acci-
well back and upright in the seat.
dent.
To reduce the risk of sliding
. All belts should fit snugly in order under the seatbelt in a collision,
to provide full restraint. Loose WARNING
the front seatbacks should be
fitting belts are not as effective in always used in the upright posi- Never place the shoulder belt under
preventing or reducing injury. tion while the vehicle is running. the arm or behind the back. If an
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup- If the front seatbacks are not accident occurs, this can increase
port only one person. Never use a used in the upright position in a the risk or severity of injury.
single belt for two or more per- collision, the risk of sliding under
sons – even children. Otherwise, the lap belt and of the lap belt
in an accident, serious injury or sliding up over the abdomen will CAUTION
death could result. increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death. Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies become very hot in a vehicle that has
including retractors and attach- . Do not put cushions or any other
been closed up in sunny weather;
ing hardware worn by occupants materials between occupants
they could burn an occupant. Do not
of a vehicle that has been in a and seatbacks or seat cushions.
touch such hot parts until they cool.
serious accident. The entire as- If you do so, the risk of sliding
sembly should be replaced even under the lap belt and of the lap Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
if damage is not obvious. belt sliding up over the abdomen sensing and diagnostic module, which will
. Never use a belt that is twisted or will increase, and both can result record the use of the seatbelt by the front
in serious internal injury or death.

(45,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-13
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, times. cannot be properly positioned, a child
side and curtain airbags deploy. restraint system should be used. Never
1
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS place the shoulder belt under the child’s
! Infants or small children
S01AE0101
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO arm or behind the child’s back.
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint THE CHILD BY PLACING THE ! Expectant mothers
S01AE0103
systems” F1-25. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
! Children
S01AE0102 According to accident statistics,
WARNING restrained in the rear seating posi-
Place children in the rear seat prop- tions than in the front seating posi-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS tions. For instructions and precau-
airbag deploys with considerable tions concerning the child restraint
speed and force and can injure or system, refer to “Child restraint
even kill children, especially if they systems” F1-25.
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are If a child is too big for a child restraint
lighter and weaker than adults, their system, the child should sit in the rear seat
risk of being injured from deploy- and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the
ment is greater. For that reason, we According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
strongly recommend that ALL chil- are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt
dren (including those in child seats rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as
and those that have outgrown child seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist.
restraint devices) sit in the REAR stand up or kneel on the seat.
seat properly restrained at all times If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
in a child restraint device or in a the face or neck, move the child closer to
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate the belt buckle to help provide a good
for the child’s height and weight. shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
Secure ALL types of child restraint securely place the lap belt as low as
devices (including forward facing possible on the hips and not on the child’s
child seats) in the REAR seats at all waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
– CONTINUED –

(46,1)
& Emergency Locking Retrac- the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, 2. Sit well back in the seat.
tor (ELR) the seatbelt must be changed over to the 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
S01AE02 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR). When the child restraint system is re- . If the belt stops before reaching the
moved, make sure that the seatbelt re- buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
The emergency locking retractor allows
tracts fully and the retractor returned to the out more slowly.
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop, Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly mode. the belt retract slightly after giving it a
out of the retractor. For instructions on how to convert the strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
Emergency Locking Retrac- restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
tor (ALR/ELR) F1-29.
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic and chime S01AE04
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”

Retractor normally functions as an Emer- F3-13.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) S01AE06
mode” intended to secure a child restraint ! Front seatbelts

S01AE0601
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn 1. Adjust the seat position according to 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
out completely and is then retracted even the following procedure. until you hear a click.
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
that position and the seatbelt cannot be upright position. Move the seat as far from
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks the steering wheel as practical while still
will be heard which indicate the retractor maintaining full vehicle control.
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released. Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
When securing a child restraint system on as far back as possible.

(47,1)
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING 1

belt anchor height
S01AE060101
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060102
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on The shoulder belt anchor height should be
your hips, not on your waist. adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
up.
To lower:
1. Push the button on the buckle.
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place. Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –

(48,1)
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center ! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060201
seatbelt)
S01AE0602
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

the shoulder belt. 1. Push the button on the buckle.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
your hips, not on your waist. avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

(49,1)
! Rear center seatbelt 1

S01AE0603 WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- . Be sure to fasten both tongue
bing twisted can increase the risk or plates to the respective buckles.
severity of injury in an accident. If the seatbelt is used only as a
When fastening the belt after it is shoulder belt (with the connec-
pulled out from the retractor, espe- tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
cially when inserting the connec- the connector’s buckle on the
tor’s tongue plate into the mating right-hand side), it cannot prop-
buckle (on right-hand side), always erly restrain the wearer in posi-
check that the webbing is not tion in an accident, possibly
twisted. resulting in serious injury or
death.
. The head restraint is not intended
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate to be used at the lowest position.
2) Connector (tongue) Before sitting on the seat, raise
3) Connector (buckle)
the head restraint to the extended
4) Center seatbelt buckle
position. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
– CONTINUED –

(50,1)
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 4. After confirming that the webbing is not
tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside. is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder on the right side of the cargo area
and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

(51,1)
7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.
1
! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060301
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate 2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
into the center seatbelt buckle marked pointed object into the slot in the connector
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it
clicks. in. The connector (tongue) plate will then
1. Push the release button of the center disconnect from the buckle.
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.

the shoulder belt.
– CONTINUED –

(52,1)
& Seatbelt maintenance

S01AE07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
belts because this could seriously affect
their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other- battery acid.
wise, the metal tongue plates . Never attempt to make modifica-
may hit against the trim, resulting tions or changes that will prevent
in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.

(53,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-21
Seatbelt pretensioners your SUBARU dealer. as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
1
S01AF . When discarding seatbelt retrac-
tor assemblies equipped with you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
seatbelt pretensioners or scrap- is equipped with seatbelt preten-
pretensioner.
ping the entire vehicle due to sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the
. Driver’s seatbelt contents in this section.
. Front passenger’s seatbelt collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed dealer. & Seatbelt with shoulder belt
to be activated in the event of an accident pretensioner
S01AF01
involving a moderate to severe frontal and NOTE
side collision and rollover accident. NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- This section is applicable to the follow-
WARNING signed to activate in minor impacts or ing components.
in rear impacts. . Driver’s seatbelt
. To obtain maximum protection, . Pretensioners are designed to func-
the occupants should sit in an tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
upright position with their seat- event that a pretensioner is activated,
belts properly fastened. Refer to both the driver’s and front passenger’s
“Seatbelts” F1-12. seatbelt retractor assemblies should
. Do not modify, remove or strike be replaced only by an authorized
the seatbelt retractor assemblies SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
equipped with seatbelt preten- belt retractor assemblies, use only
sioners or surrounding area. This genuine SUBARU parts.
could result in accidental activa- . If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners pretensioner does not retract or cannot
or could make the system inop- be pulled out due to a malfunction or
erative, possibly resulting in ser- activation of the pretensioner, contact
ious injury. Seatbelt preten- your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos- Front seatbelt pretensioner
sioners have no user-serviceable sible.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
parts. For required servicing of . If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
follows.
seatbelt retractors equipped with surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon . SRS frontal airbag sensor
seatbelt pretensioners, consult
– CONTINUED –

(54,1)
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners
. Side impact sensor ! In cases of rollover accident, frontal On the front passenger’s side, the
. Front door impact sensor collisions or side collisions, the shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-
. Rollover sensor following components will operate ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
simultaneously located at the base of the center pillar. Like
If the sensor detects a certain predeter- S01AF0101
For details, refer to “In cases of rollover the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
mined amount of force during frontal or accident, frontal collisions or side colli- pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
side collisions or rollover accidents, any sions, the following components will oper- belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is ate simultaneously” F1-23. frontal collision force is detected. As a
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
take up the slack so that the belt more occupant more effectively.
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
and lap belt pretensioners The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes S01AF02 sioner includes a tension reducing device
a tension reducing device which limits the
NOTE which limits the peak forces exerted by the
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the This section is applicable to the front seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
occupant in the event of a collision. passenger’s side seatbelt. collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, reducing load to the suit body size of
an operating noise will be heard and a occupant as detected by the occupant
small amount of smoke will be released. detection sensor.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
fire in the vehicle. an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been These occurrences are normal and not
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not fire in the vehicle.
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
belt pretensioner and adaptive force cannot be pulled out and retracted and
limiter) therefore must be replaced.
2) Lap belt pretensioner

(55,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-23
! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously 1
S01AF0201
Driver’s side Front passen- Front passen- SRS frontal SRS frontal
seatbelt pre- ger’s side ger’s side lap airbag for dri- airbag for front SRS curtain SRS side air-
tensioner shoulder belt belt preten- ver passenger airbags bags
pretensioner sioner
Rollover accidents * * – – – * –
both sides
*1
Frontal collisions * * * * * – –
Offset frontal * * * * * *1 * –
collisions both sides
Side collisions **3 **4 – – – * **2

impacted side impacted side
Rear impact – – – – – – –
Minor impact – – – – – – –
*: Activated
–: Not activated
*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.
*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.
*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the
seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the
seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
– CONTINUED –

(56,1)
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners
& System monitors the seatbelt pretensioner, con- operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
A diagnostic system continually monitors
S01AF03
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- as soon as possible.
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner er.
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. & Precautions against vehicle
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
CAUTION modification
control module with the SRS airbag S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
system. Therefore, if any malfunction The sensors and SRS airbag control want to install any accessory parts to your
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the modules are located in the following vehicle.
SRS airbag system warning light will locations.
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag CAUTION
system monitors” F1-68. . Front sub sensors: on both the
right and left side at the front of
Do not perform any of the following
the vehicle
& System servicing modifications. Such modifications
S01AF04 . Front door impact sensors: on can interfere with proper operation
WARNING both front doors of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Satellite safing sensor: under the . Attachment of any equipment
. When discarding a seatbelt re- rear center seat (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
tractor assembly or scrapping . SRS airbag control module (in- skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
the entire vehicle damaged by a cluding the impact sensors): un- ine SUBARU accessory parts to
collision, consult your SUBARU der the center of the instrument the front end.
dealer. panel . Modification of the suspension
. Tampering with or disconnecting If you need service or repair in those system or front end structure.
the system’s wiring could result areas or near the front seatbelt
in accidental activation of the . Installation of a tire of different
retractors, have the work performed size and construction from the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
SRS airbag or could make the tires specified on the vehicle
system inoperative, which may placard attached to the driver’s
result in serious injury. Do not door pillar or specified for indivi-
NOTE dual vehicle models in this Own-
use electrical test equipment on If the front or side part of the vehicle is
any circuit related to the seatbelt er’s Manual.
damaged in an accident to the extent
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys- that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
tems. For required servicing of

(57,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-25
Child restraint systems Children could be endangered in an WARNING

accident if their child restraints are not
1
S01AG
properly secured in the vehicle. When . Before installing a child restraint
installing the child restraint system, care- system, be sure to confirm that
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. the seatback is securely locked
According to accident statistics, children into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
are safer when properly restrained in the dent, serious injury or death
rear seating positions than in the front could result.
seating positions. . Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior tem-
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces peratures may cause heat stroke
require that infants and small children be and dehydration that result in
restrained in an approved child restraint serious injury or death.
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt Lock release knob
(except those described in “Installation of 1) Unlocked
child restraint systems by use of lower and 2) Locked
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-34). A) Unlocking marker in red
– CONTINUED –

(58,1)
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
ving, or accidents.
WARNING WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
Never let a passenger hold a child on Children should be properly re- belts can become hot in a vehicle
his or her lap or in his or her arms strained at all times. Never allow a that has been closed up in sunny
while the vehicle is moving. The child to stand up, or to kneel on any weather; they could burn a small
passenger cannot protect the child seat. Unrestrained children will be child. Check the child restraint
from injury in a collision, because thrown forward during sudden stop system before you place a child
the child will be caught between the or in an accident and can be injured in it.
passenger and objects inside the seriously. . Do not leave an unsecured child
vehicle. Additionally, children standing up or restraint system in your vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your kneeling on or in front of the front Unsecured child restraint sys-
lap or arms in the front seat exposes seat are exposed another serious tems can be thrown around in-
that child to another serious danger. danger. Since the SRS airbag de- side of the vehicle in a sudden
Since the SRS airbag deploys with ploys with considerable speed and stop, turn or accident; they can
considerable speed and force, the force, the child could be injured or strike and injure vehicle occu-
child could be injured or even killed. even killed. pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
& Safety tips for installing child

restraint systems CAUTION
S01AG16
When you install a child restraint
WARNING system, follow the manufacturer’s
. Do not use a seat belt extender. If instructions supplied with it. After
a seat belt extender is used when installing the child restraint system,
installing a child restraint sys- check to ensure that it is held
tem, the seat belt will not se- securely in position. If it is not held
curely hold the child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
system. Use of a seat belt exten- child suffering personal injury in the
der could cause death or serious event of an accident may be in-
injury to children or other pas- creased.
sengers in sudden braking, swer-

(59,1)
& Where to place a child re- . Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

1
straint system gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
S01AG01 belts
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint . Lower anchorages (bars)
system in your vehicle. . Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
WARNING Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection
. Several types of child restraint of the seat cushion.
systems may conceal the buckle In this seating position, you should use
of the neighboring seat. If the only a child restraint system that has a
occupant of the neighboring seat bottom base that fits snugly against the
cannot correctly fasten the seat- contours of the seat cushion and can be
belt, that person must move to a A: Front passenger’s seat securely retained using the seatbelt.
different seat. If the seatbelt can- You should not install a child restraint C: Rear seat, center seating position
not be correctly fastened, there is system (including a booster seat) due to
the risk of serious injury or death the hazard to children posed by the The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
in the event of sudden braking or passenger’s airbag. anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-
a collision. vided in this position.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating Some types of child restraints might not be
. If the child restraint system can- positions able to be secured firmly due to projection
not be correctly installed be-
Recommended positions for all types of of the seat cushion.
cause it contacts the driver’s
child restraint systems. In this seating position, you should use
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it In these positions, the following equipment only a child restraint system that has a
cannot be installed in a different is provided for installing a child restraint bottom base that fits snugly against the
seat (other than the driver’s seat), system. contours of the seat cushion and can be
adjust the front seat so that securely retained using the seatbelt.
contact does not occur. When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seat’s center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat in
– CONTINUED –

(60,1)
the center seating position if a child priate for the child’s age, height
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc- and weight. According to acci-
tions permit and specify using anchors as dent statistics, children are safer
far apart as those in this vehicle. when properly restrained in the
If a child restraint system is not correctly rear seating positions than in the
fixed in place (for example, if a child front seating positions.
restraint system can be moved more than . Do not use lower anchorages
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you (bars) for a seat in the center
should install the child restraint system in a seating position unless a child
rear seat, window-side seating position. restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
WARNING using anchors spaced as far
. Even with advanced airbags, chil- apart as those in this vehicle.
dren can be seriously injured by . Do not connect two or more lower WARNING
the airbag. Place children in the hooks onto the same anchorage
rear seat properly restrained at (bar). . SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
all times. The SRS airbag deploys EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-
with considerable speed and GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-
force and can injure or even kill STALL A CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
children, especially if they are not THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
restrained or improperly re- RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
strained. Because children are DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
lighter and weaker than adults, CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
their risk of being injured from CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
deployment is greater. . Do not allow children to lean their
For that reason, be sure to secure heads or other body parts against
ALL types of child restraint de- the door of the vehicle, or the
vices (including forward facing areas around the door. Deploy-
child seats) in the REAR seats at ment of the SRS side and curtain
all times. You should choose a airbags could impact the child
restraint device which is appro- resulting in death or serious

(61,1)
injury. & Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- 1
. To secure the child restraint sys- system tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
S01AG02 S01AG04
tem, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided CAUTION
by the child restraint manufac-
turer. Not doing so could result in When installing a child restraint
death or serious injury to chil- system in the rear center seating
dren in a sudden stop or acci- position, set both seatbacks to the
dent. original position. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, which may re-
sult in death or serious injuries in
the event of sudden stop, sudden
steering maneuver or an accident.
Choose a child restraint system that is ! Installing a rearward facing child

appropriate for the child’s age and size restraint
S01AG0401
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child WARNING
restraint system should meet all applicable
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT
Safety Standards for the United States or IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
for Canada. It can be identified by looking DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
for the label on the child restraint system or CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
the manufacturer’s statement of compli- CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
ance in the document attached to the . Before installing a child restraint
system. system, be sure to confirm that
Also it is important for you to make sure the seatback is securely locked
that the child restraint system is compa- into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be dent, serious injury or death
used. could result.
– CONTINUED –

(62,1)
position to be safe. For details, refer mode.

to “Where to place a child restraint (2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
system” F1-27. retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through functions as ALR.
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker which is attached to the
bottom of the lock release knob is
invisible. For details, refer to “Folding 7. Push and pull the child restraint system
down the rear seatback” F1-6. forward and from side to side to check if it
2. Place the child restraint system in the is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
rear seating position. restraint can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
WARNING 5. Take up the slack in the lap belt. then tightening the seatbelt.
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is 8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
When you intend to install a child
recommended by the manufacturer’s in- mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
restraint system in the rear center
structions supplied with the child restraint of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
seating position, if the child restraint
system, perform the following procedure. pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat (1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
cushion, install the child restraint retractor to change the retractor over from
system in the window-side seating the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

(63,1)
! Installing forward facing child re- restraint. For details, refer to “Rear
seats” F1-9.
1
straint
S01AG0402
Store the head restraint in the cargo
WARNING area. Avoid placing the head restraint
in the passenger compartment to pre-
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT vent it from being thrown around in the
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO passenger compartment in a sudden
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR stop or a sharp turn.
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO – When a child restraint system is
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. installed on the rear center seating
position, raise the rear seat head
. Before installing a child restraint restraint to the extended position. Do
system, be sure to confirm that not remove the head restraint. For
9. To remove the child restraint system, the seatback is securely locked details, refer to “Rear seats” F1-9.
press the release button on the seatbelt into place. Otherwise, in an acci- 3. Place the child restraint system in the
buckle and allow the belt to retract dent, serious injury or death rear seating position.
completely. The belt will return to the could result.
ELR mode. WARNING
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
NOTE confirm that it is securely locked into place. When you intend to install a child
– Check that the red colored unlock- restraint system on the rear center
When the child restraint system is no
ing marker which is attached to the seating position, if the child restraint
longer in use, remove it and restore the
bottom of the lock release knob is system does not fit snugly against
ELR function of the retractor. That
invisible. For details, refer to “Folding the contours of the rear center seat
function is restored by allowing the
down the rear seatback” F1-6. cushion, install the child restraint
seatbelt to retract fully.
2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint system on the window-side seating
where a child restraint system is intended position to be safe. For details, refer
to be installed in the following way. to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-27.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the window-side seating
position, remove the rear seat head
– CONTINUED –

(64,1)
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through 6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Before having a child sit in the child
or around the child restraint system follow- 7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
ing the instructions provided by its manu- retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
facturer. the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to secured. Sometimes a child restraint
– When a child restraint system is the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system can be more firmly secured by
installed on the rear center seating function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into pushing it down into the seat cushion and
position, pass the rear center seatbelt the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, then tightening the seatbelt.
through the belt guide properly. For clicks will be heard which indicate the 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt” retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
F1-17. properly functioning).

(65,1)
press the release button on the seatbelt & Installing a booster seat 1
buckle and allow the belt to retract S01AG05
completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.
If you have installed a child restraint
system for the rear center seating posi-
tion, when you remove the child restraint
system, the seatbelt may not be restored
to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is
retracted. In this case, lower the head
restraint to the retracted position to allow
the seatbelt to retract moreover. The
seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.
10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind the Remember that the head restraint is not
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. intended to be used at the lowest position
seating position and sit the child on it.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top (retracted position). Therefore, when the
The child should sit well back on the
tether anchorages” F1-38. rear center seat is occupied (including
booster seat.
when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
restraint to the extended position. or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
NOTE manufacturer.
When the child restraint system is no 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
longer in use, remove it and restore the until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
ELR function of the retractor. That the seatbelt.
function is restored by allowing the Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
seatbelt to retract fully. across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
11. To remove the child restraint system,

– CONTINUED –

(66,1)
effective in preventing or redu- & Installation of child restraint

cing injury. systems by use of lower and
. Place the lap belt as low as tether anchorages (LATCH)
S01AG07
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in- ! Lower and tether anchorages
S01AG0701
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
4. To remove the booster seat, press the shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and result in neck injury during sud-
allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or WARNING
reversed. In an accident, this can Attach the child restraint system to
increase the risk or severity of the anchors properly. When using
injury to the child. the LATCH anchors, be sure that
. Never place the shoulder belt there are no foreign objects around
under the child’s arm or behind the anchors. Also, the seat belts
the child’s back. If an accident should not be caught behind the
occurs, this can increase the risk child restraint system. Make sure
or severity of injury to the child. the child restraint system is se-
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in curely attached. Otherwise it may
order to provide full restraint. cause death or serious injury to
Loose fitting belts are not as children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or acci-

(67,1)
dents. ! Lower anchorages ! Tether anchorages 1

S01AG070101 S01AG070102
Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for The tether anchorages (upper an-
installing a child restraint system only on chorages) are provided at the locations
the rear seat window-side seating posi- shown in the above illustration. For details,
tions. For each window-side seating posi- refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-38.
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
– CONTINUED –

(68,1)
! To install a child restraint system

using lower and tether an-
chorages
S01AG070103
To install a child restraint system using
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
following procedure.
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result. 2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of Remove the covers and locate the lower
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks anchorages (bars).
1. Move the seatback back and forth to indicate the positions of the lower an- 3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
confirm that it is securely locked into place. chorages (bars). For details, refer to “Rear seats” F1-9.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker which is attached to the CAUTION
bottom of the lock release knob is
invisible. For details, refer to “Folding Store the head restraint that has
down the rear seatback” F1-6. been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in
the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in
the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or a sharp turn.

(69,1)
4. While following the instructions sup- 5. [If your child restraint system is of a 7. Before seating a child in the child
plied by the child restraint system manu- flexible attachment type (which uses tether restraint system, try to move it back and
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the belts to connect the child restraint system forth and right and left to verify that it is held
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on properly to the lower anchorages)] securely in position.
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the While pushing the child restraint into the 8. To remove the child restraint system,
hooks are connected, make sure the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt. If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
SUBARU dealer.
tether anchorage that is located behind the
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
tether anchorages” F1-38.
– CONTINUED –

(70,1)
& Top tether anchorages ! Anchorage location ! To hook the top tether
S01AG09 S01AG0901 S01AG0902
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint CAUTION
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing a child . Except for the center seating
restraint system using top tether, proceed position, remove the head re-
as follows, while observing the instructions straint when mounting a child
by the child restraint system manufacturer. restraint system. Otherwise, it
might be possible that the top
Since a top tether can provide additional tether cannot be fastened tightly.
stability by offering another connection . For the center seating position,
between a child restraint system and the raise the center head restraint to
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top the extended position when
tether whenever one is required or avail- mounting a child restraint sys-
able. tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-
sible to use the seatbelt guide
that is attached to the head
restraint correctly.
The seatbelt guide is essential for
routing the belt webbing at the
center seating position. For in-
formation about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center
seatbelt” F1-17.
1) For left seat

2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on
the back side of the rear seatback.

(71,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-39
*SRS airbag (Supplemental 1

Restraint System airbag)
S01AH
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used because
the airbag system supplements the vehi-
cle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a lap/
shoulder belt at each front seating position
and each rear window-side seating posi-
tions. The supplemental restraint system
1. Attach the top tether hook to the 1) Seatbelt guide (SRS) consists of seven airbags.
appropriate upper anchorage. 2) Seatbelt of the center seating position
3) Top tether
The configurations are as follows.
For the center seating position, route . Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
the top tether under the head restraint as 2. Tighten the top tether securely. airbags
illustrated below. Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you . Driver’s and front passenger’s side
have any question regarding the installa- airbags
tion of a child restraint system. . Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
. Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” F1-21.
– CONTINUED –

(72,1)
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& General precautions regard- . The SRS side airbag and SRS
ing SRS airbag system curtain airbag are designed only
S01AH10 to be a supplement to the primary
WARNING protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the
. To obtain maximum protection in need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
the event of an accident, the important to wear your seatbelt to
driver and all passengers must help avoid injuries that can result
always wear seatbelts when in when an occupant is not seated
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is in a proper upright position.
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the WARNING
seatbelts, it offers the best com-
bined protection in case of a . The SRS airbags deploy with
serious accident. considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
Not wearing a seatbelt increases position when the SRS airbag
the chance of severe injury or deploys could suffer very serious
death in a crash even when the injuries. Because the SRS airbag
vehicle has the SRS airbag. needs enough space for deploy-
For instructions and precautions ment, the driver should always sit
concerning the seatbelt system, upright and well back in the seat
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12. as far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.

(73,1)
the front or rear door on either there remains a possibility that 1

side. Also, do not put your head, an occupant may suffer minor
arms or hands out of the window. injury such as abrasions and
The SRS curtain airbags on both bruises to the face or arms be-
sides of the cabin are stored in cause of the SRS airbag deploy-
the roof side (between the front ment force.
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in
the event of a side impact, roll-
over or an offset frontal collision.
However, the force of its deploy-
ment may cause injuries if your
WARNING head is too close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The close to the SRS airbag. Because
SRS side airbags are stored in the SRS airbag deploys with
both front seat seatbacks next to considerable speed – faster than
the door, and they provide pro- the blink of an eye – and force to
tection by deploying rapidly (fas- protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure WARNING
ter than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact. However, an occupant whose body is too . Do not rest your arm on either
the force of SRS side airbag close to SRS airbag. front door or its internal trim. You
deployment may cause injuries It is also important to wear your could be injured in the event of
if your head or other parts of the seatbelt to help avoid injuries SRS side airbag deployment.
body are too close to the SRS that can result when the SRS . Do not place any objects over or
side airbag. airbag contacts an occupant not near the SRS airbag cover or
. Since your vehicle is equipped in proper position such as one between you and the SRS airbag.
with SRS curtain airbags, do not thrown forward during pre-acci- If the SRS airbag deploys, these
sit or lean unnecessarily close to dent braking. objects could interfere with its
Even when properly positioned,
– CONTINUED –

(74,1)
proper operation and could be NOTE

propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
CAUTION notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
tion in this Owner’s Manual.
. When the SRS airbag deploys, . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
some smoke will be released. supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
This smoke could cause breath- of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
ing problems for people with a details about restarting of the engine,
history of asthma or other breath- refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
ing trouble. If you or your pas- accident” F9-20.
sengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys, & General precautions regard- WARNING
get fresh air promptly.
ing SRS airbag system for . Do not put any objects (including
. A deploying SRS airbag releases accessories and any objects
hot gas. Occupants could get S01AH13
straps or cords) over the steering
burned if they come into direct wheel pad, column cover, or
contact with the hot gas. dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag

(75,1)
deploys, those objects could in- the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- pillar, the windshield, a side win- 1
terfere with its proper operation jects could become projectiles that dow, an assist grip, or any other
and could be propelled inside the could seriously injure vehicle occu- cabin surface that would be near
vehicle, causing injury. pants. a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
. The key must not be attached to hands-free microphone or other
heavy, sharp or hard acces- accessory in such a location
sories, or another key. If the SRS could be propelled through the
knee airbag deploys, those ob- cabin with great force by the
jects could interfere with its curtain airbag, or it could prevent
proper operation and could be correct deployment of the curtain
propelled inside the vehicle and airbag. In either case, the result
cause injury. could be serious injuries.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s WARNING
WARNING occupants and cause injuries.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not attach a hands-free micro- Do not hang coat hangers or other
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
– CONTINUED –

(76,1)
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, face on or near the SRS side & General precautions regard-
they could cause serious injuries by airbag. They could prevent prop- ing SRS airbag system and
coming off the coat hooks and being er deployment of the SRS side children
thrown through the cabin or by airbag, reducing protection avail- S01AH14
preventing deployment of the cur- able to the front seat’s occupant.

tain airbags. . Do not install a seat cover unless
Before hanging clothing on the coat it is a genuine SUBARU seat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp cover exclusively designed for
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- use with the SRS airbag. Even
ing directly on the coat hooks with- when using a genuine SUBARU
out using hangers. seat cover, the SRS side airbag
system may not function nor-
mally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
WARNING
Place children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
WARNING lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
. Do not put any kind of clothes or ment is greater.
other objects over either front
seatback and do not attach labels For that reason, we strongly recom-
or stickers to the front seat sur- mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that

(77,1)
have outgrown child restraint de- 1

vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at all
times.
According to accident statistics,
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi- WARNING WARNING
tions.
For instructions and precautions NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN Never allow a child to stand up or
concerning the child restraint sys- THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys- SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO The SRS airbag deploys with con-
tems” F1-25. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE siderable force and can injure or
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO even kill the child.
THE SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –

(78,1)
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
WARNING
SRS curtain airbag deployment
Never hold a child on your lap or in could injure the child seriously
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys because his/her head, arms or
with considerable force and can other parts of the body are too
injure or even kill the child. close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.

(79,1)
& Components The SRS airbags are stowed in the

1
S01AH11 following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under the
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point behind
the rear quarter glass)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS knee airbag
– CONTINUED –

(80,1)
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor and rollover sensor) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) hand side)
10) Airbag wiring

(81,1)
& SUBARU advanced frontal ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at- different ways depending on the severity
1
airbag system tached to the glove box lid beginning with of impact.
S01AH02 the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
advanced frontal airbag system that com- the instructions on the warning labels and
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag tag.
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
No. 208. advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
system automatically determines the de- occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal seated in an appropriate child restraint
airbag at the time of deployment as well as system.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
activated, the deployment force of the SRS to “Components” F1-47.
SRS airbag system warning light
frontal airbag at the time of deployment. In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
Have the system inspected by your
the following components deploy.
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
. SRS frontal airbag for driver airbag system warning light illuminates.
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS knee airbag for driver NOTE
. SRS curtain airbag*1 The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs. tem.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
Your vehicle has warning labels on the S01AH0201
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH stage inflator. The inflator operates in
– CONTINUED –

(82,1)
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- airbag deploys. This is normal. In this seat.
bag case, although the front passenger’s SRS . Do not place anything (shoes,
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag frontal airbag does not operate, the front umbrella, etc.) under the front
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper- passenger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt . Do not place any objects (books,
the severity of impact. etc.) around the front passen-
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” F1-21. ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
CAUTION seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the . Do not leave any articles on the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag front passenger’s seat or the
system from functioning correctly seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
or cause the system to fail. gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such . Do not put sharp object(s) on the
as by kicking. seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
1) Occupant detection sensors . Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat- . Do not place a magnet near the
The occupant detection system sensors back and seat cushion. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
are installed between the seat and seat retractor.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
rails, and monitor the physique and pos- . Do not use front seats with their
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
ture of the front passenger. Using this forward-backward position and
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
information, the occupant detection sys- seatback not being locked into
tem determines whether the front passen- . Do not remove or disassemble place securely. If any of them are
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de- the front passenger’s seat. not locked securely, adjust them
ployed or not. . Do not install any accessory again. For adjusting procedure,
(such as an audio amplifier) other refer to “Forward and backward
The occupant detection system may not
than a genuine SUBARU acces- adjustment” F1-5 and “Reclining
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
sory under the front passenger’s the seatback” F1-5.
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

(83,1)
NOTE ! Occupant detection system 1

S01AH0209
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
S01AH0203

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front 1) Occupant detection sensors
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn- The occupant detection system sensors
ing light will illuminate. Have the system are installed between the seat and seat
inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme- rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning ture of the front passenger. Using this
light illuminates. information, the occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
may affect the proper function of the indicator ployed or not.
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
Have your vehicle inspected at your indicator
WARNING
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle ON and OFF indicators” F3-15. Do not kick the front passenger seat
to your SUBARU dealer. or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light may illuminate to indicate a
malfunction of the front passenger
occupant detection system. In this
– CONTINUED –

(84,1)
case, contact your SUBARU dealer

immediately.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- SRS airbag system warning light ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
tion of the occupant detection sys- indicator
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
tem. If either of the following situa- / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of indicator
tions occurs when using an electro-
the system to determine deployment.
nic device in the vehicle, at first try If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
to relocate that device to avoid it and OFF indicators do not work properly
dry naturally and then check the SRS
creating any interference. even when the front passenger’s seat is
airbag system warning light.
. The SRS airbag system warning dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
light illuminates. passenger’s seat and have the occupant
. The front passenger’s frontal air- detection system checked by your
bag ON and OFF indicators oper- SUBARU dealer.
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.

(85,1)
! Conditions in which front passen- SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR 1

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not seats are the safest place for chil-
activated dren.
S01AH0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding CAUTION
the front passenger’s seat: When the front passenger’s seat is
. The seat is empty. occupied by an infant in an appro-
. The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system, ob-
priate child restraint system and an infant serve the following precautions.
or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN- Failure to do so may interfere with
ING that follows.) the proper operation of the occupant
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON . The front passenger’s occupant detec- detection system, activating the
indicator tion system is malfunctioning. front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF even though that seat is occupied by
indicator WARNING the infant in the child restraint
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are system.
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this . Do not place any article (includ-
THE FRONT SEAT EVEN IF THE
may adversely affect the ability of the ing electronic devices) on the
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
system to determine deployment. This seat other than the infant in the
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal child restraint system.
sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work- correct manner. Also, it is strongly . Do not place more than one infant
ing properly. Check that the indicators recommended that any forward fa- in the child restraint system.
work properly. cing child seat or booster seat be
When the OFF indicator turns off and the installed in the REAR seat, and that
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- even children who have outgrown a
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a child restraint system be also seated
collision. Remove luggage and electronic in the REAR seat. This is because
devices from the front passenger’s seat. children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
injured should the front passenger’s
– CONTINUED –

(86,1)
! If the front passenger’s frontal system. depending on the occupant’s seating

airbag ON indicator illuminates 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posture. Children should always wear a
and the OFF indicator turns off position and make sure that the front seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
even when an infant or a small passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator spective of whether the airbag is deac-
child is in a child restraint sys- turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. tivated or activated. If the front passen-
tem (including booster seat) ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH020401
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated (the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the while the OFF indicator turns off), take
following actions. the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the . Ensure that no article is placed on
seat other than the child restraint system the seat other than the occupant.
and the child occupant. If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off
sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
moving the seat back and forth. small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
an inspection. Even if the system has
while the OFF indicator turns off after
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
passed the dealer inspection, it is
taking relevant corrective actions de-
indicator recommended that on subsequent trips
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF the child/small adult always take the
system to the rear seat and immediately
indicator rear seat.
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ inspection. Children who have outgrown a child
“OFF” position. restraint system should always wear the
2. Remove the child restraint system from
NOTE seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
the seat. When a child who has outgrown a child is deactivated or activated.
restraint system or a small adult is
3. By referring to the child restraint
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
as the child restraint system installation
system may or may not activate the
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
F1-25, correctly install the child restraint

(87,1)
! Conditions in which front passen- ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
OFF indicator illuminates and the position.
1
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
will be activated for deployment upon while the ON indicator remains off, take the
impact when any of the following condi- occupied by an adult
S01AH020501 following actions.
tions are met regarding the front passen- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
ger’s seat. “OFF” position.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. 2. Make sure that the front passenger
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
are placed on the seat. cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON system to complete self-checking. Follow-
indicator ing the system check, both indicators turn
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly remains off.
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
2. Ask the front passenger to set the and immediately contact your SUBARU
seatback to the upright position, sit up dealer for an inspection.
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
– CONTINUED –

(88,1)
! Operation The SRS airbags can function only when

S01AH0207
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of
the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. the front sub sensors
. the impact sensors in the airbag control
module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
A) Driver’s side also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.

(89,1)
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would not
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. protect the occupant in those situations.
1
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- SRS airbag deployment depends on the
components around the steering
neously, depending on the severity of level of force experienced in the passen-
wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ger compartment during a collision. That
hands right after deployment. Doing
frontal airbag and depending on the level differs from one type of collision to
so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic another, and it may have no bearing on the
components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air- ! Example of accident in which the
bag. driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
! Example of the type of accident
! After deployment S01AH0211 senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
S01AH0210 The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- S01AH021101
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed as follows.
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s . to deploy in the event of an accident
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is involving a moderate to severe frontal
not impaired. The time required from collision
detecting impact to the deflation of the . to function on a one-time-only basis
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed as follows.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, . to deploy in most lesser frontal im-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pacts*1
pretensioners operate at the same time. . to deploy in most side or rear impacts or
in most rollover accidents*2
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, A head-on collision against a thick con-
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and *1: Because the necessary protection can be crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
some smoke will be released. These achieved by the seatbelt alone. mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
occurrences are a normal result of the *2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
deployment. This smoke does not indicate SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and front
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
a fire in the vehicle. airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
– CONTINUED –

(90,1)
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a ! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
frontal impact similar in fashion and dents in which it is possible that driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
magnitude to the collision described the driver’s/driver’s and front airbags may be activated when the vehicle
above. passenger’s SRS frontal sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
airbag(s) will deploy riage area from the road surface (such as
S01AH021102 when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).

(91,1)
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ telephone pole or sign pole. 1
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
S01AH021103
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

(92,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are not designed to deploy once either or both of the driver’s and front
dents in which the driver’s/dri- in most of the following cases. passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS . If the vehicle is struck from the side or activated on the first impact, it/they will
frontal airbag(s) are not de- from behind not be activated on the second impact.
signed to deploy in most cases . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof & SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH021104
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed curtain airbag
frontal collision S01AH03
! SRS side airbag

1) First impact S01AH0302
2) Second impact The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which
In an accident where the vehicle is bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal In a moderate to severe side impact
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impact. impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
Example: In the case of a double collision, and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
first with another vehicle, then against a the impact on the occupant’s chest and
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS concrete wall in immediate succession, waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

(93,1)
for front seat occupants. ! Operation

S01AH0301 1
! SRS curtain airbag The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
S01AH0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU airbag can function only when the ignition
SRS curtain airbag system that complies switch is in the “ON” position.
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety The following airbags deploy indepen-
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226. dently of each other since each has its
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the own impact sensor.
cabin is stored in the roof side (between . Driver’s SRS side airbag
the front pillar and a point over the rear
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located
at the top of each center pillar. . SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
In a moderate to severe side impact . SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
between the occupant and the side win- and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s
reducing the impact on the occupant’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel
head. and instrument panel.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the An impact sensor, which senses impact
occupant and the side window and supple- force, is located in each of the following
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to locations.
the occupant’s head. . In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy . In the left and right rear wheel houses
between the occupant and the side win- . Under the rear center seat
dow and supplement the seatbelt by A rollover sensor is also located inside the
reducing the impact to the occupant’s airbag control module.
head and chest.
– CONTINUED –

(94,1)
! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously
S01AH0306
SRS side airbags SRS curtain airbags Seatbelt pretensioner

(shoulder belt pretensioner only)
Impact sensors affected
Impacted side Non-impacted Impacted side Non-impacted Impacted side Non-impacted
side side side
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- front doors
sors together * – * – * –
sense an impact Impact sensor
force under rear cen-
ter seat
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- center pillars
sors together * – * – – –
sense an impact Impact sensor
ter seat
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- rear wheel
sors together houses
sense an impact – – * – – –
Impact sensor
ter seat
Rollover sensor in airbag control – * * * *
module
*: Activated
–: Not activated

(95,1)
! After deployment After deployment, do not touch any experienced in the passenger compart-
S01AH0304
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- ment during a side impact collision. That
1
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time tem (from the front pillar to the part level differs from one type of collision to
required from detection of an impact to of the roof side over the rear seat). another, and it may have no bearing on the
deflation of an SRS side airbag after Doing so can cause burns because visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
deployment is shorter than the blink of an the components can be very hot as a
! Example of the type of accident in
eye. result of deployment.
which the SRS side airbag will
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated most likely deploy.
! Example of the type of accident S01AH030501
for a while following deployment then S01AH0305
slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain . to deploy in the event of an accident
airbag deploy even when no one occupies involving a moderate to severe side impact
the seat on the side on which an impact is collision
applied. . to function on a one-time-only basis.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud airbag are not designed to deploy in the
inflation noise will be heard and some following cases:
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy- . in most lesser side impact
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire . in most frontal or most rear impacts
in the vehicle. (because the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
CAUTION tect the occupant in those situations)
Do not touch the SRS side airbag The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
system components around the signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
front seat seatback with bare hands extremely inclined state such as during a
right after deployment. Doing so can rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
cause burns because the compo- most lesser inclined state.
nents can be very hot as a result of SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment. deployment depend on the level of force
– CONTINUED –

(96,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
likely deploy. 2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
S01AH030502
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.

(97,1)
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side surface 1
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
S01AH030503
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –

(98,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to on impact.
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030504
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.

(99,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely on impact. 1
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030505
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

(100,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
dents in which the SRS side
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in In the event of accidents like those on the second.
most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH030506
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
in most cases.

1) First impact A diagnostic system continually monitors
2) Second impact the readiness of the SRS airbag system
A) SRS curtain airbag (including front seatbelt pretensioners)
B) SRS side airbag
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck The SRS airbag system warning light will
from the side more than once, the SRS show normal system operation by illumi-
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy nating for approximately 6 seconds when
only once on the first impact. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station-

(101,1)
The following components are monitored WARNING & SRS airbag system servicing 1
by the indicator: S01AH05
. Front sub sensor If the warning light exhibits any of WARNING

. Airbag control module (including im- the following conditions, there may
pact sensor and rollover sensor) be a malfunction in the seatbelt . When discarding an airbag mod-
. Frontal airbag module pretensioners and/or SRS airbag ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
system. cle damaged by a collision, con-
– Driver’s side
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- sult your SUBARU dealer.
– Front passenger’s side
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) ing light . The SRS airbag has no user-
. No illumination of the warning serviceable parts. Do not use
. Side airbag sensor
light when the ignition switch is electrical test equipment on any
. Front door impact sensor circuit related to the SRS airbag
. Side airbag module first turned to the “ON” position
system. For required servicing of
. Curtain airbag sensor . Continuous illumination of the the SRS airbag, consult your
. Curtain airbag module warning light nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Illumination of the warning light ing with or disconnecting the
center seat) while driving system’s wiring could result in
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) Immediately take your vehicle to accidental inflation of the SRS
your nearest SUBARU dealer to airbag or could make the system
. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
have the system checked. Unless inoperative, which may result in
force limiter (front passenger’s side)
checked and properly repaired, the serious injury.
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side) seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- CAUTION
the event of a collision, which may
ger’s side)
increase the risk of injury. If you need service or repair in areas
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor indicated in the following list, have
. Front passenger’s occupant detection the work performed by an author-
control module ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and airbag modules are stored in
and OFF indicator
these areas.
. All related wiring
– CONTINUED –

(102,1)
. Under the center of the instru- NOTE & Precautions against vehicle
ment panel
In the following cases, contact your
modification
S01AH06
. On both the right and left sides at SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
the front of the vehicle
. The front part of the vehicle was WARNING
. Steering wheel and column and involved in an accident in which only To avoid accidental activation of the
nearby areas the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both system or rendering the system
. Bottom of the steering column driver’s and front passenger’s SRS inoperative, which may result in
and nearby areas frontal airbags did not deploy. serious injury, no modifications
. Top of the dashboard on front . The pad of the steering wheel, the should be made to any components
passenger’s side and nearby cover over the front passenger’s SRS or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear This includes following modifica-
. Each front seat and nearby area seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- tions.
. Inside each center pillar wise damaged. . Installation of custom steering
. Inside each front door . The center pillar, front door, rear wheels
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an . Attachment of additional trim ma-
. In each roof side (from the front
area near these parts, was involved in terials to the dashboard
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
an accident in which the SRS side
. Between the rear seat cushion . Installation of custom seats
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
and rear wheel house on each deploy. . Replacement of seat fabric or
side . The fabric or leather of either front leather
. Under the rear center seat seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise . Installation of additional fabric or
damaged. leather on the front seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is . The rear part of the vehicle was . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
deployed, replacement of the system involved in an accident in which no crophone or any other accessory
should be performed only by an author- SRS airbag was deployed. to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- rear pillar, the windshield, a side
nents of the SRS airbag system are window, an assist grip, or any
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU other cabin surface that would be
parts. near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.

(103,1)
. Installation of additional electri- etc.) other than genuine SUBARU <Hawaii>

cal/electronic equipment such as accessory parts to the side body.
1
Subaru Hawaii
a mobile two-way radio on or near 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
the SRS airbag system compo- Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
nents and/or wiring is not advi- want to install any accessory parts on your 808-839-2273
sable. This could interfere with vehicle.
proper operation of the SRS air- <Guam>
bag system. & How to contact the vehicle Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
manufacturer concerning bile
modifications for persons 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
CAUTION Dededo, Guam 96921-6225
with disabilities that may af-
Do not perform any of the following fect the advanced airbag 671-633-2698
modifications. Such modifications system <Puerto Rico>
S01AH15
can interfere with proper operation Changing or moving any parts of the front Trebol Motors
of the SRS airbag system. seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
. Attachment of any equipment front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828
skid plate, etc.) other than genu- steering column, tire, suspension or floor
ine SUBARU accessory parts to panel can affect the operation of the <Canada>
the front end. SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you Subaru Canada, Inc.
. Modification of the suspension have any questions, you may contact the Consumer Support Department
system or front end structure. following SUBARU distributors. 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
. Installation of a tire of different <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District L5R 4J7
size and construction from the of Columbia> 1-800-894-4212
tires specified on the vehicle Subaru of America, Inc. There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
placard attached to the driver’s Customer Retailer Services Department tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
door pillar or specified for indivi- P.O. Box 6000 in such an area, please contact the
dual vehicle models in this Own- SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
er’s Manual. Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) you bought your vehicle.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(107,1)
Keys and doors

Keys ......................................................................... 2-2 Setting audible signal operation
S02
Key number plate................................................... 2-2 (models without “keyless access with push-
button start system”) ......................................... 2-19
Keyless access with push-button start system Replacing the battery............................................ 2-20 2
(if equipped) ......................................................... 2-2 Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-20
Safety precautions ................................................. 2-3 Certification for remote keyless entry system........ 2-20
Locking and unlocking by holding the access
key fob ................................................................ 2-6 Door locks............................................................. 2-21
Unlock using PIN Code Access ............................. 2-10 Locking and unlocking from the outside ............... 2-21
Power saving function .......................................... 2-11 Locking and unlocking from the inside ................. 2-22
Power saving function of access key fob .............. 2-12 Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-23
Disabling keyless access function......................... 2-12 Battery drainage prevention function .................... 2-24
Selecting audible signal operation......................... 2-13 Alarm system ........................................................ 2-24
Warning chimes and warning indicator.................. 2-13 Alarm system operation........................................ 2-25
When access key fob does not operate properly ... 2-14 Arming the system ............................................... 2-25
Replacing battery of access key fob ...................... 2-14 Disarming the system ........................................... 2-26
Replacing access key fob ..................................... 2-14 Alarm system setting............................................ 2-26
Certification for keyless access with push-button If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
start system........................................................ 2-14 system .............................................................. 2-27
Immobilizer ............................................................ 2-15 Valet mode ........................................................... 2-27
Security indicator light .......................................... 2-15 Child safety locks ................................................. 2-27
Key replacement ................................................... 2-15 Windows................................................................ 2-28
Certification for immobilizer system ...................... 2-16 Power window operation....................................... 2-28
Remote keyless entry system.............................. 2-17 Initialization of power window with one-touch
Locking the doors................................................. 2-18 auto up/down function ....................................... 2-30
Unlocking the doors.............................................. 2-18 Rear gate ............................................................... 2-30
Unlocking the rear gate ......................................... 2-19 Lock/unlock.......................................................... 2-31
Vehicle finder function .......................................... 2-19 Open/close ........................................................... 2-31
Sounding a panic alarm ........................................ 2-19 Moonroof (if equipped)......................................... 2-32
Moonroof switches ............................................... 2-33
Sunshade ............................................................. 2-34

(108,1)
2-2 Keys and doors/Keys
Keys . Glove box Keyless access with push-

S02AA
NOTE button start system (if
NOTE equipped)
Locking/unlocking using the remote
For models with “keyless access with keyless entry system can also be con- S02AP
push-button start system”, refer to trolled with the buttons on the key. For The following access key fobs are pro-
“Keyless access with push-button start detailed information, refer to “Remote vided with the vehicle.
system” F2-2. keyless entry system” F2-17.
The following keys are provided with the
vehicle. CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
& Key number plate 1) Access key fob (main)

S02AA01
The key number is stamped on the key 2) Access key fob (sub)
number plate attached to the key set. Write 3) Key number plate
1) Master key (Main) down the key number and keep it in The keyless access with push-button start
2) Master key (Sub) another safe place, not in the vehicle. This system allows you to perform the following
3) Sub key number is needed to make a replacement functions when you are carrying the
4) Key number plate key if you lose your key or lock it inside the access key fob.
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2- . Locking and unlocking of the doors and
A key can be used in the following
15. rear gate. Refer to “Locking and unlocking
locations.
. Ignition switch by holding the access key fob” F2-6.
. Driver’s door . Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and

(109,1)
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-3
stopping engine (models with push-button & Safety precautions

start system)” F7-11. S02AP11
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- WARNING

tem. For detailed information, refer to 2
“Alarm system” F2-24. If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
NOTE least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
. Locking/unlocking using the remote transmitting antennas installed on
keyless entry system can also be con- the vehicle.
trolled with the buttons on the access The radio waves from the transmit-
key fob. For detailed information, refer ting antennas on the vehicle could
to “Remote keyless entry system” F2- adversely affect the operation of
17. implanted pacemakers and im-
. Carefully store the key number plate 1) Release button planted defibrillators.
supplied with the access key fob. It is 2) Emergency key
necessary for vehicle repair and addi- If you wear electronic medical equip-
While pressing the release button of the ment other than an implanted pace-
tional registration of access key fobs. access key fob, take out the emergency
For details, refer to “Key replacement” maker or an implanted defibrillator,
key. before using the keyless access
F2-15.
The emergency key is used for the follow- with push-button start system, refer
An emergency key is attached to each ing operations. to “Radio waves used for the key-
access key fob. . Locking and unlocking the driver’s door less access with push-button start
. Locking and unlocking the glove box system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electronic medical equip-
NOTE ment manufacturer for more infor-
The glove box can be kept locked when mation. The radio waves from the
you leave your vehicle and the access transmitting antennas on the vehicle
key fob (with the emergency key re- could adversely affect the operation
moved) at a parking facility. of the electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-
tem”
– CONTINUED –

(110,1)
2-4 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
. The keyless access with push- CAUTION

button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre- . Never leave or store the access
quency* in addition to the radio key fob inside the vehicle or
waves used for the remote key- within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
less entry system. The radio vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
waves are periodically output access key fob may be locked
from the antennas installed on inside the vehicle, or the battery
the vehicle as shown in the may discharge rapidly. Note that
following illustrations. the push-button ignition switch
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key battery replaced at
an authorized SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
1) Antenna
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
such as on the dashboard. It

(111,1)
may damage the battery or the operation of the airplane. and power transmission lines
cause circuit malfunctions. When carrying the access key – When products that transmit
– Do not wash the access key fob in a bag, take measures to radio waves are used, such as an
prevent the buttons from being access key fob or a remote trans- 2
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
pressed accidentally. mitter key of another vehicle
– Do not leave the access key
– When carrying the access key fob
fob in humid or dusty loca-
of your vehicle together with the
tions. Doing so may cause NOTE access key fob or the remote trans-
malfunctions. . The operational/non-operational mitter of another vehicle
– Keep the access key fob away setting for the keyless access function – When the access key fob is
from magnetic sources. can be changed. For the setting proce- placed near wireless communica-
– Do not leave the access key dure, refer to “Disabling keyless action equipment such as a cell phone
fob near a personal computer cess function” F2-12. – When the access key fob is
or home electrical appliance. . For detailed information about the placed near a metallic object
operation method for the push-button – When metallic accessories are
– Do not leave the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac- attached to the access key fob
fob near a battery charger or
cess function is switched to the non-
any electrical accessories. – When carrying the access key fob
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– Do not apply metallic window with electronic appliances such as a
fob – if access key fob does not operate
tint or attach metallic objects laptop computer
properly” F9-17.
to the windows. . The keyless access with push-but- – When the battery of the access
ton start system uses weak radio key fob is discharged
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts. waves. The status of the access key . The access key fob is always com-
fob and environmental conditions may municating with the vehicle and is
. If the access key fob is dropped, continuously using the battery.
the integrated emergency key in- interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the Although the life of the battery varies
side may become loose. Be care- depending on the operating conditions,
ful not to lose the emergency key. vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
. When traveling in an airplane, do unlock the doors or start the engine. battery becomes fully discharged, re-
not press the button of the ac- – When operating near a facility place it with a new one.
cess key fob. If any button of the where strong radio waves are trans- . If an access key fob is lost, it is
access key fob is pressed, radio mitted, such as a broadcast station recommended that all of the remaining
waves are emitted and may affect access key fobs be reregistered. For
– CONTINUED –

(112,1)
reregistration of an access key fob, – On the instrument panel ! Operating ranges

contact a SUBARU dealer. – On the floor S02AP2001
. For a spare access key fob, contact a – Inside the glove box
SUBARU dealer. – Inside the door trim pocket
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be – On the rear seat
registered for one vehicle. – In the cargo area
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle, If you do, the following situations
such as the door pocket, dashboard, may occur.
inside the corner of the cargo area. – The access key fob is mistakenly
Vibrations may damage the key fob or locked inside the vehicle.
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in – A false warning issues although
a lockout. no malfunction actually occurs.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- – No warning issues even when
charged or replaced, initialization of any malfunction occurs. 1) Antenna
the steering lock system may be re- 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
quired to start the engine. In this case, in (40 to 80 cm))
perform the following procedure to & Locking and unlocking by
initialize the steering lock. holding the access key fob
S02AP20
(1) Turn the push-button ignition When the access key fob is carried within
switch to the “OFF” position. For the operating range, the doors and the rear
details, refer to “Switching power gate can be locked/unlocked just by
status” F3-7. touching the door handle.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door. NOTE
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- The vehicle can also be locked/un-
onds. locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
When the steering is locked, the initi- keyless entry system” F2-17.
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in 1) LED indicator
the following places.

(113,1)
When the access key fob is within either of function when the access key fob is . Unlock and lock rear gate
the operating ranges of the front doors, the inside the vehicle. However, depending
LED indicator on the access key fob on the status of the access key fob and NOTE
flashes. When the keyless access func- the environmental conditions, the ac- . It is not possible to lock the doors 2
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does cess key fob may be locked inside the and rear gate using the keyless access
not flash unless a button on the access key vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, function when the push-button ignition
fob is pressed. make sure that you have the access switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
key fob. Refer to “Switching power status” F3-
NOTE . When the battery of the access key 7.
. If the access key fob is placed too fob is discharged, or when operating it . If the door handle is gripped with a
close to the vehicle body, the keyless in a location with strong radio waves or gloved hand, the door lock may not be
access functions may not operate noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power released.
properly. If they do not operate prop- plant, broadcast station or an area . If the door lock sensor is touched
erly, repeat the operation from further where wireless equipment is used), or three times or more repeatedly, the
away. while talking on a cell phone, the system will ignore the sensor opera-
. If the access key fob is placed near operating ranges may be reduced, or tion.
the ground or in an elevated location the keyless access function may not . When performing the locking proce-
from the ground, even if it is in the operate. dure too quickly, locking may not have
indicated operating range, the keyless In such a case, perform the procedure been completed. After performing the
access function may not operate prop- described in “Locking and unlocking” locking procedure, it is recommended
erly. F9-17. to pull the REAR door handle to confirm
. When the access key fob is within . The doors may lock or unlock when that the doors have been locked.
the operating range, it is possible for the car is being washed or exposed to a . If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
anyone, even someone who is not significant amount of water that con- are not fully closed, the following will
carrying the access key fob, to operate tacts the door handle while the key fob occur to alert you that the doors (or the
the keyless access function. Note that is still in the operating range. rear gate) are not properly closed.
the keyless access function can be – an electronic chirp sounds five
operated only by the door handle, door ! How to lock and unlock times.
S02AP2002
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or It is possible to perform the following – the hazard warning flashers flash
rear lock button in the operating range operations when you are carrying the five times.
in which the access key fob is detected. access key fob. . It is possible to lock the doors even
. It is not possible to lock the doors . Lock and unlock the doors when one of the doors is open. After
and rear gate using the keyless access
– CONTINUED –

(114,1)
performing the locking procedure, ! Locking with the door lock sensor ! Locking with the rear lock button
close the opened door or rear gate to S02AP200201 S02AP200202
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate by using the keyless access func-
tion.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your 1) Door lock sensor 1) Rear lock button
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with Carry the access key fob, close all doors Carry the access key fob, close all doors
the combination meter display (color including the rear gate, and touch the door including the rear gate and press the rear
LCD), the setting of the hazard warning lock sensor on the door handle. All doors lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
flasher operation can be changed by including the rear gate will be locked. Also, be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
operating the combination meter dis- an electronic chirp will sound once and the sound once and the hazard warning
play (color LCD). For details, refer to hazard warning flashers will flash once. flashers will flash once.
“Keyless Entry System” F3-39.

(115,1)
! Unlocking ! Unlocking rear gate ! Door unlock selection function

S02AP200203 S02AP200204 S02AP2003
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors 2
that were set can be unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display (color
LCD) (if equipped). Refer to “Keyless Entry
System” F3-39.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
Carry the access key fob, and grip the 1) Rear gate opener button
following door handle. Carry the access key fob, and press the
. The driver’s door handle: rear gate opener button. Either only the
Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or rear gate will unlock, or all doors will
all doors will unlock. unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
. The front passenger’s door handle: twice and the hazard warning flashers will
All doors and rear gate will be unlocked. flash twice.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
– CONTINUED –

(116,1)
& Unlock using PIN Code Ac- ! Preparation for registering a PIN ! Registration for a PIN code
S02AP2102
cess code
S02AP2101
For example, to register “32468” as the
S02AP21
When all doors including the rear gate are 1. Turn off the ignition switch. PIN code, perform the following proce-
locked, you can unlock the doors (includ- 2. Close all doors (including rear gate). dure.
ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the 3. Press and hold the “ ” button on the 1. Press the rear lock button three times.
rear lock button. access key fob. Then all doors (including 2. After a chirp sounds once, press the
rear gate) will be locked. rear lock button twice.
4. Keep the “ ” button pressed, and 3. After a chirp sounds once, press the
press the rear lock button within 5 seconds rear lock button four times.
after step 3. 4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
5. Press and hold the rear lock button for the rear lock button six times.
more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp 5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
sound. the rear lock button eight times.
6. Release the “ ” button and rear lock 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
button. approximately 30 seconds after the chirp
7. Press the “ ” button on the access key starts sounding intermittently.
fob while the chirp sounds. 7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- Then the PIN code will be registered.
1) Rear lock button tion is complete.
NOTE NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds
key fob is accidentally left in the of step 6 to end the preparation mode
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5- and move on to the registration stage.
digit security code (PIN code) be regis- Unless the “ ” button is pressed within
tered. 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code
registration will be canceled.

(117,1)
NOTE . The PIN code cannot be deleted & Power saving function
while the keyless access function is S02AP23
The keyless access function will be dis-
. Press the rear lock button ten times disabled by operating the access key
to enter “0”. abled in the following cases to protect the 2
fob. access key fob battery and the vehicle
. Change the PIN code frequently to . Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
protect your vehicle from theft. battery.
lowing case.
. If you have lent your vehicle to . Case 1: When the keyless access
– when you forget the PIN code
another person, confirm that the PIN function and the remote keyless entry
– when you want to change the PIN system have not been used for 2 weeks
code has not been changed or deleted.
code or longer while all doors are locked
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code. ! Unlocking Operate one of the following items to
. If you make an error during the S02AP2103
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis- recover the keyless access function:
registration procedure, press the “ ” tration for a PIN code”. – Unlock the doors by operating any
or “ ” button on the access key fob.
procedure other than gripping the front
Then, start over from the procedure NOTE passenger’s door handle
described in “Preparation for register- . You cannot unlock by PIN Code
ing a PIN code”. – Lock the doors
Access in the following cases. – Open a door and then close it
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
– when the access key fob is within
you cannot register a string of the same . Case 2: When the access key fob has
the operating ranges
five numbers together, such as been left in the operating range for 10
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position minutes or longer while all doors are
. Do not register your vehicle license locked
plate number or simple numbers such . If you make an operation error dur-
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. ing the unlocking procedure, start over Operate one of the following items to
Doing so will increase the risk of with the unlocking procedure after recover the keyless access function:
vehicle theft. waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
– Unlock the doors by gripping the
. When you try to register “22222”, the . To protect your vehicle from theft, a
door handle
registered PIN code will be deleted. You buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
are entered five times continuously. If – Unlock the doors by pressing the
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code rear gate opener button
Access until a new code is registered. this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5 – Lock the doors by touching the door
. After registering a new PIN code, lock sensor
make sure that you can unlock the minutes.
– Lock or unlock the doors by using
doors using the PIN code.
– CONTINUED –

(118,1)
the remote keyless entry system and push-button start system will not be . To start the engine while the func-
– Lock or unlock the doors by using available. tions are disabled, perform the proce-
the power door locking switch To cancel the power save mode, press one dure described in “Starting engine”
– Open either of the front doors of the buttons on the access key fob. F9-18.
! Disabling functions
& Power saving function of ac- & Disabling keyless access S02AP0701
cess key fob function ! By operating the access key fob

S02AP22 S02AP07 S02AP070102
This function stops the access key fob If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
from receiving signals and helps minimize WARNING Code Access, you can disable the keyless
the battery consumption of the access key access function by operating the access
fob. If you wear an implanted pacemaker key fob. For details about registering a PIN
or an implanted defibrillator, per- code, refer to “Preparation for registering a
1. Press the “ ” button twice while hold-
form the procedure described in PIN code” F2-10.
ing the “ ” button.
“By operating the driver’s door”
1. Open the driver’s door.
F2-13 to disable the keyless access
function. If you perform the proce- 2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock
dure described in “By operating the position.
access key fob” F2-12, the opera-
tion of an implanted pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be af-
fected by the radio waves from the
transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

NOTE
times to notify that the setting is complete. . The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is 3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
When the access key fob is in the power
not disabled. button on the access key fob simulta-
save mode, the keyless access function

(119,1)
neously for more than 5 seconds. performed, push “ ” of the power door tion was disabled.
locking switch twice while the door is open. – When disabling by operating the
A chirp sound will be heard, and the driver’s door: a chirp will not be
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is
function will be disabled.
performed, close and open the driver’s heard 2
! By operating the driver’s door door once. – When disabling by operating the
S02AP070101
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is access key fob: a chirp will be heard
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door. performed, close the door.
& Selecting audible signal op-
A chirp sound will be heard, and the eration
functions will be disabled. S02AP12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
NOTE give you an audible signal when the doors
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
locking switch slowly. If the switch is the audible signal off. For more details,
pressed quickly, the functions may not contact a SUBARU dealer.
be disabled. NOTE
! Enabling functions For models with the combination meter
S02AP0702
When the procedure to disable the func- display (color LCD), the setting can be
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will changed by operating the combination
be heard, and the functions are enabled. meter display (color LCD). For details,
refer to “Vehicle Setting” F3-39.
2. Push “ ” of the power door locking
switch. NOTE
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is . The keyless access function will be & Warning chimes and warning
performed, open the driver’s door. enabled only if you perform the proce- indicator
dure in the same manner you disabled S02AP06
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is The keyless access with push-button start
the function (for example, when dis-
performed, push “ ” of the power door system sounds a warning chime and
abling by operating the driver’s door,
locking switch twice while the door is open. flashes the access key warning indicator
the function will not be enabled even if
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is on the combination meter in order to
you operate the access key fob).
performed, close and open the driver’s minimize improper operations and help
. Press the push-button ignition
door twice. protect your vehicle from theft.
switch if you do not know the proce-
6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is dure in which the keyless access func- For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
– CONTINUED –

(120,1)
warning indicator of the keyless access & Certification for keyless ac- . Canada-spec. models
with push-button start system” F3-25. cess with push-button start
system
& When access key fob does S02AP14
. U.S.-spec. models
not operate properly
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
fob does not operate properly” F9-17. FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
& Replacing battery of access
key fob CAUTION
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key FCC WARNING
fob” F11-44.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
& Replacing access key fob sponsible for compliance could void
S02AP13
Access key fobs can be replaced at the user’s authority to operate the
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con- equipment.
tact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

(121,1)
Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-15
. Mexico-spec. models Immobilizer NOTE

S02AB
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
The immobilizer system is designed to please pay close attention to the follow- 2
prevent an unauthorized person from ing security precautions:
starting the engine. Only keys registered – Never leave your vehicle unat-
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can tended with its keys inside.
be used to operate your vehicle. If engine – Before leaving your vehicle,
start is attempted with an unregistered close all windows and the moon-
access key fob or key, the engine will not roof, and lock the doors and rear
start. Even if the engine does start, it will gate.
stop after a few seconds. This system, – Do not leave spare keys or any
however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran- record of your key number in the
tee. vehicle.
IFT CAUTION . The vehicle has a maintenance-free
RLVDE1415-1661 type immobilizer system.
14AHK . Do not place the key under direct
DENSO
sunlight or anywhere it may be- & Security indicator light
come hot. S02AB02
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-29.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth & Key replacement
immediately. S02AB03
Your key number plate will be required if
. Do not modify or remove the you ever need a replacement key made.
system. If modified or removed, Any new key must be registered for use
the proper operation of the sys- with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
tem cannot be guaranteed. before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
– CONTINUED –

(122,1)
2-16 Keys and doors/Immobilizer
with push-button start system”) . For models without “keyless access – Canada-spec. models
with push-button start system”:
One key that has already been registered – U.S.-spec. models
is required in order to register a new key.
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code CAUTION
still remains in the memory of the
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se- FCC WARNING
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code Changes or modifications not ex-
should be erased from the memory. To pressly approved by the party re-
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys sponsible for compliance could void
that will be used are required. the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For details about new key registration
and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
contact your SUBARU dealer. NOTE
& Certification for immobilizer FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
system following two conditions: (1) This de-
S02AB05 vice may not cause harmful interfer-
. For models with “keyless access ence, and (2) this device must accept
with push-button start system”: any interference received, including
Refer to “Certification for keyless access interference that may cause undesired
with push-button start system” F2-14. operation.

(123,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-17
– Mexico-spec. models Remote keyless entry system

S02AQ
CAUTION 2
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
Access key fob
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
1) Lock/arm button
a cloth immediately.
2) Unlock/disarm button
. When you carry the remote trans- 3) Rear gate unlock button
mitter on an airplane, do not 4) PANIC button
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
– CONTINUED –

(124,1)
2-18 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
tions. The system’s operable distance will & Locking the doors
be shorter in areas near a facility or S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
electronic equipment emitting strong radio and rear gate. An electronic chirp will
waves such as a power plant, broadcast sound once and the hazard warning
station, TV tower, or remote controller of flashers will flash once.
home electronic appliances.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not
NOTE fully closed, the following will occur to alert
. For models with “keyless access you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not
with push-button start system”, the properly closed.
remote keyless entry system will not . an electronic chirp sounds five times.
be activated when the push-button . the hazard warning flashers flash five
ignition switch is in any position other times.
Transmitter than the “OFF” position.
1) Lock/arm button . For models without “keyless access When you close the door, it will automati-
2) Unlock/disarm button with push-button start system”, the cally lock and then the following will occur.
3) Rear gate unlock button remote keyless entry system will not . an electronic chirp sounds once.
4) PANIC button be activated when the key is inserted in . the hazard warning flashers flash once.
The remote keyless entry system has the the ignition switch.
following functions. . The hazard warning flashers will & Unlocking the doors
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and flash once or twice when the access S02AQ02
key fob/transmitter button is pressed in Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock

rear gate) the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
the following cases.
. Unlocking the rear gate sound twice and the hazard warning
– When locking the doors
. Sounding a panic alarm flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors
– When unlocking the doors and the rear gate, briefly press the unlock/
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- – When unlocking the rear gate
tem. For detailed information, refer to disarm button a second time within 5
“Alarm system” F2-24. Operation of the hazard warning seconds.
The operable distance of the remote key- flashers in the above cases can be set NOTE
less entry system is approximately 30 feet to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
If the interval between the first and
(10 meters). However, this distance will Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
second presses of the unlock/disarm
vary depending on environmental condi- tails.
button (for unlocking of all of the doors

(125,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-19
and the rear gate) is extremely short, & Sounding a panic alarm
the system may not respond. S02AQ08
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once. 2
& Unlocking the rear gate The horn will sound and the hazard
S02AQ05
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock warning flashers will flash.
the rear gate. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
& Vehicle finder function after approximately 30 seconds.
S02AQ07
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
& Setting audible signal opera-
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet tion (models without “keyless 2. Hold down “ ” of the power door
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the access with push-button start locking switch.
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second system”) 3. While holding down “ ” of the power
S02AQ09
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to Using an electronic chirp, the system will door locking switch, pull the key out and re-
sound once and its hazard warning give you an audible signal when the doors insert it into the ignition switch at least 6
flashers to flash three times. lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn times within 10 seconds after Step 2.
the audible signal off. 4. Open and close the driver’s door once
NOTE within 10 seconds after Step 3.
If the interval between presses is too Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
short when you press the lock/arm
same steps to restore the function. times to indicate completion of the setting.
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
remote transmitter. doors and the rear gate. above procedure for you. Also, for models
with a combination meter display (color
LCD), the setting can be changed using
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
Setting” F3-39.
– CONTINUED –

(126,1)
2-20 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
& Replacing the battery NOTE ! Canada-spec. models

S02AQ12 S02AQ1802
Refer to “Replacing key battery” F11-43. This device complies with part 15 of the
& Replacing lost transmitters following two conditions: (1) This de-
S02AQ13
If you lose a transmitter or want to vice may not cause harmful interfer-
purchase additional transmitters (up to ence, and (2) this device must accept
four can be programmed), your transmit- any interference received, including
ters should be reprogrammed for security interference that may cause undesired
reasons. For details, contact your operation.
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for remote key-

less entry system
S02AQ18
! U.S.-spec. models
S02AQ1801
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G049
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.

(127,1)
Keys and doors/Door locks 2-21
! Mexico-spec. models Door locks – Insert the key into the ignition
S02AQ1803
S02AC
switch and turn the ignition switch
& Locking and unlocking from to “ON”.
the outside
2
S02AC01 For details about the alarm system,
NOTE refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.
If you unlock the driver’s door with a ! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
key (including an emergency key) and by using the key
open the door while the alarm system is S02AC0101
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814 push-button start system”:
SUBARU – Press any button on the access
MODEL: TB1G077 key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815 – Press the push-button ignition
SUBARU switch to “ACC”.
MODEL: TD1G049 – Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro- 1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
cedures. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
– Grip the front door handle In this case, only the driver’s side door is
– Press the rear gate opener locked.
button
. Models without “keyless access
NOTE
with push-button start system”: Models with “keyless access with
– Press any button on the remote push-button start system”:
transmitter (except when the trans- The emergency key is directional. If the
mitter battery is discharged). key cannot be inserted, change the
– CONTINUED –

(128,1)
2-22 Keys and doors/Door locks
direction that the grooved side is facing ! Locking using power door lock- & Locking and unlocking from
and insert it again. ing switch the inside
S02AC010202 S02AC02
! How to lock the vehicle without ! How to use the lock lever
using the key S02AC0202
S02AC0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
S02AC010201
1) Press the lock side of the power door

locking switch.*
2) Close the door. 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
*: For details about the power door locking 2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.
switch, refer to “How to operate the power
door locking switches” F2-23. Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are closed before starting to
1) Rotate the lock lever forward. drive.
In this case, all closed doors and the rear
2) Close the door.
gate are locked at the same time. The red mark on the lock lever appears
In this way, only the door that was operated when the door is unlocked.
will be locked. NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key WARNING
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-

(129,1)
Keys and doors/Door locks 2-23
belts and child restraints, locking push-button start system”)

the doors reduces the chance of . The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
being thrown out of the vehicle in an “ON” position (models with “keyless ac-
accident. cess with push-button start system”) 2
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
NOTE
tally opened, and intruders from . When leaving the vehicle, make sure
unexpectedly opening doors and you are holding the key before locking
entering your vehicle. the doors.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
! How to operate the power door This function’s operational/non-opera-
locking switches tional setting can be changed by a
S02AC0203
All doors and the rear gate can be locked Example SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
and unlocked using the power door locking 1) Press to lock dealer for details.
switches located at the driver’s side and 2) Press to unlock
the front passenger’s side doors. ! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
NOTE vention function
S02AC0602
Make sure that you do not leave the key When the system is set so that it does not
inside the vehicle before locking the operate, the doors are locked by the
doors from the outside using the power following operation.
door locking switches. . If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
& Key lock-in prevention func- with the lock lever in that position, the
tion driver’s door is locked.
S02AC06
Under the following conditions, all the . If the spare key is used to lock the
doors will not lock when the power door driver’s door from the outside of the
locking switch is pushed with the driver vehicle, the door is locked.
door open.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
– CONTINUED –

(130,1)
2-24 Keys and doors/Alarm system
& Battery drainage prevention NOTE Alarm system

function . The default setting for this function S02AF
S02AC03
If a door or the rear gate is not completely is set as “operational”. The operational/ The alarm system helps to protect your
closed, the interior lights will remain non-operational setting of this function vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
illuminated as a result. However, several can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. sounds and the hazard warning flashers
lights are automatically turned off by the Contact your SUBARU dealer to flash if someone attempts to break into
battery drainage prevention function to change the setting. your vehicle.
prevent the battery from discharging. The . When leaving the vehicle, please
following interior lights are affected by this For models with “keyless access with
make sure that all doors and the rear push-button start system”:
function. gate are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention The system can be armed or disarmed
Switch Automatically turning function does not operate while the with the keyless access function or access
Item position off key fob.
key is in the ignition switch.
Approximately 20 The system will not be activated when the
Map lights DOOR minutes later push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
Approximately 20 or “ON” position.
Dome light DOOR minutes later
For models without “keyless access
Ignition — Approximately 20 with push-button start system”:
switch light minutes later
The system can be armed or disarmed
Cargo area Approximately 20 with the remote transmitter.
light DOOR minutes later
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.

(131,1)
Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-25
& Alarm system operation The notifications regarding the map

NOTE
When the alarm system is armed, it is
S02AF01 lights, dome light and cargo area light
triggered by opening any of the doors, rear are deactivated as the factory setting. A
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- 2
gate or engine hood.
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
The alarm system will activate the follow- details.
ing alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds. & Arming the system
S02AF04
. The hazard warning flashers will flash The alarm system becomes armed when
for 30 seconds. the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
If any of the doors, rear gate or engine equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
hood remains open after the 30-second the “OFF” position.
period, the horn will continue to sound for a
2. Carry the key and get out of the
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
vehicle. Security indicator light
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop 3. Make sure that the engine hood is
closed. . All doors and the rear gate will lock,
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
4. Lock the doors using any of the an electronic chirp will sound once, the
NOTE following methods. hazard warning flashers will flash once,
The alarm system can be set to trigger . Locking using the remote keyless and the security indicator light will start
the illumination of the following interior entry system. For details, refer to flashing rapidly.
lights. “Remote keyless entry system” F2-17. . If any of the doors or the rear gate is
. Locking using the keyless access not fully closed, an electronic chirp
. Map lights (illuminates only when sounds five times, the hazard warning
the door interlock switch is in the function (if equipped). For details, refer
to “Locking with the door lock sensor” flashers flash five times to alert you that
“DOOR” position) the doors (or the rear gate) are not
. Dome light (illuminates only when F2-8.
properly closed. When you close the
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” . Locking using the power door lock-
door, doors will automatically lock.
position) ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking
. Cargo area light (illuminates only using power door locking switch” F2- 5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
when the cargo area light switch is in 22. system will enter surveillance state.
the “DOOR” position)
– CONTINUED –

(132,1)
2-26 Keys and doors/Alarm system
When the system is in surveillance state, – Push-button ignition switch is ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” to
the security indicator light will then flash turned to the “ACC” position (mod- the “ON” position with a registered key/
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- els with “keyless access with push- access key fob.
onds), indicating that the system has been button start system”).
armed for surveillance. NOTE
& Disarming the system For models with “keyless access with
NOTE S02AF05
Perform either of the following procedures. push-button start system”, if the ac-
. The system can be armed even if the . Briefly press a button (for less than 2 cess key fob battery is discharged,
windows and/or moonroof are open. seconds) on the access key fob/remote perform the procedure described in
Always make sure that they are fully transmitter. “Switching power status” F9-18. In
closed before arming the system. such a case, replace the battery im-
. Carry the access key fob and perform
. The 30-second standby time can be mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery
either of the following procedures (models
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- of access key fob” F11-44.
with “keyless access with push-button
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
start system”).
. If any of the following actions is & Alarm system setting
done during the standby period, the – Grip the front door handle.
S02AF11
system will not switch to the surveil- – Press the rear gate opener button. To change the setting of your vehicle’s
lance state. – Unlock using the PIN code access. alarm system for activation or deactiva-
– Doors (including the rear gate) tion, do the following.
The flashing of the security indicator light 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
are unlocked using the access key will then change slowly (once approxi-
fob/remote transmitter. “Disarming the system” F2-26.
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
– Doors (including the rear gate) 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
are unlocked using the keyless doors, rear gate and engine hood.
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
access function (models with “key- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
less access with push-button start ! Emergency disarming position.
S02AF0501
system”). If you cannot disarm the system using the 4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power
– Any door (including the rear gate) access key fob/transmitter (i.e. the trans- door locking switch, open the driver’s door
is opened. mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter within the following 1 second, and wait 10
– The ignition switch is turned to battery is too weak), you can disarm the seconds without releasing the switch. The
the “ON” position (models without system without using the access key fob/ setting will then be changed as follows.
“keyless access with push-button remote transmitter.
start system”). The system can be disarmed if you turn the

(133,1)
Keys and doors/Child safety locks 2-27
. Type A combination meter Child safety locks

NOTE
S02AG
Setting Combination Only registered keys will stop the
Horn
status meter display alarm. If the immobilizer transponder 2
Activate ALon Once is not registered, the alarm will not
stop.
Deactivate ALoF Twice
. Type B combination meter & Valet mode

S02AF06
Setting Combination
When you choose the valet mode, the
status meter display Horn alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
Activate AL ON Once
for locking and unlocking the doors and
Deactivate AL OFF Twice rear gate and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
NOTE setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for Each rear door has a child safety lock.
You may have the above setting change deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system When the child safety lock lever is in the
done by your SUBARU dealer. setting” F2-26. The security indicator light lock position, the door cannot be opened
will continue to flash once every 3 seconds from inside. The door can only be opened
& If you have accidentally trig- indicating that the system is in the valet from the outside.
gered the alarm system mode.
S02AF03
! To stop the alarm To exit valet mode, change the setting of WARNING
S02AF0301
Do any of the following operations: your vehicle’s alarm system for activation Always turn the child safety locks to
. Press any button on the access key fob/ mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting” F2- the “LOCK” position when children
remote transmitter. 26. sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” could result if a child accidentally
position (models without “keyless access opens the door and falls out.
with push-button start system”).
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).

(134,1)
2-28 Keys and doors/Windows
Windows & Power window operation . Passenger’s side power window

S02AH
S02AH07 switches:
! Power window switches
S02AH0701
WARNING . Driver’s side power window switches:
To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
Each passenger’s window can be con-
dows using the lock switch when
trolled by the power window switch located
children are riding in the vehicle. 1) For front left window (with one-touch auto on the door.
. Always carry the key when you up and down feature)
leave the vehicle for safety rea- 2) For front right window (with one-touch
sons and never allow an unat- auto up and down feature)
tended child to remain in the 3) For rear left window
vehicle. Failure to follow this 4) For rear right window
5) Lock switch
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window. All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
The power windows operate only when the side door.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

(135,1)
Keys and doors/Windows 2-29
! Operating the window each switch is continuously operated ! Anti-entrapment function (windows
S02AH0702
. With one-touch auto up and down in the same direction simultaneously with one-touch auto up/down func-
feature: for a few seconds. tion)
Either of the operations described S02AH0703 2
While closing the driver’s and front pas-
above may cause the power window senger’s windows automatically, if the
breaker to operate making it impossible window senses a substantial enough
to open or close the window. Be sure to object trapped between the window and
initialize the power windows. If they are the window frame, it automatically moves
not initialized, the one-touch auto up/ down slightly and stops.
down function will not operate. Refer to If a foreign object is caught while the
“Initialization of power window with driver’s window or passenger’s window is
one-touch auto up/down function” opening automatically, the window will
F2-30. stop.
. Without one-touch auto up and down
feature: CAUTION
1) Automatically close* . Never attempt to test this func-

2) Close tion using fingers, hands or other
3) Open parts of your body.
4) Automatically open* . The anti-entrapment function
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the may not operate properly if some
switch to opposite side.
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
Avoid the following. NOTE
. After the driver’s window is fully . If a window detects an impact similar
closed or fully opened, the switch is to that caused by trapping an object (for
continuously operated in the same 1) Close example, when the vehicle encounters
direction for a few seconds. 2) Open a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment
. After the windows for three or more function may operate.
seats are fully closed or fully opened, . The window cannot be operated for a
– CONTINUED –

(136,1)
2-30 Keys and doors/Rear gate
few seconds after the anti-entrapment & Initialization of power window Rear gate
function operates. with one-touch auto up/down S02AJ
! Off delay function (windows with function WARNING

S02AH06
one-touch auto up/down function) If the power window automatic function
S02AH0705
The front windows can be operated for (one-touch auto up and down function) . To prevent dangerous exhaust
approximately 45 seconds even after the does not operate properly, operate each gas from entering the vehicle,
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or window according to the following proce- always keep the rear gate closed
“OFF” position. If a front door is opened dure in order to initialize the power window while the engine is running.
within 45 seconds, the off delay function is system. . Do not attempt to shut the rear
canceled. 1. Close the door. gate while holding the recessed
! Locking the passengers’ windows 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” grip. Also avoid closing the rear
S02AH0704 position. gate by pulling on the recessed
3. Open the window completely and then grip from inside the cargo space.
press and hold down the power window There is a danger of your hand
switch for approximately 1 second. being caught and injured.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch for NOTE
approximately 1 second.
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
function in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, you can unlock
it by manually operating the rear gate
lock release lever.
1) Lock
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –
2) Unlock if the rear gate cannot be opened” F9-
19.
When the lock switch is in the lock position,
the rear passenger’s window switches on
the driver side door and the passengers’
window switches cannot be operated.

(137,1)
Keys and doors/Rear gate 2-31
& Lock/unlock & Open/close

S02AJ02 S02AJ03
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems. 2
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“How to operate the power door locking
switches” F2-23.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
less access with push-button start system”
F2-2.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
To close:
1) The rear gate opener button Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
To open: The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
First unlock the rear gate lock then push pull it down holding the recessed grip.
the rear gate opener button.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
– CONTINUED –

(138,1)
2-32 Keys and doors/Moonroof
. Be careful not to hit your head or Moonroof (if equipped) vehicle. Failure to follow this
face on the rear gate when open- S02AK procedure could result in injury
ing or closing the rear gate and to a child operating the moon-
when loading or unloading cargo. WARNING roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, trapment function by deliberately
head or any objects protrude from placing part of your body in the
the moonroof. A person could be moonroof.
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly. CAUTION
. The vehicle turns sharply. . Do not sit on the edge of the open
. The vehicle is involved in an moonroof.
accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
. Body parts protruding from the falling snow or extremely cold
vehicle are struck by outside conditions have caused it to
objects. freeze shut.
To avoid serious personal injury . The anti-entrapment function
caused by entrapment, always con- does not operate when the moon-
form to the following instructions roof is being tilted down. Be sure
without exception. to confirm that it is safe to do so
. Before closing the moonroof, before tilting the moonroof down.
make sure that no one’s hands, . If the moonroof does not close,
arms, head or other objects will have the system checked by a
be accidentally caught in the SUBARU dealer.
moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
leave the vehicle for safety rea- functions.
sons and never allow an unat- The moonroof operates only when the
tended child to remain in the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

(139,1)
Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-33
& Moonroof switches ! Sliding moonroof . For the sake of safety, it is recom-
S02AK02 S02AK0202
mended that you avoid driving with the
! Tilting moonroof moonroof fully opened.
S02AK0201
2
! Anti-entrapment function
S02AK0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
1) Open
CAUTION
2) Close Never attempt to test this function
1) Up
2) Down To open or close the moonroof using the using fingers, hands or other parts
automatic function, press and hold the of your body.
To raise the moonroof, press and hold the switch toward the open/close side and
switch in the up side and release. To lower release.
the moonroof, press and hold the switch in
To stop the moonroof halfway, press a
the down side. switch on the moonroof switch.
NOTE NOTE
Release the switch after the moonroof
. After washing the vehicle or after it
has been raised or has been lowered
rains, wipe away water on the roof prior
completely. Pressing the switch con-
to opening the moonroof to prevent
tinuously may cause damage to the
drops of water from falling into the
moonroof.
passenger compartment.
– CONTINUED –

(140,1)
2-34 Keys and doors/Moonroof
& Sunshade
S02AK05
The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.

(143,1)
Instruments and controls

Ignition switch (models without “keyless CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
S03
access with push-button start system”) ............ 3-4 indicator light .................................................... 3-15
Key positions......................................................... 3-4 Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
temperature high warning light .......................... 3-16
Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5
Charge warning light ............................................ 3-17
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................... 3-5
Push-button ignition switch (models with
Oil pressure warning light..................................... 3-17 3
Engine low oil level warning light.......................... 3-18
“keyless access with push-button start Windshield washer fluid warning light................... 3-18
system”) ............................................................... 3-6
AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models).............. 3-18
Safety precautions ................................................. 3-6
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
Operating range for push-button start system ........ 3-6 models) ............................................................. 3-18
Switching power status .......................................... 3-7 ABS warning light................................................. 3-20
When access key fob does not operate properly .... 3-8 Brake system warning light (red) .......................... 3-21
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8 Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-22
Meters and gauges ................................................. 3-8 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist
Speedometer ......................................................... 3-8 OFF indicator light............................................. 3-22
Tachometer............................................................ 3-8 Door open warning light ....................................... 3-22
Odometer............................................................... 3-9 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models) .......... 3-22
Double trip meter ................................................... 3-9 Power steering warning light ................................ 3-23
Fuel gauge............................................................ 3-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
ECO gauge (if equipped) ....................................... 3-10 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ........ 3-23
Combination meter settings .................................. 3-11 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ....... 3-24
Illumination brightness control............................ 3-12 Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
Auto dimmer cancel function (if equipped) ............ 3-12 keyless access with push-button start system
(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-25
Warning and indicator .......................................... 3-12 Security indicator light.......................................... 3-29
Initial illumination for system check ...................... 3-12 Select lever/gear position indicator
Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 3-13 (CVT models)..................................................... 3-30
SRS airbag system warning light........................... 3-15 Turn signal indicator lights ................................... 3-30
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF High beam indicator light...................................... 3-30
indicators ........................................................... 3-15 High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-30

(144,1)
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)............. 3-30 Multi-function display (black and white)............. 3-40
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-31 Driving information display ................................... 3-40
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Outside temperature indicator............................... 3-44
(models with LED headlights).............................. 3-31 X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-44
LED headlight warning light (models with LED Clock.................................................................... 3-44
headlights).......................................................... 3-31
Multi-function display (color LCD)
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-45
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-31 Features ............................................................... 3-45
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-31 Welcome screen ................................................... 3-45
Headlight indicator light (if equipped).................... 3-31 Self-check screen ................................................. 3-46
Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/ Interruption screen ............................................... 3-46
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator Basic operation .................................................... 3-47
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-31 Basic screens....................................................... 3-47
X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-32 Setting screen ...................................................... 3-54
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............ 3-32 How to get the source code using the open
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)............. 3-32 source............................................................... 3-59
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .................. 3-32 Clock...................................................................... 3-60
RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................... 3-32 Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-60
RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-32 Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-63
Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) .... 3-32 Regulatory information ......................................... 3-63
Combination meter display (color LCD) Light control switch ............................................. 3-63
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-33 Precautions and tips............................................. 3-63
Basic operation..................................................... 3-34 Headlights ............................................................ 3-64
Welcome screen (opening animation) and High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-65
Good-bye screen (ending animation) ................... 3-34 Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-66
Warning screen..................................................... 3-35 High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-66
Telltale screen....................................................... 3-35 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-69
Basic screens ....................................................... 3-36 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
Menu screens ....................................................... 3-38 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-69

(145,1)
Headlight beam leveler (models with LED Mirrors ................................................................... 3-77

headlights).......................................................... 3-70 Inside mirror......................................................... 3-77
Fog light switch (if equipped) .............................. 3-71 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped).......... 3-77
Steering responsive fog lights system Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-71 (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-78
Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-72 Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-85
One-touch lane changer ........................................ 3-73 Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...................... 3-86
Wiper and washer ................................................. 3-73 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-87
Windshield wiper and washer switches ................. 3-74 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ......... 3-88
Rear window wiper and washer switch .................. 3-76 Horn ....................................................................... 3-89

(146,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
Ignition switch (models with- CAUTION NOTE

out “keyless access with . Keep the ignition switch in the
Do not attach a large key holder or
push-button start system”) key case to either key. If it banged “LOCK” position when the engine is
S03AA
against your knees or hands while not running.
you are driving, it could turn the . Using electrical accessories for a
WARNING long time with the ignition switch in the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
. Never turn the ignition switch to
tion, thereby stopping the engine. battery to go dead.
the “LOCK” position while the
Also, if the key is attached to a key . If the ignition switch will not move
vehicle is being driven or towed
holder or to a large bunch of other from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
because that will lock the steer-
keys, centrifugal force may act on it position, turn the steering wheel
ing wheel, preventing steering
as the vehicle moves, resulting in slightly to the left and right as you turn
control. And when the engine is
unwanted turning of the ignition the ignition switch.
turned off, it takes a much greater
effort than usual to steer. switch.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
& Key positions
S03AA11
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and Position Description
never allow an unattended child The key can only be inserted
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to or removed in this position.
LOCK The ignition switch will lock
follow this procedure could re- the steering wheel when you
sult in injury to a child or others. remove the key.
Children could operate the power In this position the electrical
windows, the moonroof or other accessories (audio, acces-
ACC sory power outlet, etc.) can be
controls or even make the vehicle
move. used.
This is the normal operating
ON position after starting the en-
gine.
The ignition switch has four positions: The engine is started in this
START position.
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

(147,1)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-5
CAUTION . The engine may not start in the der.

following cases: – The key is near or touching
Do not turn the ignition switch to the another transmitter.
“START” position while the engine
is running. & Key reminder chime
S03AA05 3
The reminder chime sounds when the
NOTE driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. when the key is removed from the
ignition switch
– The key grip is touching another
. when the driver’s door is closed
key or a metallic key holder.
& Ignition switch light (if
equipped)
S03AA06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
. To turn the key from the “ACC” to nates when the driver’s door is opened or
“LOCK” position, the select lever must when the driver’s door is unlocked using
be in the “P” position (CVT models) and the remote keyless entry transmitter.
the key must be pushed in and turned. The light remains illuminated for several
. If your registered key fails to start tens of seconds and then gradually turns
the engine, pull out the key once (the off under the following conditions.
security indicator light will blink), and . when the driver’s door is closed
then insert the key again and turn it to
– The key is near another key that . when the doors are unlocked using the
the “START” position again to restart
contains an immobilizer transpon- remote keyless entry transmitter
the engine.
– CONTINUED –

(148,1)
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The light turns off immediately under the Push-button ignition switch cannot be operated.
following conditions. . Even when the access key fob is
(models with “keyless access outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
with push-button start sys- close to the glass, it may be possible to
. when all doors and the rear gate are tem”) switch the power or to start the engine.
locked using the remote keyless entry S03BG . Do not leave the access key fob in
transmitter & Safety precautions the following places. It may become
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3. impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
& Operating range for push- may also cause a false warning to issue
button start system although no malfunction actually oc-
S03BG01 curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
1) Antenna key fob does not operate properly” F9-
2) Operating range 17. In such a case, replace the battery
immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-
NOTE tery of access key fob” F11-44.
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start

(149,1)
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-7
& Switching power status illuminates in orange. with oil or other contaminants. It
S03BG02
may cause a malfunction.
Power Indicator color Operation
. If the push-button ignition switch
status does not operate smoothly, stop
Power is turned the operation. Contact a SUBARU
OFF Turned off off. dealer immediately. 3
The following . If the push-button ignition switch
systems can be does not illuminate even when
ACC Orange used:
audio and ac- the instrument panel illumination
cessory power is turned on, have the vehicle
outlet. inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is sun for a long time, the surface of
stopped) All electrical
1) Operation indicator ON systems can be the push-button ignition switch
Turned off used. may get hot. Be careful not to
2) Push-button ignition switch (while engine is
running) burn yourself.
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the CAUTION NOTE
driver’s seat. . When operating the push-button
. When the push-button ignition ignition switch, firmly press it all the
2. Shift the select lever (CVT models)/the switch is left in “ON” (while the way.
shift lever (MT models) into the “P”/“N” engine is not running) or “ACC” . If the push-button ignition switch is
position. for a long time, it may result in pressed quickly, the power may not
3. Press the push-button ignition switch vehicle battery discharge. turn on or off.
without depressing the brake pedal. Every . Do not spill drinks or other liquids
time the button is pressed, the power is on the push-button ignition
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”, switch. It may cause a malfunc-
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is tion.
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation . Do not touch the push-button
indicator on the push-button ignition switch ignition switch with a hand soiled
– CONTINUED –

(150,1)
3-8 Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
. If the indicator light on the push- Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
button ignition switch flashes in green S03AB S03AD
when the push-button ignition switch is NOTE
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition Some of the meters and gauges on the
switch while turning the steering wheel combination meter use liquid-crystal
left and right. displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
! Battery drainage prevention func- glasses.
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left & Speedometer
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi- S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
speed.
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. & Tachometer
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn S03AD06
other drivers when you have to park your The tachometer shows the engine speed
& When access key fob does in thousands of revolutions per minute.
not operate properly vehicle under emergency conditions. The
S03BG03 hazard warning flasher works regardless
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key of the position of the ignition switch.
CAUTION
fob does not operate properly” F9-17.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, Do not operate the engine with the
push the hazard warning button on the pointer of the tachometer in the red
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights zone. In this range, fuel injection will
and the turn signal indicator lights will be cut by the engine control module
flash. To turn off the flasher, push the to protect the engine from overrev-
button again. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.

(151,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9
& Odometer closed.

S03AD04
& Double trip meter

S03AD05
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP 3
RESET switch and keep the knob pressed
for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
1) TRIP RESET switch result.
2) Type A combination meter
3) Type B combination meter
1) TRIP RESET switch
This meter displays the odometer when 2) Type A combination meter
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3) Type B combination meter
The odometer shows the total distance This meter displays the two trip meters
that the vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE The trip meter shows the distance that the
If you press the TRIP RESET switch vehicle has been driven since you last set
when the ignition switch is in the it to zero.
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. The display can be switched as shown in
The indicators will turn off when: the following sequence by pressing the
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- TRIP RESET switch.
ated for approximately 10 seconds.
. The driver’s door is opened and then
– CONTINUED –

(152,1)
3-10 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
NOTE & Fuel gauge while the ignition switch is in the

S03AD07 “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
. If the connection between the com- fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
bination meter and battery is broken for amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
any reason such as vehicle mainte- The indicators will turn off when:
nance or fuse replacement, the data
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
operated for approximately 10 sec-
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
onds.
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the – The driver’s door is opened and
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is then closed.
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while & ECO gauge (if equipped)
S03AD12
the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
2) Type A combination meter
RESET switch. 3) Type B combination meter
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not The fuel gauge is displayed when the
operated for approximately 10 sec- ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows
onds. the approximate amount of fuel remaining
– The driver’s door is opened and in the tank.
then closed. The gauge indication may change slightly
during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel level movement in the tank.
NOTE 1) Type A combination meter
2) Type B combination meter
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler The ECO gauge shows the difference
door (lid) is located on the right side of between the current rate of fuel consump-
the vehicle. tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch tion since the trip meter was last reset.

(153,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-11
If the ECO gauge moves towards the + ! Switching method

Combination Possible
side, this indicates better fuel efficiency. Item meter display settings
S03AD160101
1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”
NOTE A trip —
position.
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication of fuel effi- B trip — 3
ciency.
. After resetting the trip meter, the Gauge
average rate of fuel consumption is not needle On/Off
shown until you have driven for 1 mile sweep
function
(or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO
gauge does not operate. Changing mile/km
the unit*
& Combination meter settings Warning Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3

S03AD16 volume*
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
the combination meter. *: if available
! Type A combination meter NOTE
S03AD1601
Various adjustments can be made, such . If you switch the units on the combi- 2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-
as switching units shown on the combina- nation meter, the units on the multi- edly until the item you want to change is
tion meter and adjusting the warning tone function display (black and white) also displayed.
volume. switches accordingly. 3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET
While the ignition switch is in the “OFF” . If either of the following conditions switch while the item to be changed is
position, each press of TRIP RESET is met, the combination meter setting displayed, the setting of the item will be
switch results in items shown in the table mode will be canceled. switched.
below being switched. – The driver’s door is opened.
– The TRIP RESET switch is not ! Type B combination meter
S03AD1602
operated for approximately 10 sec- Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
onds or more. the combination meter display (color
LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” F3-38.

(154,1)
3-12 Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
Illumination brightness con- NOTE Warning and indicator

trol . When the control dial is turned fully S03AE
S03AJ upward, the illumination brightness

& Initial illumination for system
becomes the maximum and the auto- check
S03AE29
matic dimming function does not work Several of the warning and indicator lights
at all. illuminate when the ignition switch is
. The brightness setting is not can- initially turned to the “ON” position. This
celed even when the ignition switch is permits checking the operation of the
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
& Auto dimmer cancel function ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
(if equipped) the system check, several of the following
S03AJ01
When the ambient light is bright, the lights illuminate and then turn off after
illumination brightness is set to the max- several seconds or after the engine has
imum regardless of the position of the started.
The illumination brightness of the instru- control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust : Seatbelt warning light
ment panel illuminates under the following the illumination brightness by using the (The seatbelt warning light turns off
conditions. control dial. When the ambient light is dark, only when the driver fastens the seat-
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or you can dim the illumination brightness as belt.)
“ ” position described above.
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
. when the light control switch is in the The operational/non-operational setting light
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi- and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel (The seatbelt warning light turns off
nate automatically function can be changed by your SUBARU only when the front seat passenger
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for fastens the seatbelt.)
You can adjust the illumination brightness
details.
for better visibility. : SRS airbag system warning light
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
To darken, turn the control dial downward. ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light

(155,1)
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-13
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

function indicator light light
: Coolant temperature low indicator : Automatic headlight beam leveler
light/Coolant temperature high warn- warning light (models with LED head-
ing light lights) 3
: Charge warning light : Hill descent control indicator light (if
equipped)
: Oil pressure warning light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
: Engine low oil level warning light burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
: Windshield washer fluid warning light corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
: AT OIL TEMP warning light for repair. Driver’s warning light
(CVT models)
: Low tire pressure warning light & Seatbelt warning light
(U.S.- spec. models) and chime S03AE01
/ : ABS warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front
/ : Brake system warning light passenger’s seat, as required by current
: Low fuel warning light safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start position, this device reminds the driver and
assist OFF indicator light front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
: Door open warning light illuminating the warning lights in the loca-
tions indicated in the following illustration
: AWD warning light (CVT models) and sounding a chime. Front passenger’s warning light
: Power steering warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
– CONTINUED –

(156,1)
3-14 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator
! Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
S03AE0101
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition “Manual seat” F1-5.
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the If the seatbelt warning device for the front
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” passenger’s seat does not function cor-
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
flash for several seconds, to warn that the front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer. deactivated even when the front passen-
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front the following actions.
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
NOTE . Ensure that no article is placed on the
device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- seat other than a child restraint system and
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened its child occupant, although we strongly
occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning recommend that all children sit in the rear
whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according seat properly restrained.
the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
Observe the following precautions. Failure
– At speeds lower than approxi- seatback pocket.
to do so may prevent the device from
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device to . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
The warning light(s) for unfastened fail. sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seatbelt(s) will alternate between seat are locked into place securely by
. Do not install any accessory such as a
steady illumination and flashing at moving the seat back and forth.
table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will . Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front
not sound. seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
– At speeds higher than approxi- . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con-
The warning light(s) for unfastened passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback. tion.
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s) ward-forward position and seatback not
is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
. It is possible to cancel the warning

(157,1)
& SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal air- airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
warning light bag ON and OFF indicators vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
S03AE02
S03AE03
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
WARNING is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
If the warning light exhibits any of indicator will remain off. 3
the following conditions, there may If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
be a malfunction in the seatbelt is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag ON indicator will remain off while
system. Immediately take your vehi- the OFF indicator will illuminate.
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
to have the system checked. Unless position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
checked and properly repaired, the remain illuminated or off simultaneously
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS even after the system check period, the
airbag will not operate properly in system is malfunctioning. Contact your
the event of a collision, which may ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
increase the risk of injury. indicator spection.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
ing light indicator & CHECK ENGINE warn-
. No illumination of the warning The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ing light/Malfunction
light when the ignition switch is and OFF indicators show you the status of indicator light S03AE04
first turned to the “ON” position the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
. Continuous illumination of the The indicator is displayed near the map CAUTION
warning light lights.
When the ignition switch is turned to the If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
. Illumination of the warning light nates while you are driving, have
while driving “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as
For details about the components mon- possible. Continued vehicle opera-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the tion without having the emission
airbag system monitors” F1-68. control system checked and re-
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause
– CONTINUED –

(158,1)
serious damage, which may not be ized SUBARU dealer immediately. & Coolant temperature
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking low indicator light/
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an Coolant temperature
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- high warning light S03AE48
that there is at least one problem or tected which may damage the emission
potential problem somewhere in the emis- control system. CAUTION
sion control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the . After turning the ignition switch
! If the light illuminates steadily following. to the “ON” position, if this
S03AE0401 indicator light/warning light be-
If the light illuminates steadily while driving . Reduce vehicle speed.
haves in any of the following
or does not turn off after the engine starts, . Avoid hard acceleration. ways, the electrical system may
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades. be malfunctioning. Contact your
has been detected.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- SUBARU dealer immediately for
You should have your vehicle checked by ble. an inspection.
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as – It remains blinking in RED.
ately.
possible. – It remains illuminated in RED
NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light may for more than 2 seconds.
This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after – It remains blinking in RED and
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. several driving trips. You should have your BLUE alternately.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, vehicle checked by an authorized . While driving, if this indicator
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning SUBARU dealer immediately. light/warning light behaves in
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating any of the following ways, take
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. the specified appropriate mea-
Remove the cap and retighten it until it sure listed below.
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with
– Blinking or illuminated in
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap
RED:
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
Safely stop the vehicle as
ing light turn off immediately. It may take
soon as possible, and refer to
several driving trips. If the light does not
the emergency steps to take in
turn off, take your vehicle to your author-
the case of engine overheat-

(159,1)
ing. After that, have the sys- creases over the specified range, the & Charge warning light S03AE05
tem checked by your nearest indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- At this time, the engine is close to over- If this light illuminates when the engine is
gine overheating” F9-12. heating. running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning If the light illuminates while driving or does 3
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating. engine at the first safe opportunity and
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- check the alternator belt. If the belt is
tion. When the indicator light/warning light loose, broken or if the belt is in good
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely condition but the light remains illuminated,
This coolant temperature low indicator stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
light/coolant temperature high warning refer to the emergency steps to take in the immediately.
light has the following three functions. case of engine overheating. Refer to
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- “Engine overheating” F9-12. After that, & Oil pressure warning
cient warming up of the engine have the system checked by your nearest light S03AE06
SUBARU dealer.
. Blinking in RED indicates that the If this light illuminates when the engine is
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light running, it may indicate that the engine oil
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat- often blinks in RED, the electrical system pressure is low and the lubricating system
ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your is not working properly.
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. If the light illuminates while driving or does
For a system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for ap- NOTE not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
proximately 2 seconds when the ignition engine at the first safe opportunity and
If the engine is restarted after a certain check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After driving condition, this indicator light/
that, this indicator light/warning light low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
warning light may illuminate in RED. at the proper level but the light remains
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light illuminated, contact your nearest
indicator light/warning light turns off SUBARU dealer immediately.
turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
sufficiently. For details about checking the engine oil
level or adding the engine oil, refer to
If the engine coolant temperature in- “Engine oil” F11-8.
– CONTINUED –

(160,1)
CAUTION NOTE & AT OIL TEMP warning

. The warning light may stay illumi- light (CVT models) S03AE07
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light illuminated when the engine is started If this light illuminates when the engine is
nated. This may cause serious en- straight after topping up or changing running, it may indicate that the transmis-
gine damage. the engine oil. In such cases, park the sion fluid temperature is too hot.
vehicle on a level surface and wait for
more than a minute until the oil level If the light illuminates while driving, im-
settles, after which the warning light mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
& Engine low oil level and let the engine idle until the warning
will turn off.
warning light S03AE58
. The warning light may illuminate light turns off.
This light illuminates when the engine oil temporarily in the following conditions ! Transmission control system warn-
level decreases to the lower limit. because a low oil level may be detected ing
If the engine low oil level warning light as a result of significant oil movement S03AE0701
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle in the engine.
after the engine has started, it may indicate
in a safe and level location, and then check – when the vehicle is considerably that the transmission control system is not
the engine oil level. When the engine oil inclined on an uphill or steep slope working properly. Contact your nearest
level is not within the normal range, refill – when the vehicle has continu- SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11- ously accelerated and decelerated
8. – when the vehicle is continuously & Low tire pressure
If the warning light does not turn off after turned warning light (U.S.-
refilling the engine oil, or the warning light – when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
spec. models) S03AE08
illuminates even though the engine oil
level is within the normal range, have the between uphill and downhill When the ignition switch is turned to the
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer. “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
& Windshield washer ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
fluid warning light S03AE42
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
This light illuminates when the fluid level in properly. If there is no problem and all tires
the windshield washer fluid tank de- are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
creases to the lower limit (approximately Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt). should be checked monthly when cold and

(161,1)
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- when the system is not operating properly. WARNING
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. If this light does not illuminate
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a When the system detects a malfunction, briefly after the ignition switch is
different size than the size indicated on the the telltale will flash for approximately one turned ON or the light illuminates
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure minute and then remain continuously steadily after blinking for approxi- 3
label, you should determine the proper tire illuminated. This sequence will continue mately one minute, you should have
inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
as the malfunction exists. When the mal- tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
As an added safety feature, your vehicle function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
has been equipped with a tire pressure soon as possible.
tem may not be able to detect or signal low If this light illuminates while driving,
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
a low tire pressure telltale when one or never brake suddenly and keep
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, driving straight ahead while gradu-
more of your tires is significantly under- including the installation of replacement or
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ally reducing speed. Then slowly
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that pull off the road to a safe place.
pressure telltale illuminates, you should prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
stop and check your tires as soon as Otherwise an accident involving
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction serious vehicle damage and serious
possible, and inflate them to the proper telltale after replacing one or more tires or
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- personal injury could occur.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and replacement or alternate tires and wheels If this light still illuminates while
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also allow the TPMS to continue to function driving after adjusting the tire pres-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, properly. sure, a tire may have significant
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and damage and a fast leak that causes
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min- the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
Please note that the TPMS is not a ute, have the system inspected by your a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
substitute for proper tire maintenance, nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as as soon as possible.
and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a
maintain correct tire pressure, even if wheel rim is replaced without the
under-inflation has not reached the level original pressure sensor/transmitter
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire being transferred, the Low tire pres-
pressure telltale. sure warning light will illuminate
Your vehicle has also been equipped with steadily after blinking for approxi-
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate mately one minute. This indicates
– CONTINUED –

(162,1)
the TPMS is unable to monitor all and rear tires. warning light illuminate simultaneously if
four road wheels. Contact your the EBD system malfunctions. For further
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible details of the EBD system malfunction
for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light S03AE09 warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force
or system resetting. Distribution (EBD) system warning” F3-
If the light illuminates steadily after CAUTION 21.
blinking for approximately one min- . If any of the following conditions NOTE
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU occur, we recommend that you
dealer to have the system inspected. If the warning light behavior is as
have the ABS repaired at the first described in the following conditions,
available opportunity by your the ABS may be considered normal.
SUBARU dealer. . The warning light illuminates when
CAUTION
– The warning light does not the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition position and turns off approximately 2
is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON” seconds after the engine has started.
checking tire pressure. The tire position. . The warning light illuminates right
pressure should be checked peri- – The warning light illuminates after the engine is started but turns off
odically (at least monthly) using a when the ignition switch is immediately, remaining off.
tire gauge. After any change to tire turned to the “ON” position, . The warning light remains illumi-
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- but it does not turn off even nated after the engine has been started,
itoring system will not re-check tire after the vehicle is started. but it turns off while driving.
inflation pressures until the vehicle . The warning light illuminates during
is first driven more than 20 mph (32 – The warning light illuminates driving, but it turns off immediately and
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- during driving. remains off.
sures, increase the vehicle speed to . When the warning light is on (and
When driving with an insufficient battery
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the the brake system warning light is
voltage such as when the engine is jump
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- off), the ABS function shuts
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures down. However, the conventional
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
are now above the severe low pres- brake system continues to oper-
and does not indicate a malfunction. When
sure threshold, the low tire pressure ate normally.
the battery becomes fully charged, the
warning light should turn off a few light will turn off.
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics
install the specified size for the front Control warning light, and brake system

(163,1)
& Brake system If the brake system warning light should location.
warning light (red) illuminate while driving (with the parking 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
S03AE10
brake fully released and with the ignition parking brake and then restart it.
This light illuminates with the parking switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an 3. Fully release the parking brake.
brake applied while the ignition switch is indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn 4. Even if all the warning lights do not
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the brake pads. If this occurs, immediately come back on, the EBD system may have 3
parking brake is fully released. stop the vehicle at the nearest safe a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to
location and check the brake fluid level. If the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
WARNING the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in system inspected.
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.
. Driving with the brake system 5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
warning light on is dangerous. or come back on after approximately 2
SUBARU dealer for repair.
This indicates your brake system seconds, shut down the engine, apply the
may not be working properly. If ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution parking brake and check the brake fluid
the light remains illuminated, (EBD) system warning level.
S03AE1003
have the brakes inspected by a The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
SUBARU dealer immediately. the brake system warning light / , . If the brake fluid level is not below the
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
. If at all in doubt about whether the malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
brakes are operating properly, do and ABS warning light / illuminate
simultaneously during driving. nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
not drive the vehicle. Have your system inspected.
vehicle towed to the nearest Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function. . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
SUBARU dealer for repair.
However, the rear wheels will be more mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
The brake system warning light has the prone to locking when the brakes are have the vehicle towed to the nearest
following functions. applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s SUBARU dealer for repair.
motion may therefore become somewhat ! Vacuum pressure system warning
! Brake fluid level warning S03AE1006
S03AE1002
harder to control. The brake system warning light /
This light illuminates when the brake fluid If the brake system warning light / , will illuminate when the vacuum pressure
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition and ABS warning light / illuminate pressure is decreasing.
switch in the “ON” position and with the simultaneously, take the following steps. If the brake warning light continues to
parking brake fully released. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat illuminate for several minutes after starting
– CONTINUED –

(164,1)
the engine, there may be a malfunction in WARNING & All-Wheel Drive warn-
the vacuum system. In this case, drive the ing light (CVT models) S03AE13
vehicle carefully and have the system When the Hill start assist warning
inspected by a SUBARU dealer. light illuminates, have the vehicle This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
inspected at an authorized SUBARU tires of differing diameters fitted on the
& Low fuel warning light S03AE11
wheels or with an excessively low air
dealer.
The low fuel warning light illuminates when pressure in any of the tires.
the tank is nearly empty, at approximately
2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It only ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light WARNING
S03AE4702
operates when the ignition switch is in the While the Hill start assist system is
“ON” position. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF If the AWD warning light flashes,
indicator light illuminates continuously to promptly park in a safe location then
CAUTION inform the driver that the Hill start assist check whether all four tires are the
system is not operational. same diameter and whether any of
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- the tires has a puncture or has lost
ever the low fuel warning light & Door open warning light S03AE12
air pressure for some other reason.
illuminates. Engine misfires as a Continuing to drive with the AWD
result of an empty tank could cause The warning light illuminates if any door or warning light flashing can lead to
damage to the engine. the rear gate is not fully closed. This powertrain damage.
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
& Hill start assist warning position, or the key is removed from the NOTE
ignition switch. If the temporary spare tire is used, the
light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light For some models, only the open doors are AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
S03AE47
indicated by the warning lights. temporary spare tire should therefore
be restricted to the minimum time
! Hill start assist warning light Always make sure this light is not illumi- necessary. Replace the temporary
S03AE4701
While the engine is running, if there are nated before you start to drive. spare tire with a conventional tire as
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist soon as possible.
system, the warning light will illuminate.

(165,1)
& Power steering warning . The steering wheel remains in the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
light fully turned position for a long period of inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
S03AE53
time. Control system becomes unable to
While the engine is running, this warning provide ABS control. As a result, the
light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis- Vehicle Dynamics Control system
been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is also becomes inoperative, causing 3
ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering the warning light to illuminate.
force will be restored after the steering Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and Control system and ABS are inop-
the power steering control system has erative in this case, the ordinary
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
light is illuminated, there may be functions of the brake system are
if the power steering is operated in a still available. You will be safe while
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to driving with this condition, but drive
assist limitation to occur too frequently, carefully and have your vehicle
the nearest SUBARU dealer and that may result in a malfunction of the
have the vehicle inspected immedi- checked at a SUBARU dealer as
power steering control system. soon as possible.
ately.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
NOTE trol warning light/Vehi- NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the cle Dynamics Control . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
following ways, the power steering operation indicator functions, the warning light only illumi-
control system may temporarily limit light
the power assist in order to prevent the
S03AE14 nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
system components, such as the con- Brake System) remains fully opera-
trol computer and drive motor, from ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning tional.
overheating. light . The warning light illuminates when
S03AE1401 the electronic control system of the
. The steering wheel is operated fre- ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
quently and turned sharply while the CAUTION
malfunctions.
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low . The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
speeds, such as while frequently turning light, ABS warning light, and brake
tem provides its ABS control
ing the steering wheel during parallel system warning light illuminate simul-
through the electrical circuit of the
parking. taneously if the EBD system malfunc-
– CONTINUED –

(166,1)
tions. For further details of the EBD driving, but it turns off immediately and warmed up) after the engine has started.
system malfunction warning, refer to remains off.
“Electronic Brake Force Distribution . The warning light illuminates when & Vehicle Dynamics Con-
(EBD) system warning” F3-21. the engine has stalled and continues to trol OFF indicator light S03AE15
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once The light illuminates when the Vehicle
probably inoperative under any of the Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
following conditions. Have your vehicle the vehicle starts moving.
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation trol system.
ately. indicator light
. The warning light does not illuminate S03AE1402 The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
The indicator light flashes during activation probably malfunctioning under any of the
when the ignition switch is turned to the
of the skid suppression function and during following conditions. Have your vehicle
“ON” position.
activation of the traction control function. checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
. The warning light illuminates while the
ately.
vehicle is running. NOTE
. The light does not illuminate when the
NOTE . The light may remain illuminated for
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
a short period of time after the engine
If the warning light behavior is as position.
has been started, especially in cold
described in the following examples, weather. This does not indicate the . The light does not turn off even once
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system existence of a problem. The light several seconds have elapsed after the
may be considered normal. should turn off as soon as the engine ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”
. The warning light illuminates when has warmed up. position.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” . The indicator light illuminates when
position and turns off approximately 2 the engine has developed a problem
seconds after the engine has started. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
. The warning light illuminates right malfunction indicator light is on.
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
. The warning light illuminates after probably malfunctioning under the follow-
the engine has started and turns off ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
while the vehicle is subsequently being at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
driven. . The light does not turn off even after the
. The warning light illuminates during lapse of several minutes (the engine has

(167,1)
& Warning chimes and WARNING NOTE

warning indicator of the . Even when the access key fob is
keyless access with Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
tor on the push-button ignition within the operating ranges inside the
push-button start sys- switch is flashing in green when vehicle, the access key warning for
tem (if equipped) S03AE55 starting the engine. This indicates engine start may be provided depend- 3
the status that the steering wheel is ing on the status of the access key fob
not released and could result in an and the environmental conditions.
accident involving serious injury or . When the access key fob is taken out
death. of the vehicle through an open window,
the access key fob takeout warning or
passenger access key fob takeout
CAUTION warning will not be provided.
. When starting the engine again ! List of warnings

S03AE5504
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch CAUTION
flashes in green, if the operation
When any of the following warnings
indicator is still flashing in green,
occurs even if the access key warn-
Access key warning indicator there could be a steering lock
ing indicator does not appear, take
malfunction. Contact your
The keyless access with push-button start the appropriate action.
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
system sounds a warning chime and sible.
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter in order to . When the operation indicator on
minimize improper operations and help the push-button ignition switch
protect your vehicle from theft. flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator flashes, take the
appropriate action.
– CONTINUED –

(168,1)
Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

chime chime on push-button igni- Status Action
tion switch
The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
CVT models, when the select lever is in *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
Ding, switch the push-button ignition switch to
ding ... — — the “P” position). “OFF”.
(intermittent)
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Take out the access key fob from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — An attempt was made to lock all doors *The doors cannot be locked while the
(2 seconds) while the access key fob is left inside the access key fob is inside the vehicle.
vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Access key fob lock-in warning: Take out the access key fob from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” *If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
and the access key fob is inside the the doors cannot be locked.
vehicle.
Door ajar warning:
Beep, beep, beep, The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep, beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and *If one of the doors including the rear gate
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key fob inside the
The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
Ding Long beep (60 — carrying the access key fob, the push- switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position other *If the push-button ignition switch is not
than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
select lever is in the “P” position). locked.
Ding, Access key warning: Carry the access key fob, and drive the
ding ... — — The vehicle was driven while the access vehicle.
(7 seconds) key fob is not inside the vehicle.

(169,1)

tion switch
Access key warning for engine start:
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch was Carry the access key fob, and press the
pressed while the access key fob is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle. 3
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
Beep, beep, beep access key fob and closed the driver’s Switch the push-button ignition switch to
Ding (3 times) — door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” (in CVT
models, when the select lever is in the “P”
position).
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
Beep, beep, beep A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with Return the access key fob to inside the
Ding (3 times) — the access key fob and closed a door vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
other than the driver’s door while the switch to “OFF”.
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF”.
Access key takeout without P position
warning (CVT models):
The driver exited the vehicle with the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
Long beep Long beep — access key fob and closed the driver’s switch the push-button ignition switch to
(continuous) (continuous) door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
Select lever position warning (CVT
models): Start the engine, shift the select lever to
Long beep — — The engine is turned off by pressing the the “P” position, switch the push-button
(continuous) push-button ignition switch and the select ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
lever is in a position other than the “P” vehicle.
position.
– CONTINUED –

(170,1)

tion switch
Select lever position warning (CVT
models): Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
Long beep — — The driver’s door was opened while the switch the push-button ignition switch to
(continuous) push-button ignition switch is in a position “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in
a position other than the “P” position.
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
formed, but the steering is still locked. press the push-button ignition switch.
Flashes in orange System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

Ding — (15 seconds max.) A malfunction was detected in the power and have the vehicle inspected.
system or steering lock.

(171,1)
& Security indicator light S03AE16

with push-button start system”: door has not been opened or closed
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
This indicator light shows the status of the Models without “keyless access
alarm system. It also indicates operation of . Approximately 60 seconds after the with push-button start system”:
the immobilizer system. ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
– while the engine is running
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
! Alarm system – when the ignition switch is in the 3
S03AE1601 If the indicator light does not blink in the “ON” position.
It blinks to show the driver the operational above conditions, it may indicate that – for approximately 60 seconds
status of the alarm system. For detailed immobilizer system may be malfunction- after the ignition switch is turned
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2- ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
24. immediately. or “LOCK” position
! Immobilizer system
S03AE1602 In the event that an unauthorized key (for . Even if a malfunction occurs, such
The security indicator light starts blinking example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
in the following conditions. as the security indicator light flashes
used to start the engine, the security irregularly, it will not affect the func-
For models with “keyless access with indicator light illuminates. For details about tionality of the immobilizer system.
push-button start system”: the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-
. Immediately after the push-button igni- lizer” F2-15.
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position. NOTE
. Immediately after the driver’s door is . The security indicator light remains
opened or closed when all of the following off in the following conditions. It means
conditions are met. that the matching of the ID code is
– The push-button ignition switch is in completed and the immobilizer system
the “ON” or “ACC” position. is deactivated, and it does not indicate
– The engine is not running. a malfunction.
In the event that an unauthorized key is Models with “keyless access with
used (for example, the key is unregistered push-button start system”:
or the ID code does not match), the power – while the engine is running
is not switched to “ON” and the security – the push-button ignition switch
indicator light continues blinking. has been turned to the “ON” or
For models without “keyless access “ACC” position and the driver’s
– CONTINUED –

(172,1)
& Select lever/gear position in- rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
dicator (CVT models) out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
S03AE43 Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-37.
& High beam indicator

light S03AE21
This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& High beam assist indi-

Type B cator light (if equipped) S03AE83
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator This light illuminates when the high beam
Type A 3) Select lever/gear position indicator assist function is activated. For details
1) Upshift indicator about the high beam assist function, refer
2) Downshift indicator This indicator shows the position of the to “High beam assist function” F3-66.
3) Select lever/gear position indicator select lever.
For models with manual mode, when the & Cruise control indicator
manual mode is selected, the gear position light (if equipped) S03AE22
indicator (which shows the current gear This light illuminates when the cruise
selection) and the upshift/downshift indi- control main button is pressed to activate
cator light up. Refer to “Continuously the cruise control function. For details,
variable transmission” F7-24. refer to “To set cruise control” F7-48.
If this light blinks, do not use the cruise
& Turn signal indicator control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,
lights S03AE20 contact your SUBARU dealer for an
These lights show the operation of the turn inspection.
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

(173,1)
CAUTION & LED headlight warning . when the light switch is turned to the
light (models with LED “ ” or “ ” position
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ headlights) . when the light control switch is in the
S03AE76
malfunction indicator light illumi- “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator This light illuminates if the LED headlights nate automatically
light flashes at the same time. At this malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected 3
time, avoid driving at high speed and at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. & Steering responsive fog
have your vehicle inspected at a lights warning indica-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- & Steering Responsive tor/Steering responsive
ble. Headlight warning light/ fog lights OFF indicator
Steering Responsive (if equipped) S03AE77
Headlight OFF indicator
& Cruise control set indi- light (if equipped) NOTE
S03AE89
cator light (if equipped) S03AE23 For details about the steering respon-
This light illuminates when the Steering
This light illuminates when vehicle speed sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-
Responsive Headlight OFF switch is
has been set to use the cruise control ing responsive fog lights system” F3-
pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-
function. Refer to “To set cruise control” 71.
sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes
F7-48. when a malfunction occurs in the Steering ! Steering responsive fog lights
Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering warning indicator
& Automatic headlight Responsive Headlight (SRH)” F3-69. S03AE7701
beam leveler warning This indicator appears when the steering
light (models with LED responsive fog lights system malfunctions.
& Front fog light indicator When this indicator appears while the
headlights) S03AE33 light (if equipped) S03AE25 system is activated, contact your SUBARU
This light illuminates when the automatic This indicator light illuminates while the dealer for an inspection.
headlight beam leveler does not operate front fog lights are illuminated. ! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
normally. indicator
If this light illuminates during driving, have & Headlight indicator S03AE7702
This indicator appears when the steering
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU light (if equipped) S03AE24 responsive fog lights system is deacti-
dealer. vated. This indicator disappears when the
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions. system is activated.
– CONTINUED –

(174,1)
& X-MODE indicator (if & BSD/RCTA OFF indica- & Icy road surface warn-
equipped) S03AE68 tor (if equipped) S03AE86 ing indicator (if
This indicator appears while the X-MODE The indicator appears when the BSD/ equipped) S03AE82
is activated. It will disappear when the X- RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate When the outside temperature is 378F
MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To acti- the BSD/RCTA, or when the BSD/RCTA is (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
vate/deactivate the X-MODE” F7-39. suspended temporarily. In this case the will illuminate to inform the driver that the
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on road surface may be frozen.
& Hill descent control in- the combination meter display (color
dicator (if equipped) S03AE69
LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA” NOTE
F7-53. . The outside temperature indicator
This indicator appears while the hill des- shows the temperature in the area
cent control function is in standby. It will & RAB warning around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-
flash while the hill descent control function indicator (if equipped) perature indication may differ from the
S03AE91
is operating. It will disappear when the hill actual outside air temperature.
descent control function is not available. This indicator illuminates if the Reverse . The icy road surface warning screen
Refer to “Hill descent control function” F7- Automatic Braking System malfunctions. should be treated only as a guide. Be
40. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking sure to check the condition of the road
System” F7-62. surface before driving.
& BSD/RCTA warning in- . Once the icy road surface warning
dicator (if equipped) S03AE80
& RAB OFF indicator light screen appears, it will not disappear
(if equipped) S03AE92 unless the outside temperature has
This warning indicator appears when the
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case This indicator illuminates when the Re- increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be verse Automatic Braking System is turned
shown on the combination meter display OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic
(color LCD). When this indicator appears, Braking System is suspended temporarily.
have your vehicle inspected by your Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. System” F7-62.

(175,1)
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD) 3-33

F3-35.)
Combination meter display 6) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
(color LCD) (if equipped) to “Select lever/gear position indicator
S03BN (CVT models)” F3-30.)
7) X-MODE indicator (if equipped) (refer to
WARNING “X-MODE indicator” F3-32.)
8) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-9.)/ 3
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
Always pay adequate attention to meter” F3-9.)
safe driving when operating the 9) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge” F3-
combination meter display (color 10.)
LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. A: Deactivating the Eyesight system or
When operation of the combination models without the Eyesight system
meter display (color LCD) interferes B: Activating the Eyesight system
with your ability to concentrate on
driving, stop the vehicle before
performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from the
road and could result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).
Also, a warning message will appear on
the display if a malfunction, etc. is
detected. In addition, several settings for
the displayed content can be performed. Combination meter display (color LCD)
1) ECO gauge
2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” F3-35.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-36.)
3) EyeSight screen
4) Cruise control information display
5) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”
– CONTINUED –

(176,1)
3-34 Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)
& Basic operation original screen after a few seconds. While

NOTE
S03BN01 the “ ” information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display . The welcome screen and the good-
the warning screen again. To recall the bye screen may differ in the actual
message marked with “ ” on the display, words and appearance.
pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering . Once the welcome screen appears, it
wheel toward you. takes a certain period of time to display
it again.
NOTE . If the ignition switch is operated
When the multi-function display (color after unlocking the driver’s door, the
LCD) is set to the setting screen, the welcome screen will not appear even
combination meter display (color LCD) when the driver’s door is opened and
cannot be controlled pressing on the closed.
“ ”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control . The welcome screen will disappear
switch. when you lock the driver’s door by
Control switch using the remote keyless entry system
1) (Up)
(all models) or the keyless access
2) /SET (enter) & Welcome screen (opening function (if equipped) while the wel-
3) (Down) animation) and Good-bye come screen is displayed.
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control screen (ending animation) . The welcome screen including the
S03BN08
switch, the screens and selection items When the driver’s door is opened and multi-function display (color LCD) (if
can be switched. When the “ /SET” closed after unlocking the door, the wel- equipped) and the audio/navigation
switch is pulled toward you, the item can come screen (opening animation) will unit can be set to on or off. For details,
be selected and set. appear on the combination meter display refer to “Welcome Screen” F3-38.
If there are some useful messages, such (color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.
as vehicle information, warning informa- When the ignition switch is turned to the
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
screen, and appear on the display accom- meter display (color LCD) gradually turns
panied by a beep. If such a screen is off with showing Good-bye screen (ending
displayed, take proper action according to animation).
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the

(177,1)
& Warning screen & Telltale screen Mark Name Page

S03BN05 S03BN09
Door open indicator 3-22
LED headlight warning 3-31 3

High beam assist indi- 3-30

cator (if equipped)
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light 3-31
(if equipped)
Engine low oil level 3-18

Example of warning 1) Telltale screen warning indicator
If there is a warning message or a When the corresponding situation occurs,
maintenance notification, it will appear on RAB warning indicator 3-32
the following telltales will be displayed on (if equipped)
this screen. Take the appropriate actions the telltale screen.
based on the messages indicated. RAB OFF indicator (if
NOTE equipped) 3-32
When there is warning information to
display, it will be displayed in five BSD/RCTA warning in- 3-32
warning indicators, starting on the left dicator (if equipped)
in ascending order of severity. If there
are six or more warning information BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 3-32
cator (if equipped)
displayed, pull the “ /SET” switch and
check the item. Automatic headlight
beam leveler system
malfunction warning 3-31
(models with LED
headlights)
– CONTINUED –

(178,1)
Mark Name Page & Basic screens Current fuel consumption screen:
S03BN06
Steering responsive fog By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
lights OFF indicator (if 3-31 steering wheel, you can change the screen
equipped)
that is always displayed.
Windshield washer fluid Average fuel consumption screen:
warning light 3-18
Hill descent control in- 3-32

dicator (if equipped)
Icy road surface warn- 3-32

ing indicator
: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
: Average fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
This screen displays the average rate of only a guide. The indicated value may
fuel consumption since the trip meter was differ from the actual driving range on
last reset. remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
NOTE ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel

(179,1)

Driving information screen: Digital speed screen: TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
: Journey time 1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

This screen displays each tire pressure.
: Journey distance 2) Vehicle speed
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
This screen displays the journey time (the This screen displays the current vehicle and the tire pressure will be displayed on
time that has elapsed since the ignition speed. the screen in yellow.
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that NOTE
has been driven since the ignition switch The tire pressure values are displayed
was turned to the “ON” position). several minutes after driving.
– CONTINUED –

(180,1)
Menu screen entering screen: & Menu screens ! Welcome Screen

S03BN07 S03BN070101
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter The welcome screen can be activated or
the menu screens when all of the following deactivated.
conditions are satisfied.
! Good-bye Screen
. The menu screen entering screen is S03BN070106
selected. The good-bye screen can be activated or
. The “ ” information reminder is off. deactivated.
! Gauge Initial Movement
NOTE S03BN070102
The movement of the meter needles and
. While driving, the setting items
gauge needles that occurs when the
available on the combination meter
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
display (color LCD) are limited.
position can be activated or deactivated.
. For function settings and adjust-
ments on the combination meter dis- ! Units
While this screen is selected, pull and hold play, refer to “Function settings and S03BN070108
the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu Changes the units displayed in the combi-
adjustments on the combination meter nation meter display (color LCD), the type
screen. display (color LCD)” F25. A multi-function display (black and white)
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the and the type B multi-function display (color
steering wheel, you can select the menu. LCD).
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
selected menu. ! Tire Pressure Units (if equipped)
S03BN070109
Changes the units displayed in the Tire
NOTE Pressure Monitoring system.
If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the
! Languages
system will return to the previous S03BN070103
screen. Changes the language displayed in the
combination meter display (color LCD)
! Screen Settings and the multi-function display (color LCD).
S03BN0701
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu, ! Warning Volume (if equipped)
select one of the following menus. S03BN0713
Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the
BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB

(181,1)
warning volume. the door is locked or unlocked. ! Welcome Lighting (if equipped)
S03BN070806
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight . Hazard Warning Flasher Sets the leaving time and approaching
system) Sets the operation of the hazard warning time.
S03BN0702
flasher that blinks when the door is locked . Approaching time set
NOTE or unlocked.
For models with the EyeSight system, Sets the illumination time of the headlights 3
. Security Relocking (if equipped) that illuminate when you approach the
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system. The automatic locking operation period vehicle.
can be set or customized. Select the . Leaving time set
! RAB (models with EyeSight system) preferred seconds to customize the opera-
Sets the time until the headlights turn off
S03BN0712
The Sonar Audible Alarm can be set to on tion period.
when you have moved away from the
or off. . Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) vehicle.
Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all
NOTE doors to unlock simultaneously when the ! One-touch lane changer
For models with Reverse Automatic driver’s door is unlocked. S03BN070807
Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.
Braking system, refer to “Reverse . Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)
Automatic Braking System” F7-62. Select only the rear gate to unlock or all ! Default Settings
S03BN0704
doors to unlock simultaneously when Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
! Sonar Audible Alarm accessing from the cargo area. restore customized settings to the factory
S03BN071204
When the Reverse Automatic Braking default settings. Select “No” to return to the
system is in operation, the warning sound ! Defogger previous screen without restoring to the
to notify that an obstacle is detected in the S03BN070802 factory default settings.
Sets and customizes the operation of the
rear can be activated or deactivated. defogger.
! Vehicle Setting
S03BN0708 ! Interior Light
After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu, S03BN070803
select one of the following menus. Sets and customizes the interior light off
delay timer.
! Keyless Entry System
S03BN070801 ! Auto Light Sensor (if equipped)
Sets the settings used when the keyless S03BN070804
access function was operated. Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the
auto light sensor.
. Audible Signal (if equipped)
Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when

(182,1)
3-40 Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)
Multi-function display (black NOTE ! How to change the information dis-

and white) play
The indicated values vary in accor- S03BO0910
S03BO dance with changes in the vehicle’s
NOTE running conditions. Also, the indicated
For models with multi-function display values may differ slightly from the
(color LCD), refer to “Multi-function actual values and should thus be
display (color LCD)” F3-45. treated only as a guide.
& Driving information display

S03BO09
NOTE
You can set the units for both the multi-
function display (black and white) and
the combination meter at the same
time. For details about setting the
language and units, refer to “Type A 1) INFO button
combination meter” F3-11 or “Menu Pressing the INFO button on the steering
screens” F3-38. wheel switches the display in the following
sequence.
1) Outside temperature indicator

2) X-MODE indicator (if equipped)
3) Driving information display
4) Clock
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the outside temperature indicator,
driving information display and clock all
appear on the display.

(183,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-41
! Driving range on remaining fuel

S03BO0903
1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h
*: models without combination meter dis- 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there
play (color LCD)
The driving range indicates the distance is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank.
that can be driven taking into account the NOTE
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption. The driving range on remaining fuel is
– CONTINUED –

(184,1)
! Average fuel consumption consumption cannot be changed.

S03BO0902
! Current fuel consumption
S03BO0901

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch
fuel between the displays for the average fuel
2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel 1) Displays the driving range per gallon of
consumption that corresponds to the A trip fuel
3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
km meter mileage and the average fuel con- 2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel
sumption that corresponds to the B trip 3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
This display shows the average rate of fuel meter mileage. km
consumption since the trip meter was last When the trip meter displays is reset, the This indication shows the rate of fuel
reset. corresponding average fuel consumption consumption at the present moment.
value is also reset.
NOTE
. When the trip meter display is reset,
the average fuel consumption corre-
sponding to that trip meter display is
not shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or
1 km).
. The units for measuring average fuel

(185,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-43
! Journey time (models without com- time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed corresponding to the A trip meter
bination meter display (color LCD)) display is giving a reading other than the display and the average vehicle speed
S03BO0904
journey time, the display switches to the corresponding to the B trip meter display.
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and When either of the trip meter displays is
returns to its original reading each time a reset, the corresponding average vehicle
complete hour has elapsed. speed value is also reset. 3
NOTE NOTE
The journey time is reset when the When either trip meter display is reset,
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” the average vehicle speed correspond-
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position. ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
! Average vehicle speed quently covered a distance of 1 mile
S03BO0905
(or 1 km).
! Turn off display of driving informa-
The journey time shows the time that has tion display
elapsed since the ignition switch was S03BO0906
turned to the “ON” position. Select the blank space in the menu to exit
the driving information display selection.
NOTE
. The average fuel consumption and
average vehicle speed are calculated
even while the driving information dis-
play is not displayed.
. Even if you turn off the driving
1) When units in miles is selected information display, the display will
2) When units in km is selected automatically turn on when the battery
This display shows the average vehicle voltage is disconnected and then re-
speed since the trip meter was last reset. connected for battery replacement or
Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles fuse replacement.
The journey time indication flashes each the display between the average vehicle
– CONTINUED –

(186,1)
& Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- condition of the road surface before
tor cation driving.
S03BO01 S03BO0101
& X-MODE indicator (if

equipped) S03BO12
This indicator will be shown while the X-

MODE is activated. It will turn off when the
X-MODE is deactivated.
& Clock
S03BO10
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” F3-60.
1) U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Except U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to a
NOTE certain temperature or lower, the tempera-
. The outside temperature indicator ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to
shows the temperature around the show that the road surface may be frozen.
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- If the display is already indicating that the
dication may differ from the actual outside temperature is low when the
outside air temperature. ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
. The temperature unit cannot be position, the indication does not flash.
changed.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the

(187,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-45
Multi-function display (color & Features & Welcome screen

S03BP25 S03BP07
LCD) (if equipped) The multi-function display (color LCD) has When the driver’s door is opened and
S03BP the following functions. closed, the welcome screen will appear for
NOTE a short time.
Description Page
For models with multi-function display
Displays useful messages, such
NOTE 3
(black and white), refer to “Multi-func- as notification, etc. 3-46 . The welcome screen will disappear
tion display (black and white)” F3-40. when the ignition switch is turned to the
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel 3-47
consumption screen, etc.) “ON” position while the welcome
WARNING Sets and adjusts maintenance
screen is displayed.
3-58 . The welcome screen can be set to on
notification
Always pay adequate attention to or off. For details, refer to “Screen
safe driving when operating the Also, the multi-function display (color LCD) Settings” F3-38.
multi-function display (color LCD) can also be used to set and initialize the . For a certain period of time after the
while the vehicle is in motion. When multi-function display (color LCD) itself. welcome screen has once appeared, it
operation of the multi-function dis- may not appear again even when the
play (color LCD) is disturbing your NOTE driver’s door is opened and closed
awareness and ability to concen- . When the vehicle is in motion, again. This does not indicate a mal-
trate on driving, stop the vehicle in certain functions and selections may function.
a safe place before performing op- not be available.
erations on the screen. Also, do not . You can set the language and units
concentrate on the display while for both the multi-function display
driving. Doing so may cause you to (color LCD) and the combination meter
look away from the road and could at the same time. For details about
result in an accident. setting the language and units, refer to
“Menu screens” F3-38.
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
the market and vehicle specifications.
– CONTINUED –

(188,1)
3-46 Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)
& Self-check screen item will change. more.

S03BP09
If there is a notification, the message will
NOTE be displayed. Take the appropriate actions
When the setting is “On”, the self check & Interruption screen
based on the message indicated. S03BP19
screen appears. For details about this
After the self-check is completed, today’s
setting, refer to “On/Off setting” F3-58.
date, the stored birthday or the stored
When the ignition switch is turned to the anniversary is displayed.
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
be performed. The screens corresponding NOTE
to the following items will appear one after . After performing the maintenance,
another for several seconds each. change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” F3-58.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining until Example
the registered notification date is 15
days or less. Useful messages, such as reminder in-
– The total driving distance remain- formation, weather information (if
ing until the registered notification equipped) and traffic information (if
distance is approximately 311 miles equipped) may interrupt the current screen
(500 km) or less. and appear on the display accompanied
by a beep. Take proper action according to
. The maintenance notification screen
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine the message.
will be displayed until either of the
oil replacement. following conditions is satisfied. The interruption screen will return to the
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
replacement. – The period of time passed after original screen after a few seconds. Also,
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. the registered notification date is 15 you can press the INFO button to skip the
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the days or more. interruption screen.
interval of inspection and maintenance. – The total distance driven after the
When the checks are performed, the color registered notification distance is
of the icon corresponding to the checked approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

(189,1)
& Basic operation & Basic screens is in the “ACC” position.

S03BP06 S03BP10
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the basic screen will be
displayed.
! Outside temperature indicator 3
S03BP1016
The outside temperature is displayed on
the multi-function display (color LCD).
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
dication may differ from the actual
Control switch outside air temperature.
1) INFO button . The temperature unit cannot be
2) changed.
3) /SET
4)
Press the INFO button on the steering
wheel to switch the item displayed on the
basic screen. You can operate the items
on the setting screen by using the “ ”,
“ ” and “ /SET” switches.
1) Clock
2) Climate control*
3) Outside temperature
4) Information screen
*: This is not displayed on the multi-function
display (color LCD) when the ignition switch
– CONTINUED –

(190,1)
! Climate control screen climate control operation, refer to “Climate

S03BP1017
The climate control status is displayed on control panel” F4-2.
the multi-function display (color LCD). ! Clock
S03BP1018
The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to“Clock” F3-60.
Climate control screen

1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)
2) FULL AUTO indicator
3) AUTO indicator
4) Airflow mode indicator
5) Set temperature indicator (right-hand
side)*1
6) Air inlet selection indicator
7) SYNC indicator*1
8) Fan speed indicator
9) Air conditioner ON indicator
*1: Models with the SYNC function only
When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the basic screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details about

(191,1)
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
Content Description Page

Electric components operating status screen Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 3-50 3
Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 3-50
EyeSight screen*1 Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 3-51
Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 3-51
Weather information screen*2 Displays weather information. 3-52
Traffic information*2/Navigation*3 screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 3-52
Audio screen Displays audio system information. 3-53
Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 3-53
Clock screen Displays the clock. 3-53
Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen. 3-54
*1: Models with EyeSight system

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
*3: Models with navigation system
– CONTINUED –

(192,1)
! Electric components operation NOTE ! Prevention safety screen

S03BP101902
screen
S03BP101901 . Indicators do not display for func-
tions that are not equipped to the
vehicle.
. The indicators of functions that are
not operating are displayed in grey.
. For models with auto on/off head-
lights; If the multi-function display
(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is
removed, the Auto on/off headlights
indicator turns off on the multi-function
display (color LCD). After reinstalling
the removed multi-function display
(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the
vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights 1) Telltale screen
1) Lane Departure/Sway Warning indica- indicator will appear once more if the 2) Steering angle
tor*1 3) Vehicle posture
light control switch is turned to the
2) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator*1 4) Running condition
3) Stop lights
“AUTO” position.
4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*1 . The exterior lights indicators on the This screen displays the driving status of
5) BSD/RCTA*1 screen do not notify the driver when the the vehicle and the operation status func-
6) Headlights*2 bulbs burn out. The indicators on the tions. For functions that are operating, the
7) Front fog lights*2 screen still illuminate. indicator will illuminate or flash.
8) Turn signals
9) Auto on/off headlights*1 NOTE
*1: If equipped . The vehicle posture indication may
*2: The daytime running lights are not dis- differ from the actual vehicle posture.
played. . When X-MODE has turned on, the
screen of the multi-function display is
This screen displays the electric compo- switched to the prevention safety
nents operation status of the vehicle. screen.

(193,1)
! EyeSight screen (models with ! Favorite screen Item Details

S03BP101904
EyeSight system)
S03BP101903
The engine coolant temperature is

displayed.
3
The engine oil temperature is
displayed.
The average vehicle speed is

displayed.
Favorite screen (display example) The accelerator opening ratio is

1) Lead vehicle indicator This screen displays up to three optional displayed.
2) Your own vehicle indicator pieces of information that can be selected
3) Stop lights from the following items.
4) Road line indicator
The vehicle posture is displayed.
5) Lane indicator
This screen displays the status of the
EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-
tor moves forward and backward depend- The current rate of fuel consump-
tion is displayed.
ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
The direction of the vehicle is
displayed.*1
The weather information is dis-

played.*2
– CONTINUED –

(194,1)
Item Details ! Weather information screen (if satellite radio subscription.

equipped) . The weather forecast for the set
The posted speed limit of the road S03BP101905
destination remains displayed until a
you are currently driving on is
displayed.*1 new destination is set or until you reach
the destination.
. Depending on the reception timing
The calendar is displayed.
of XM, the display of weather informa-
tion may be delayed.
! Navigation screen (models with
navigation system)
Nothing is displayed. S03BP101906
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE 1) Weather information for the destination.*

2) Weather information for the current loca-
Some displayed items may be not tion.
displayed depending on the model *: Only when a destination is set in the
and specifications. navigation system
The items shown in the favorite screen can
be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite The weather information is displayed on
setting” F3-57. the screen.
NOTE The navigation system information to the
. When all of the following conditions destination is displayed on the screen.
are satisfied, weather information is
displayed. NOTE
– The vehicle is equipped with an When a destination is not set in the
audio and navigation system for navigation system, the compass orien-
SiriusXM satellite radio. tation, name, route sign and speed limit
– You have a current SiriusXM of the road the vehicle is traveling on

(195,1)
remain displayed on the screen. ! Fuel consumption screen ! Clock/date screen

S03BP101908 S03BP101909
! Audio screen
S03BP101907
1) Driving range on remaining fuel The time and date are displayed.
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding You can adjust the time and date. For
The screen of the currently selected audio to the driving distance of each trip meter
details, refer to “Clock” F3-60.
source is displayed. 3) Current fuel consumption
For details about how to use the audio set, The fuel consumption information is dis-
refer to the separate navigation/audio played on the screen.
Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
– CONTINUED –

(196,1)
! Guidance screen NOTE & Setting screen

S03BP101910 S03BP28
1. Press and hold the INFO button on the
guidance screen. The top menu is dis-
played.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the top
menu.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
4. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the 2nd
menu.
5. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
When the INFO button on the steering selected menu.
wheel is pressed and held on this screen,
the setting screen can be displayed. When the combination meter display
For details, refer to “Setting screen” F3- (color LCD) is displaying the menu
54. screen entering screen, the system will
not move to the setting screen even if
the INFO button is pressed and held.

(197,1)
The menu list is as follows.
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Time/Date Time/Date* Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-56
Birthday Set a birthday. 3-56 3
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-56
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Display/Beep Screen Off* Turn the screen on or off. Yes or No 3-56
Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 3-57
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-57
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-57
Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-58
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-58
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-58
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-58
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
ON/OFF activated when the ignition switch is turned to the On or Off 3-58
“ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-59
Initialize — Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-59
Go Back — Return to the setting screen. —
*: You can also set this while driving.
– CONTINUED –

(198,1)
! Date and time settings want to register.

S03BP2801 NOTE
You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-
format settings. saries.
! Current date and time setting
S03BP280101 ! Display/Beep settings
For details about clock setting, refer to S03BP2805
You can set the display settings and
“Clock” F3-60. volume settings.
! Birthday setting ! Screen OFF setting
S03BP280102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, S03BP280501
a message will be displayed when the 1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
position. This function can be set to on or F3-54.
off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen
setting” F3-57. 3. Enter the date and the text by using the
1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in control switches.
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting 4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
screen” F3-54. Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
days.
! Anniversary setting
S03BP280103
1. The procedure for setting an anniver- 2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
sary is the same as “Birthday setting” F3- Select “No” to return to the previous
56, except that in step 1 “Anniversary” is screen.
selected.
Restoring the screen
2. Select from the list the number that you When the INFO button is operated after

(199,1)
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go switches.
“ACC” position, the screen will be restored. Back” to return to the previous screen 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
The screen will be restored with the basic without applying the setting changes. Back” to return to the previous screen
screen that was displayed when the without applying the setting changes.
screen was turned off. NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3
NOTE 3
NOTE items.
While the screen is off, the screen . The same item cannot be selected Traffic information setting is only dis-
switches to the climate control screen for the left, center or right location. played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
only when the climate control system is . Weather information for 3 hours satellite radio.
operated. later or 6 hours later can be displayed.
! Beep setting
S03BP280504
! Favorite setting 1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
S03BP280502 ! Bypass screen setting
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd S03BP280503 setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting 1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd F3-54.
screen” F3-54. menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” F3-54.
2. Set the beep volume by using the

2. Set the desired items by using the control switches.
control switches. For details about items, 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
refer to “Favorite screen” F3-51. of items on or off by using the control Back” to return to the previous screen
– CONTINUED –

(200,1)
without applying the setting changes. ! Maintenance schedule setting

NOTE S03BP280304
. The reminder will be displayed by The setting procedure is the same as
! Maintenance settings
S03BP2803 either date or distance in accordance “Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the
You can set maintenance reminders. with the setting. “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.
! Engine oil setting . Even when either “Day” or “Dis- ! On/Off setting
S03BP280301
tance” are displayed as “_ _” a pop-up S03BP280305
1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu screen will appear. 1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu on
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting . The reminder will be displayed until the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” F3-54. either of the following conditions is screen” F3-54.
satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
! Oil filter setting
S03BP280302
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 1.
2. Set the date and distance of the 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening
reminder by using the control switches. ! Tires setting screen on or off by using the control
S03BP280303
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select The setting procedure is the same as switches.
“Update” to change the notification dis- “Engine oil setting” F3-58, but select the 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
tance to the default value. Select “Go “Tires” item in step 1. Back” to return to the previous screen
Back” to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.
without applying the setting changes.

(201,1)
! Clear setting ! Initialize & How to get the source code

S03BP280306 S03BP2804
1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd You can initialize the items that have been using the open source
S03BP29
menu on the setting screen. Refer to set to your preference. Free/Open Source Software Information
“Setting screen” F3-54. 1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting This product contains Free/Open Source
screen” F3-54. Software (FOSS). 3
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL.
http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-
source/ivi/subaru/
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches.

(202,1)
3-60 Instruments and controls/Clock
Clock 4. Select “Vehicle”. ! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-

S03AF 5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then play
S03AF030102
For models with a SUBARU genuine select “Manual”. The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
navigation and/or audio system, the clock display. Perform the following procedure to
can be adjusted using either auto mode or switch the display format.
manual mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment “OFF” position.
. Manual mode: manual clock adjust- 2. Press and hold the “−” button located
ment near the clock display for approximately 5
seconds. The clock display will then start
to flash.
& Setting the clock manually 3. While the clock display is flashing,
S03AF03
! Type A multi-function display (black press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
and white) mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
S03AF0301 then change.
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
4. The clock display will continue to flash
6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button
for approximately 3 seconds to indicate
beside the clock.
that the clock display has been changed.
2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.

(203,1)
Instruments and controls/Clock 3-61
! Type B multi-function display (color 6. Press the “INFO” button on the steer-
LCD) ing wheel to display the guidance screen.
S03AF0302
NOTE
2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then
select “Manual”.
When the combination meter display
(color LCD) is displaying the menu
screen entering screen, the system will
not move to the selection screen even if
the “INFO” button is pressed and held.
Before adjusting the clock, be sure to
change the combination meter display
(color LCD) to a screen other than the
menu screen entering screen.
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”. 7. While displaying the guidance screen,
press and hold the “INFO” button on the
steering wheel. The screen goes to the
selection screen.
1) “INFO” button
– CONTINUED –

(204,1)
3-62 Instruments and controls/Clock
switch.
1) 11. Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to scroll

2) /SET through to the items you can set.
10. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET
3)
switch. (1) Use the / SET switch to choose
8. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to select the the item you would like to change.
item. NOTE (2) Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to
If “Clock adjustment” is not in manual adjust the items.
mode, “Time/Date” cannot be selected. 12. Select “Set” and pull the /SET switch
Be sure to perform steps 2 through 5. to complete the clock setting.
Select “Go Back” to return to the previous
screen without saving settings.
NOTE
The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte-
nance reminder system function are
based on the time and date on the
multifunction display (color LCD).
9. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET

(205,1)
Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-63
& Setting the clock automati- ! Models without navigation system Light control switch
S03AF0202
cally The clock will be set and adjusted auto- S03AH
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

S03AF02
matically when a smartphone is connected & Precautions and tips
S03AH06
via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook
data. CAUTION
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
3
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth . Use of any lights for a long period
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s of time while the engine is not
Manual for the audio/navigation system. running can cause the battery to
discharge.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET- . Before leaving the vehicle, make
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s sure that the lights are turned off.
Manual for the audio/navigation system. If the vehicle is left unattended
The clock will be adjusted automatically. for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be
discharged.
NOTE
2. Press the button. Depending on the model of smart-
3. Select “Settings”. phone, the settings of the connected NOTE
4. Select “Vehicle”. smartphone may need to be changed. . Even if the key is removed from the
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then (ex: For iOS or other models, notifica- ignition switch, the lights can be illumi-
select “Auto”. tion settings may need to be activated.) nated by operating the light control
6. Press the button again to complete For details, check the instructions on switch from the “ ” (off) position to the
the setting. connecting smartphones. “ ” or “ ” position.
. If the driver’s door is opened while
! Models with navigation system & Regulatory information the lights are illuminated and the key is
S03AF04
S03AF0201 removed from the ignition switch, the
The clock will be set automatically where a chirp sound will inform the driver that
GPS signal is available. the lights are illuminated.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
– CONTINUED –

(206,1)
3-64 Instruments and controls/Light control switch
& Headlights ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights ! Welcome lighting function (if
S03AH01 and license plate lights are automatically equipped)
on or off depending on the level of the S03AH0103
The welcome lighting function turns on the
ambient light. low beam headlight for smooth approach-
NOTE ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by a SUBARU The function is activated while all of the
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer following conditions are met.
for details. Also, for models with a . The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
combination meter display (color position
LCD), the setting can be changed using . It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle off headlights
Setting” F3-39.
. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights When approaching:
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever. While the light control switch is in the While the welcome lighting function is
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto- activated, the low beam headlights will
“ ” position: matically turn on when the windshield automatically illuminate when unlocking
Instrument panel illumination, headlights, wipers operate several times. The head- the doors and the rear gate by using the
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear lights will automatically turn off when the remote keyless entry system.
side marker lights, tail lights and license wipers stop. The low beam headlights will remain
plate lights are on. illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn
“ ” position: NOTE off. However, if any of the following
Instrument panel illumination, parking The ON/OFF setting of this function can operations is done, the low beam head-
lights, front side marker lights, rear side be changed by a SUBARU dealer. lights will turn off.
marker lights, tail lights and license plate Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
. The doors are locked.
lights are on. tails.
. The light control switch is turned to a
“ ” position (if equipped): position other than “AUTO”.
. Auto on/off headlights “ ” position:
The headlights are all off. . The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

(207,1)
When exiting: tails. & High/low beam change

While the welcome lighting function is ! Sensor for the auto on/off head- (dimmer)
activated, the low beam headlights will lights (if equipped)
S03AH02
remain illuminated even when either of the S03AH0101
following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is 3
turned to the “OFF” status (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
The low beam headlights will turn off under
any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low 1) High beam
beam headlights were illuminated by the 2) Low beam
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
welcome lighting function.
shown in the illustration. When the headlights are on high beam, the
. 30 seconds have passed since the door
high beam indicator light “ ” on the
is opened and closed.*1 CAUTION combination meter is also on.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”. If any object is placed on or near the
. The locking procedure is performed sensor, the sensor may not detect
twice. When performing the unlocking the level of the ambient light cor-
procedure after performing the locking rectly and the auto on/off headlights
procedure, perform the locking procedure may not operate properly.
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the welcome
lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-
– CONTINUED –

(208,1)
& Headlight flasher & High beam assist function (if vehicle.
S03AH03
equipped) . When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
S03AH07
tioning or is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
. The high beam assist function uti- NOTE
lizes the stereo camera installed at the The factory setting (default setting) for
position of the front map lights. this function is set as “operational”.
. For details on how to handle the This setting can be changed to OFF
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
Manual supplement for the EyeSight For more details, contact a SUBARU
system. dealer.
The high beam assist function automati-
! How to use the high beam assist
cally changes the headlight from high
function
beam to low beam (or vice versa). S03AH0701
The high beam assist function will be
When all of the following conditions are activated when all the following conditions
CAUTION met, the headlight will change to high are met.
Do not hold the lever in the flashing beam. . The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position for more than just a few . When the vehicle speed increases to or position and the low beam headlights are
seconds. above 20 mph (32 km/h). on automatically.
. There is no preceding or oncoming . The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever vehicle.
toward you and then release it. The high . The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
beam will stay on for as long as you hold . The road does not have a sharp curve.
the lever.
When any of the following conditions is
When the headlights are on high beam, the met, the headlight will change to low beam.
high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates. . When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming

(209,1)
! How to temporarily lower the sensi- the next time the ignition switch is
tivity of the high beam assist func- turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
tion and the engine is restarted.
S03AH0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist ! How to change the headlight mode
function can be lowered by performing the manually
following operations. S03AH0702
3
Change to the low beam:
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control switch to When you return the turn signal lever to the
the “AUTO” position and push the signal center position, the high beam assist
lever forward (high beam position). function will turn off and the high beam
assist indicator light will turn off.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15 sec- Change to the high beam:
High beam assist indicator onds, press the “ / ” (following distance When you turn the light control switch to
setting) switch more than 10 times con- the “ ” position, the headlight mode will
When the high beam assist function is secutively.
activated, the high beam assist indicator be changed to the high beam.
light on the combination meter will illumi- At this time, the high beam assist function
nate. When the sensitivity of the high beam will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
assist function is lowered, the EyeSight will turn off and the high beam indicator
NOTE temporary stop indicator (White) “ ” on light will turn on.
If the high beam assist function is the combination meter will illuminate.
malfunctioning or is temporarily NOTE
stopped, the headlight will be fixed at
NOTE . After manually changing the head-
low beam. . The sensitivity of the high beam light mode to the high beam, if you turn
assist function cannot be lowered in on the high beam assist function,
the following conditions. return the light control switch to the
– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise “AUTO” position.
Control is in operation . When manually changing the head-
– The EyeSight warning indicator light mode to the high beam, if you turn
(yellow) is illuminated the light control switch to the “ ”
. The sensitivity of the high beam position, the instrument panel illumina-
assist function returns to normal level tion, parking lights, front side marker
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
– CONTINUED –

(210,1)
and license plate lights will be on. are dirty. ged from the high beam to the low beam.
– If there are lights similar to the – When your vehicle passes an on-
! Tips for the high beam assist sys- headlights or the tail lights in the coming vehicle suddenly in a blind
tem surrounding area. curve.
S03AH0703
. The high beam assist function recog- – When an oncoming vehicle or ve- – When another vehicle passes in
nizes the conditions surrounding the vehicle ahead is driven without its head- front of your vehicle.
hicle based on the brightness of illumina- lights and tail lights on. – When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, – If the headlights of an oncoming hicle ahead comes in and out of view
the headlight mode may switch in some vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle because of continuous curves, median
situations that do not match to the driver’s ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the strips, roadside trees, etc.
sense. light beams are not aimed correctly. . If the stereo camera detects the light of
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be – When a rapid change of brightness the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
detected. continues while driving. the headlight mode may change from the
. Under the following situations, the – When driving on a road with many high beam to the low beam automatically.
brightness of ambient illumination may ups and downs or uneven surfaces. . The headlight mode may change from
not be detected correctly and the high – When driving on a road with many the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam assist function may not work prop- curves. beam mode may continue, when affected
erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam – When there are some objects that by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or reflect light strongly, such as a road of an advertisement board, or a reflective
vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead. object such as a road sign and signboard.
may continue although there are no – When the rear part of the vehicle . The timing of the change of headlight
oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. ahead, such as a container, reflects mode may differ due to the following
In the such cases, change the headlight light strongly. factors.
mode manually. – Color or brightness of the headlights
– When the headlights of your vehicle
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand are damaged or dirty. of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights
storm, heavy rain, etc.). of a vehicle ahead.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
– When the windshield glass is dirty or in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is – The headlights of the oncoming
fogged. being towed. vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
– When the windshield is cracked or – Immediately after the engine has ahead are covered with mud, snow,
damaged. started. etc.
– When the stereo camera is de- . In the following conditions, the head- – Movement and direction of an on-
formed or the stereo camera lenses light mode will not be automatically chan- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

(211,1)
Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) 3-69
– When the headlights of an oncom- . For CVT models, the select lever is in a Steering Responsive Head-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle position other than the “P” position.
ahead illuminate on only one side.
light (SRH) (if equipped)
– When the oncoming vehicle or NOTE S03BL
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle. When the light switch is in the “ ”

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve, position, the instrument panel illumina- 3
road surface, etc.). tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
– Number of passengers and weight and license plate lights are also illumi-
of loaded cargo. nated.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
& Daytime running light system
S03AH04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
1) The target area of illumination when SRH
illuminated, the tail lights do not is activated
illuminate. When it becomes dark 2) The target area of illumination when SRH
outside, turn the light switch to the is not activated
“ ” position to illuminate the head-
lights and tail lights. This will im- SRH is a function that automatically moves
prove visibility and allow other dri- the headlight beam to the left or right in
vers to see your vehicle more easily. accordance with the steering angle and
vehicle speed. This function helps to
The daytime running lights will automati- improve the visibility at night by illuminat-
cally illuminate when the following condi- ing the road ahead at corners and inter-
tions are fulfilled. sections.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
(if equipped), “ ” or off position.
– CONTINUED –

(212,1)
3-70 Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)
tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned Headlight beam leveler

off.
(models with LED headlights)
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF S03AT
indicator on the combination meter flashes The LED headlights produce more light
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” than conventional halogen headlights.
position. It indicates that SRH has been When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for and the headlight beams are angled
an inspection. upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
NOTE may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
. If you turn the ignition switch to the
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
“OFF” position with SRH turned off and
optimum height automatically depending
then start the engine again, SRH will
You can turn the SRH function on or off by on the load the vehicle is carrying.
automatically turn on.
pressing the SRH OFF switch. . When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
cator will illuminate and turn off after
several seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
. SRH may not activate when the shift
lever (MT models) is selected in 1st
gear.
1) SRH OFF indicator

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

(213,1)
Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-71
Fog light switch (if equipped) . The light control switch is in the “ ”
S03BA
position, or the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights are turned on automatically
. The fog light switch is in the “ ” position
. The low beam mode is selected 3
. The select lever is in the “D” position or
the manual mode is selected.
. The steering response fog lights sys-
tem has not been deactivated
. The operating conditions such as the
steering angle and vehicle speed are met
The indicator light on the combination The front fog lights on both sides will turn
meter will illuminate when the front fog on as usual if all of the following conditions
1) Headlight switch lights are illuminated. are met.
2) Fog light switch
. The light control switch is in either of the
The front fog lights will turn on when the & Steering responsive fog following conditions.
fog light switch is placed in the “ ” position lights system (if equipped) – in the “ ” position
S03BA03
while the headlights are in the following The steering responsive fog lights system – in the “AUTO” position and the low
condition. automatically turns the front fog light on beam headlights turn on automatically
. while the headlight switch is in the “ ” and off based on the steering angle and . The fog light switch is in the “ ”
position vehicle speed when entering a curve or position
. for models with the auto on/off head- driving on curved roads. The system is . The low beam mode is selected
lights, while the headlight switch is in the intended to help prevent accidents by
“AUTO” position and the low beam head- enabling better visibility of curves ahead
lights turn on automatically and early recognition of any disabled
vehicles or other obstacles.
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “ ” position. The front fog light on the inside of a curve
will turn on if all of the following conditions
are met.
– CONTINUED –

(214,1)
3-72 Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF ! Steering responsive fog lights OFF Turn signal lever
switch indicator S03AI
S03BA0301 S03BA0302
Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch Steering responsive fog lights OFF indi- 1) Right turn
cator 2) Lane change right signal
Press this switch to deactivate the steering 3) Lane change left signal
responsive fog lights system. Press the This indicator appears when the steering
4) Left turn
switch again to activate the system. responsive fog lights system is deacti-
vated. This indicator disappears when the If the lever does not return after cornering,
system is activated. return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.

(215,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-73
& One-touch lane changer Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that
S03AI01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal S03AM the blade rubbers are not frozen
indicator light three times, push the turn to the windshield or rear window
signal lever up or down slightly and WARNING before switching on the wipers.
immediately release it. Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the 3
NOTE windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
The operational/non-operational shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the blade rubbers to be
setting of the one-touch lane changer defroster. damaged but also might cause
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Otherwise the washer fluid can the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for freeze on the windshield, blocking rubbers are frozen to the window
details. For models with the combina- your view. glass, be sure to operate the
tion meter display (color LCD), the defroster, windshield wiper dei-
setting can also be changed by operat- cer (if equipped) or rear window
ing the combination meter display CAUTION defogger before turning on the
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi- wiper.
cle Setting” F3-39. . Do not operate the washer con- . If the wipers stop during opera-
tinuously for more than 10 section because of ice or some other
onds, or when the washer fluid obstruction on the window, this
tank is empty. This may cause might cause the wiper motor to
overheating of the washer motor. fail even if the wiper switch is
Check the washer fluid level fre- turned off. If this occurs,
quently, such as at fuel stops. promptly stop the vehicle in a
. Do not operate the wipers when safe place, turn the ignition
the windshield or rear window is switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
dry. This may scratch the glass, sition and clean the window glass
damage the blade rubbers and to allow proper wiper operation.
might cause the wiper motor to . Use clean water if windshield
fail. Before operating the wiper washer fluid is unavailable. In
on a dry windshield or rear win- areas where water freezes in
dow, always use the windshield winter, use SUBARU Windshield
washer. Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
– CONTINUED –

(216,1)
3-74 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
Refer to “Windshield washer and streaking on the glass. If you & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” F11-29. cannot remove those streaks after switches
. Do not clean the blade rubbers operating the washer or if the wiper S03AM01
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur- The wiper operates only when the ignition
with gasoline or a solvent, such switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
as paint thinner or benzine. This face of the windshield or rear window
will cause deterioration of the and the blade rubbers using a sponge ! Operating the wiper lever
S03AM0106
blade rubbers. or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
NOTE rubbers with clean water. The glass is
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- clean if no beads form on the glass
tected against overloads by a circuit when you rinse with water.
breaker. If the motor operates continu- . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
ously under an unusually heavy load, even after following this procedure,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the replace the blade rubbers with new
motor temporarily. If this happens, park ones. For replacement instructions,
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- F11-30.
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally. : Mist operation (for a single wipe)
. Clean your blade rubbers and win- : Off
dow glass periodically with a washer : Intermittent operation
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or : Low speed operation
road film. Operate the windshield : High speed operation
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
over the windshield or rear window. lever up. The wipers operate until you
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate- release the lever.
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation

(217,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-75
! Wiper intermittent time control ! Windshield washer NOTE

S03AM0103 S03AM0104
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- control lever toward you. The washer fluid Windshield washer fluid warning light
ing interval of the wiper. The operating sprays until you release the lever. The
interval can be adjusted in several steps wipers operate while you pull the lever. The windshield washer fluid warning
from the shortest interval to the longest. light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-29.
– CONTINUED –

(218,1)
3-76 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
& Rear window wiper and ! Rear wiper CAUTION

S03AM0201
washer switch With the switch turned to the “ ” position,
S03AM02
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at Do not attach anything that disturbs
intervals corresponding to the vehicle the rear wiper operation on the rear
speed. In this position, when you move gate. Doing so may damage the rear
the select lever to the “R” position (CVT wiper when it operates.
models) or the shift lever to the reverse
position (MT models), the rear wiper will ! Washer
switch to continuous operation. When you S03AM0202
To wash the rear window, turn the knob to
move the select lever/shift lever from the the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
“R” (reverse) position to another position, and the wiper operates until you release
the rear wiper will return to intermittent the knob.
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“ ” position, if the front windshield wiper is
: Washer operation (accompanied by
wiper operation) operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
: Continuous operation select lever/shift lever to the “R” (reverse)
: Intermittent operation position.
: Off The factory setting (default setting) of the
Washer operation (accompanied by reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
: wiper operation)
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.

(219,1)
Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-77
Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com- ! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

S03AP pass (if equipped) ture
S03AP0205
S03AP02
Always check that the inside and outside Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
mirrors are properly adjusted before you dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
start driving. feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming 3
& Inside mirror feature will default to on with each ignition
S03AP01 cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0206
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “ ” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
1) Display 2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
2) Switch vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
1) Normal position matically dims to eliminate the glare and
2) Anti-glare position preserve your vision.
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the
antiglare position.
Compass calibration zones
– CONTINUED –

(220,1)
3-78 Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3. To adjust for compass zone variance: & Auto-dimming mirror/com- ! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
(1) Find your current location and pass with HomeLink® (if ture
S03AP0705
zone number on the map. equipped) Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for S03AP07
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
more than 6 seconds or until a zone feature is enabled when the switch’s green
number appears in the display. LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
(3) Once the zone number appears in feature will default to on with each ignition
the display, toggle the “ ” switch cycle.
again until your current location zone
! To Operate the Compass Feature
number appears. After you stop press- S03AP0706
ing the switch, your new zone number 1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
will be saved. Within a few seconds, press and hold the “ ” switch for more
the display will show a compass direc- than 3 seconds or until the display turns
tion. on/off. The compass feature will default to
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan- on with each ignition cycle.
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, 2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold 1) Display vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or 2) HomeLink Buttons brated.
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a 3) Switch
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
brated. feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision.

(221,1)
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a outside of the garage.

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the . Do not use HomeLink with any
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- garage door opener that lacks
brated. safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- standards (this includes any gar- 3
tem age door opener model manufac-
S03AP0704
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System tured before April 1, 1982). A
provides a convenient way to replace up to garage door that cannot detect
three hand-held radio-frequency remotes an object signaling the door to
used to activate devices such as gate stop and reverse does not meet
operators, garage door openers, entry current U.S. federal safety stan-
door locks, security systems, even home dards.
Compass calibration zones lighting. The below steps are generic . It is also recommended that a new
3. To adjust for compass zone variance: programming instructions; for Genie and battery be placed in the hand-
(1) Find your current location and Sommer garage door openers please go held remote (garage door opener
zone number on the map. directly to the HomeLink website. Addi- remote) of the device for quicker
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for tional information and programming vi- and more accurate training.
more than 6 seconds or until a zone deos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and . Some vehicles may require the
number appears in the display. ignition switch to be turned to the
(3) Once the zone number appears in www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-
the display, toggle the “ ” switch gramming and/or operation of
again until your current location zone CAUTION
HomeLink.
number appears. After you stop press- . Before programming HomeLink
ing the switch, your new zone number . Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
to a garage door opener or gate age door opener remote) of the
will be saved. Within a few seconds, operator, make sure that people
the display will show a compass direc- device you are programming for
and objects are out of the way of use in other vehicles as well as
tion. the device to prevent potential for future HomeLink program-
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan- harm or damage. ming. It is also suggested that
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, upon the sale of the vehicle, the
. When programming a garage
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold programmed HomeLink buttons
door opener, it is advised to park
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or
– CONTINUED –

(222,1)
be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-
tons” F3-82.
! Programming a New HomeLink

Button
S03AP070409
1) Garage door opener remote 3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage flashing orange, press and hold the hand-
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 held remote button. Continue pressing the
cm) away from the HomeLink button that hand-held remote button until the
you would like to program. HomeLink indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release
1) Indicator Light NOTE the hand-held remote button.
2) HomeLink Buttons Some hand-held remotes (garage door NOTE
opener remotes) may actually train
1. Press and release the HomeLink but- better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches Some devices may require you to re-
ton that you would like to program. The (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you place this “Programming a New
HomeLink indicator light will flash orange have difficulty with the programming HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-
slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink process. dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Buttons” F3-82). Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-
ming” F3-82.

(223,1)
1) Indicator Light 1) “Learn” button 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
4. Press the HomeLink button that you 5. At the garage door opener motor, hold for two seconds and release the
would like to program and observe the (security gate motor, etc...) locate the HomeLink button up to three times. At this
indicator light. “Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This point programming is complete and your
. If the indicator light remains constant can usually be found where the hanging device should operate when the HomeLink
green, your device should operate antenna wire is attached to the motor-head button is pressed and released.
when the HomeLink button is pressed. unit (see the device’s manual to identify
At this point, if your device operates, this button). The name and color of the
programming is complete. button may vary by manufacturer.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two sec- NOTE
onds and release the HomeLink button A ladder and/or second person may
up to three times to complete the simplify the following steps.
programming process. At this point if 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
your device operates, programming is “Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
complete. If the device does not have 30 seconds in which to complete step
operate, continue with the next step 7.
of the programming instructions.
– CONTINUED –

(224,1)
! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- the device during the “cycling” process
gramming to prevent possible overheating.
S03AP070410
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
Proceed with “Programming a New
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for ! Using HomeLink
S03AP070411
HomeLink to pick up the signal during To operate, simply press and release the
programming. Similar to this Canadian programmed HomeLink button. Activation
law, some U.S. gate operators are de- will now occur for the trained device (i.e.
signed to “time-out” in the same manner. garage door opener, gate operator, secur-
The indicator LED on the hand-held ity system, entry door lock, home/office
remote will go off when the device times lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-
out, indicating that it has finished transmit- held remote of the device may also be
1) Status Indicators
ting. used at any time.
8. If status indicator arrows appear next If you live in Canada or you are having
to the indicator light, please refer to ! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
difficulties programming a gate operator or S03AP070412
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication” garage door opener by using the program- To erase programming from the three
F3-83. ming procedures, replace “Programming a buttons (individual buttons cannot be
New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
In the event that there are still program- outlined below), follow the step noted:
ming difficulties or questions, additional following:
HomeLink information and programming While the HomeLink indicator light is Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
videos can be found at flashing orange, press and release (“cy- buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
www.HomeLink.com and cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every indicator will change from continuously lit
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For two seconds until the HomeLink indicator to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Genie and Sommer garage door openers light changes from orange to green. You Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
please go directly to the HomeLink web- may now release the hand-held remote HomeLink is now ready to be programmed
site. button. at any time beginning with “Programming a
New HomeLink Button” - step 1.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

(225,1)
! Reprogramming a Single Range may be reduced by obstacles such online at www.HomeLink.com and
HomeLink Button as houses or trees. You may have to slow www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
S03AP070406 your vehicle speed to successfully receive
To program a previously trained button, ! Using Two-Way Communication
the garage door opener communication. S03AP070415
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink ! Programming Two-Way Commu- 3
button. DO NOT release the button. nication
S03AP070414
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink button can be released at this
point. Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu- 1) Status Indicators

nication Recall and display (at any time) the last
S03AP070413
HomeLink has the capability of commu- recorded garage door status message
1) Status Indicators
nicating with your garage door opener. communicated to HomeLink by simulta-
HomeLink can receive and display “clos- Within five seconds after programming a neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and
ing” or “opening” status messages from new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display
compatible garage door opener systems. garage door status indicators will flash the last recorded status for three seconds.
At any time, HomeLink can also recall and rapidly green indicating that the garage
display the last recorded status commu- door two-way communication has been
nicated by the garage door opener to enabled. If your garage door status in-
indicate your garage door being “closed” dicators flashed, two-way communication
or “opened”. programming is complete.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving If the garage door status indicators do not
this communication from the garage door flash, additional HomeLink information
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m). and programming videos can be found
– CONTINUED –

(226,1)
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline . Canada-spec. models

at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking This device complies with part 15 of the
Orange) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid following two conditions: (1) This de-
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange) ence, and (2) this device must accept
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid any interference received, including
Green) interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators.
! Certification
S03AP070416
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
HomeLink information and programming registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
videos can be found at tion.
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

(227,1)
WARNING & Outside mirrors ! Remote control mirror switch

S03AP03 S03AP0302
. When programming the ! Convex mirror (passenger side)

S03AP0301
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a WARNING
garage door opener or other 3
Objects look smaller in a convex
device. Make sure that people
mirror and farther away than when
and objects are out of the way of
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
the garage door or other device
convex mirror to judge the distance
to prevent potential harm or da-
of vehicles behind you when chan-
mage.
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- glance backwards) to determine the
less Control System with a gar- actual size and distance of objects
age door opener that lacks the that you view in convex mirror.
safety stop and reverse feature : Select side to adjust
as required by applicable safety : Direction control
standards. A garage door opener The remote control mirrors operate only
which cannot detect an object, when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
signaling the door to stop and “ACC” position.
reverse, does not meet these
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
safety standards. Using a garage
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
door opener without these fea-
“R” is for the right mirror.
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor- 2. Move the control switch in the direction
mation, consult the HomeLink® you want to move the mirror.
website at www.homelink.com or 3. Return the control switch to the neutral
call 1-800-355-3515. position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.

(228,1)
3-86 Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
Defogger and deicer (if The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
equipped) defogger and deicer system is activated
S03BI
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Climate control system type B and C

1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
To activate simultaneously the rear win-
dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if
Climate control system type A equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if
1) Models without outside mirror defogger equipped), press the control switch that is
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
located on the climate control panel. The
indicator light on the control switch illumi-
nates while the defogger and deicer
system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system will
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the

(229,1)
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 3-87
outside mirrors have been cleared and the Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
windshield blade rubbers have been
NOTE
S03BF
deiced completely before that time, press . Turn on the defogger and deicer
the control switch to turn them off. system if the wipers are frozen to the WARNING
windshield.
For climate control system (type B and . If the windshield is covered with . Do not adjust the steering wheel 3
C), it is possible for the defogger and snow, remove the snow so that the tilt/telescopic position while driv-
deicer system to be set to continuous windshield wiper deicer works effec- ing. This may cause loss of
operation mode by a SUBARU dealer. tively. vehicle control and result in per-
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. . While the defogger and deicer sys- sonal injury.
Also, for models with a combination meter tem is in the continuous operation . If the lever cannot be raised to the
display (color LCD), it is possible to set the mode: fixed position, adjust the steering
defogger and deicer system for the con- – If the vehicle speed remains at 9 wheel again. It is dangerous to
tinuous operation mode. For details, refer mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 drive without locking the steering
to “Vehicle Setting” F3-39. minutes, the windshield wiper dei- wheel. This may cause loss of
cer system automatically stops op- vehicle control and result in per-
CAUTION erating. However, the rear window sonal injury.
defogger system and outside mirror
. To prevent the battery from being
defogger system maintain continu-
discharged, do not operate the
ous operation in this condition.
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than – If the vehicle battery voltage
necessary. drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation of the defog-
. Do not use sharp instruments or ger system and deicer system is
window cleaner containing abra- canceled and the system stops
sives to clean the inner surface of operating.
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
– CONTINUED –

(230,1)
3-88 Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
& Heated Steering Wheel sys- CAUTION

tem (if equipped)
The Heated Steering Wheel system
S03BF01
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
warms the steering wheel at a constant system with the engine running.
temperature. Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
1) Tilt adjustment
of time. When using the Heated
2) Telescopic adjustment
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever
warn the persons concerned.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front . Do not cover the Heated Steering
seats” F1-5. Wheel with an object such as a
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 1) Heated Steering Wheel switch steering wheel cover. Doing so
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired 2) Indicator light may cause the Heated Steering
level. 3) Heated area Wheel to overheat.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
wheel in place. system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel NOTE
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering . If the surface temperature of the
securely locked by moving it up and down,
wheel will be warmed and the indicator steering wheel is approximately above
and forward and backward.
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off 1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull on, the system will not heat the steering
the switch again. Then the indicator light wheel. Then, the indicator light will
will turn off. continue to illuminate.

(231,1)
Instruments and controls/Horn 3-89
. The Heated Steering Wheel system Horn

will automatically turn off approxi- S03AR
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(233,1)
Climate control
Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2 Air inlet selection ...................................................4-9
S04
Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2 To turn off the climate control system.....................4-9
Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2 Defrosting.............................................................. 4-10
Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .... 4-10
Type A ................................................................... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille ..................................... 4-10
Type B ................................................................... 4-4 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight .... 4-10
Type C ................................................................... 4-5 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Automatic climate control operation circuit................................................................ 4-11 4
(type B and C) ...................................................... 4-6 Checking air conditioning system before
summer season ................................................. 4-11
Sensors ................................................................. 4-6
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-7 low temperature weather conditions................... 4-11
Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-7 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................... 4-8 engine is heavily loaded .................................... 4-11
Temperature control............................................... 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-11
Fan speed control .................................................. 4-9 Air filtration system...............................................4-11
Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-9 Replacing a cabin air filter .................................... 4-12

(234,1)
4-2 Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control & Side ventilators Climate control panel

S04AF02
S04AF S04AG
& Center ventilators
S04AF01 WARNING
. The cooling function operates
only when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
Side ventilators ough to cause severe or possibly
1) Close fatal injuries to people or ani-
Center ventilators 2) Open mals.
To adjust the airflow direction, move the To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way down.

(235,1)
Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3

1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
& Type A “Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)
S04AG01
2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-9.)
3) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-8.)
4) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-9.) 4
6) Rear window defogger button and out-
side mirror defogger button (if equipped)
(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-86.)
– CONTINUED –

(236,1)
4-4 Climate control/Climate control panel
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

& Type B matic climate control operation (type B
S04AG02
and C)” F4-6 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-8.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B and C)”
F4-6.)
3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-9.)
5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode (for type B and C)” F4-8.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
F4-10.)
8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)
10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation (type B and
C)” F4-6.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-48.

(237,1)
Climate control/Climate control panel 4-5

& Type C inlet selection” F4-9.)
S04AG03
5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode (for type B and C)” F4-8.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
F4-10.)
8) Passenger’s side temperature control 4
dial (Refer to “Temperature control” F4-
8.)
9) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode
(type C)” F4-8.)
11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)
12) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation (type B and
C)” F4-6.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-48.
1) Driver’s side temperature control dial 2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
(Refer to “Automatic climate control mate control operation (type B and C)”
operation (type B and C)” F4-6 and/or F4-6.)
“Temperature control” F4-8.) 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

(238,1)
4-6 Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B and C)
Automatic climate control operation, the “FULL” indicator light on & Sensors
the multi-function display (color LCD) S04AI03
operation (type B and C) will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
The sensors are located as follows.
S04AI
light will remain illuminated. You can
When this mode is selected, the fan speed, then manually control the system as
airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air desired using the button you operated.
conditioner compressor operation are To change the system back to the FULL
automatically controlled. To activate this AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.
mode, perform the following.
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator To turn off the climate control system,
light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
display (color LCD) illuminates. inlet selection will be set to the following.
2. Set the preferred temperature using . When the air inlet selection is set to
the temperature control dial. auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
NOTE manual mode: No change
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on 1) Interior air temperature sensor
the control panel other than the ON/ 2) Solar sensor
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature The automatic climate control system
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode employs several sensors. These sensors

(239,1)
Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-7
are delicate. If they are not treated properly Manual climate control op-
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
eration
S04AJ
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the & Airflow mode selection
sensors, observe the following precau- S04AJ01
tions. Select the airflow mode by using the
. Do not subject the sensors to impact. airflow mode selection dial (type A and B)
or the airflow mode selection button (type
. Keep water away from the sensors. C). 4
. Do not cover the sensors.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation 2 for type B and C: Instru-

ment panel outlets and foot outlets
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets
– CONTINUED –

(240,1)
4-8 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
foot outlets and both side outlets of the maximum speed.

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” . The air inlet will be set to recirculation.
F4-10.) . The air flow mode setting will be set to
ventilation mode.
To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the
previous setting, press the MAX A/C
button again.
& Temperature control

S04AJ02
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature.
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the NOTE
instrument panel and some through wind- The controllable temperature range
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of may vary depending on the regional
air flows to the windshield and both side Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and specifications of the vehicle.
windows to prevent fogging.) both side outlets of the instrument panel
(Refer to “Defrosting” F4-10.) ! SYNC mode (type C)
S04AJ0207
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
& MAX A/C mode (for type B and the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-
C) peratures are synchronized using the
S04AJ06
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C driver’s side temperature control dial.
button. Press the SYNC button to turn on the
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator
following settings will be changed auto- will illuminate.
matically. Press the SYNC button again or turn the
. The air conditioner will turn on. passenger’s side temperature control dial
to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC
. The temperature will be set on the button indicator will not illuminate. In this
lowest. case, temperature control on the driver’s
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, . The fan speed will be set on the side and passenger’s side is separated.

(241,1)
Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-9
The temperature will be controlled indivi- & Air inlet selection & To turn off the climate control
dually using the driver’s and passenger’s S04AJ05
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet system
temperature control dials. selection button.
S04AJ07
To turn off the climate control system:
& Fan speed control . Recirculation: . Type A: select the “OFF” position using
S04AJ03 the fan speed control dial.
Select the preferred fan speed by turning When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button illuminates, interior air is . Type B and C: press the ON/OFF
the fan speed control dial. button.
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the 4
& Air conditioner control air inlet selection button to the ON position
S04AJ04 for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
The air conditioner operates only when the when driving on a dusty road.
engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the . Outside air circulation:
fan is in operation to turn on the air When the indicator light on the air inlet
conditioner. When the air conditioner is selection button does not illuminate, out-
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. side air is drawn into the passenger
To turn off the air conditioner, press the compartment. Press the air inlet selection
button again. button to the OFF position when the
interior has cooled to a comfortable tem-
NOTE perature and the road is no longer dusty.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air WARNING
conditioner. If the ambient temperature
Continued operation in the ON posi-
decreases to approximately 328F (08C),
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
the air conditioner and dehumidifica-
to the OFF position as soon as the
tion system may not operate properly.
outside conditions are no longer
dusty.

(242,1)
4-10 Climate control/Defrosting
Defrosting For type A climate control system, in Operating tips for heater and
this state:
S04AH air conditioner
– You cannot stop the air condi- S04AD
tioner compressor by pressing the & Cleaning ventilation grille
air conditioner button. S04AD01
– You cannot select the recircula-

tion mode by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
. For types B and C climate control
system, after defrosting the windshield
by pressing the defroster button “ ”,
pressing the button again returns the
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
vated.
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or
dehumidify the windshield and front door
windows. 1) Front ventilation inlet grille
NOTE Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
selected, the air conditioner compres- to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
sor operates automatically regardless Since the condenser is located in front of
of the position of the air conditioner the radiator, this area should be kept clean
button to defrost the windshield more because cooling performance is impaired
quickly. However the indicator on the by any accumulation of insects and leaves
air conditioner button will not illumi- on the condenser.
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the & Efficient cooling after parking
outside air mode. in direct sunlight
S04AD02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to

(243,1)
Climate control/Air filtration system 4-11
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning Air filtration system
heated interior. This results in quicker system. S04AE
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
windows closed during the operation of the & Air conditioner compressor equipped with an air filtration system.
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi- shut-off when engine is Replace the cabin air filter according to
ciency. heavily loaded
S04AD06
the replacement schedule found in the
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed schedule should be followed to maintain 4
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator extremely dusty conditions, the filter
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid should be replaced more frequently. Have
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep your filter checked or replaced by your
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade. SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate
system before summer sea- control system CAUTION
son S04AD07
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth- following occurs, even if it is not yet
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the time to change the filter:
operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for . Reduction of the airflow through
ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU the vents.
SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are not . Windshield gets easily fogged or
& Cooling and dehumidifying in covered under warranty. misted.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions NOTE
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high The filter can influence the air condi-
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
small amount of water vapor emission mance if not properly maintained.
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
– CONTINUED –

(244,1)
4-12 Climate control/Air filtration system
& Replacing a cabin air filter doing this, be careful not to damage
S04AE01 the hinge.
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take measures
to protect the center console with
masking tape first, so that you avoid
scratching the center console with the
glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go. 2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the (3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
glove box.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When

(245,1)
Climate control/Air filtration system 4-13
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
one and then reinstall the cover. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(247,1)
Audio
Antenna ................................................................... 5-2 Audio set ................................................................. 5-3
S05
Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2
Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ........................... 5-2

(248,1)
5-2 Audio/Antenna
Antenna & Roof antenna (for Shark fin

S05AA type)
& Roof antenna (for Rod type) S05AA04
S05AA03
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove the antenna
rod before entering garages,
parking towers and other loca-
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod remains at-
1) Unscrew
tached, it may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed on the roof. The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
tighten it. The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.

(249,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-3
Audio set
S05AC
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(251,1)
Interior equipment
Interior lights........................................................... 6-2 Accessory power outlets ....................................... 6-7
S06
Map lights.............................................................. 6-2 Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ..............6-8
Dome light ............................................................. 6-2 USB power supply.................................................. 6-9
Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-3 Ashtray (dealer option) ........................................ 6-10
OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3 Floor mat ................................................................6-11
Sun visors ............................................................... 6-3 Coat hook.............................................................. 6-12
Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4 Shopping bag hook .............................................. 6-12
Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-4 Cargo area cover (if equipped)............................ 6-13
Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5 Using the cover .................................................... 6-13
Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5 To remove the cover housing................................ 6-13
Glove box .............................................................. 6-5 Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-14
Center console ...................................................... 6-6 To install the cover housing.................................. 6-14 6
Cup holders ........................................................... 6-6 Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) ................... 6-15
Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-6

(252,1)
6-2 Interior equipment/Interior lights
Interior lights ! Automatic illumination & Dome light

S06AA0603 S06AA01
S06AA When the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate
CAUTION automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
When leaving your vehicle, make gate (if equipped) is opened.
sure the lights are turned off to
. The doors are unlocked using the
avoid battery discharge.
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding
& Map lights the access key fob” F2-6.
S06AA06 . The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
. The ignition switch is turned from the 1) ON
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- 2) DOOR
tion. 3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
1) Door interlock switch
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
To turn on the map light, push the lens. opened.
To turn it off, push the lens again. . The doors or the rear gate are unlocked
using the keyless access function (if
equipped). Refer to “Locking and unlock-
ing by holding the access key fob” F2-6.
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

(253,1)
Interior equipment/Sun visors 6-3
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. & OFF delay timer Sun visors
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” The following lights have an automatic
S06AA07
S06AC
F2-17. illumination function.
. The ignition switch is turned from the . dome light
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion. . map light
. cargo area light
& Cargo area light When the interior light switch is set to the
S06AA02
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and turn off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the
opening and closing of the doors, as well 6
as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in To block out glare, swing down the visors.
which the lights remain on (OFF delay To use the sun visor at a side window,
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU swing it down and move it sideways.
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details. For models with the combi-
nation meter display (color LCD), the
1) DOOR setting can also be changed by operat-
2) OFF ing the combination meter display
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear cle Setting” F3-39.
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
– CONTINUED –

(254,1)
6-4 Interior equipment/Sun visors
& Sun visor extension plate (if & Vanity mirror

S06AC03
equipped)
S06AC01
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being temporarily blinded by the
glare of bright light.
CAUTION
With the sun visor positioned over the side Do not pull out the extension plate
window, you can use the sun visor exten- with the sun visor positioned over
sion plate to prevent glare through the gap the windshield. The extension plate
between the sun visor and center pillar. To would obstruct your view of the
use the extension plate, pull it toward the rearview mirror.
rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
toward the front of the vehicle.
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

(255,1)
Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-5
& Vanity mirror with light (if Storage compartment & Glove box
S06AD01
equipped) S06AD
S06AC02
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed . Always keep the storage com-
while the car is being driven to avoid partment closed while driving to
being distracted by the light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous 6
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.
2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-
lock.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close it, push the lid firmly upward.
NOTE
. The emergency key is directional. If
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
the key cannot be inserted, change the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
direction that the grooved side is facing
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi- and insert it again.
nates when the mirror cover is opened. . For models with the “keyless access
NOTE with push-button start system”, use the
emergency key to lock or unlock the
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long glove box.
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –

(256,1)
6-6 Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Center console and/or your passengers. Spilled

S06AD02
The center console box provides a storage beverages may also damage up-
space. holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped)

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
1) Card holder & Bottle holders

S06AD17
The top of the console can be used as an

CAUTION
armrest.
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
& Cup holders bottle holder or put a bottle in the
S06AD16
holder while you are driving, as
CAUTION this may distract you and lead to
Front passenger’s cup holder an accident.
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
A dual cup holder is built into the center . When placing a beverage in a
holder or put a cup in the holder
console. bottle holder, make sure it is
while you are driving, as this may
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
distract you and lead to an acci-
could spill when opening/closing
dent.
the door or while driving and, if
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev- the beverage is hot, it could scald
erages, if hot, might scald you you and/or your passengers.

(257,1)
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets 6-7
Accessory power outlets

S06AF
Electrical power (12V DC) is available at

any of the accessory power outlets when
the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
“ON” position. Accessory power outlets
are located in the following places.
6
The bottle holder equipped on each door Power outlet in the center console
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
and other items. ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.
CAUTION
Power outlet below the climate control
dials . Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
– CONTINUED –

(258,1)
6-8 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
. Use only electrical appliances interfere with your shifting gears & Use with a cigarette lighter
which are designed for 12V DC. and operating the accelerator (dealer option)
The maximum power rating of an and brake pedals. If they do, do To use the accessory power outlet as a
S06AF01
appliance that can be connected not use the electrical appliance cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
is 120W. Do not use an appliance while driving. cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
which exceeds the indicated wat- accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
tage for each outlet. available from your SUBARU dealer.
. When using appliances con- The cigarette lighter operates only when
nected to two outlets simulta- the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
neously, the total power con- position.
sumed by them must not exceed To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
120W. Overloading the accessory knob and wait a few moments. It will
power outlet can cause a short automatically spring up when ready for
circuit. Do not use double adap- use.
ters or more than one electrical
appliance. WARNING
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too To avoid being burned, never grasp
tight for the accessory power the lighter by the end with the
NOTE heating element. Doing so could
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get When the lid of the center console is result in injury and could also da-
stuck. Only use plugs that fit closed, an opening remains between mage the heating element.
properly. the center console and the lid to allow
the power outlet in the center console
. Use of an electric appliance in the to be used. Pass the cord of the CAUTION
accessory power outlet for a long electrical appliance through this open-
period of time while the engine is ing. . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
not running can cause battery because it will overheat.
discharge. . The electrical power socket is
. Before driving your vehicle, make originally designed to use a gen-
sure that the plug and the cord on uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
your electrical appliance will not plug. Do not use a non-genuine

(259,1)
Interior equipment/USB power supply 6-9
cigarette lighter plug in the sock- USB power supply malfunction of the connected
et. Doing so may cause a short- S06AY device.
circuit and overheating, resulting . If a device is connected for a long
in a fire. CAUTION time when the engine is not
. If the socket is ever used for a . The specification of a USB term- running, doing so may cause the
plug-in accessory such as a cell inal that can be used is the A- risk of a discharged battery. Even
phone, that may damage the type. If a different specification of when the engine is running, we
portion of the socket’s internal terminal is connected, power recommend that you do not con-
mechanism that causes a cigar- supply or charging may not be nect a device for an unnecessa-
ette lighter plug to “pop out” after possible, or the device may mal- rily long time.
its lighter element is heated. function. . Do not connect a malfunctioning
Therefore, do not place a cigar- device. Doing so may cause the
ette lighter plug in a socket that . There is no guarantee even when 6
a connected device malfunctions risk of smoke and fire.
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing or data is damaged. The connec-
so may cause the plug to stick tion of a device shall be per- NOTE
and overheat, creating a potential formed at your responsibility.
. The USB power supply is designed
fire hazard. . To avoid an electric shock or a to supply a maximum rated power of DC
malfunction, observe the follow- 5V/2.1A or DC 5V/1A. Before connect-
ing precautions. ing a device, be sure to read the
– Do not connect a USB hub. instruction manual of the device and
– Do not insert any metal or check whether or not this specification
other foreign object into the of the output is supported by the
USB terminal. device. If a device that requires power
exceeding the maximum rating is con-
– Do not spill water or other nected, power supply or charging may
liquid on the USB terminal. not be possible. Even if charging could
. When you have connected a be completed, the time required for
cable, pay attention not to pull charging may be longer than when the
on the connected cable with your genuine charger for that device is used.
legs. Otherwise, it may result in . Depending on the device, charging
injury to you by falling over, or a may be possible only when a special
– CONTINUED –

(260,1)
6-10 Interior equipment/Ashtray (dealer option)
cable is used. In this case, be sure to Ashtray (dealer option)

connect the device using the special S06AG
cable.
. When a device that communicates CAUTION
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible. . Do not use ashtrays as waste
. When connect a device for charging, receptacles or leave a lighted
disconnect the device promptly after cigarette in an ashtray. This could
charging is completed. cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
1 terminal type USB power supply the ashtray open, the fire of the
- DC 5V/1A cigarette may spread to another
- Audio devices can be connected and cigarette butt and start a fire.
used
. Do not put flammable material in
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or the ashtray.
“ON” position and a USB electronic device
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
is connected to the USB terminal, DC 5V
butts in the ashtray.
power can be supplied to the device. Use
the USB terminal to use or charge an
2 terminal type USB power supply electronic device. NOTE
- DC 5V/2.1A* Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
- Audio devices can be connected and
used. mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
*: The available electricity of the two USB toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A. implement.

(261,1)
Interior equipment/Floor mat 6-11
Floor mat . Do not use more than one floor

S06AJ mat.
6
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
holders” F6-6. For the locations of the CAUTION Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6- side floor.
6. If the floor mat slips forward and The floor mat should be properly secured
interferes with the movement of the using the built-in grommets, by placing the
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the pedals during driving, it could cause
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the grommets over the pins and pushing them
an accident. Observe the following downward.
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke. precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.

(262,1)
6-12 Interior equipment/Coat hook
Coat hook WARNING Shopping bag hook

S06AH S06AI
Obey the following instructions.

CAUTION
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
Do not hang items on the shopping
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
directly on the coat hooks with-
more.
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
A coat hook is attached to the rear stops or in a collision.
passenger’s hand grip. . serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin.
. incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

CAUTION
side of the cargo area.
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

(263,1)
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover 6-13
Cargo area cover (if WARNING & To remove the cover housing
S06AK02
equipped) 1. Rewind the cover.
S06AK
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
The cargo area cover is provided for weight on the extended cover can
covering the cargo area and to protect its break it and an object on the cover
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is could tumble forward in the event of
detachable to make room for additional a sudden stop or collision. This
cargo. could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover
S06AK01
CAUTION
6
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause 2. Push the cover housing to the right
leakage of gas from the stays, which side and shorten it.
may result in their inability to hold 3. Take it off the retainer.
the rear gate open.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
– CONTINUED –

(264,1)
6-14 Interior equipment/Cargo area cover
& Stowage of the cargo area 2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo & To install the cover housing
cover area end. S06AK05
The right end of the cargo area cover is a
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in sliding structure.
under the cargo floor.
3. Put the cargo floor board back while

hanging two retaining straps on the hooks 1. Insert the right end of the cover into the
that are located on the rear wall of cargo recessed portion with the arrow mark
1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo area.
floor board. facing upward.
2. Hold the cover housing securely and
insert the left end of the cover into the
recessed portion.

(265,1)
Interior equipment/Cargo tie-down hooks 6-15
Cargo tie-down hooks

(if equipped)
S06AM
The cargo area is equipped with two or

four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be
secured with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that ex-
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10
kg) per hook.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(267,1)
Starting and operating

Fuel .......................................................................... 7-3 Certification for remote engine starter................... 7-21
S07
Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-3 Manual transmission ............................................ 7-21
Fuel filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4 Shifting speeds .................................................... 7-22
State emission testing (U.S. only) ......................... 7-7 Driving tips........................................................... 7-23
Preparing to drive ................................................... 7-8 Continuously variable transmission ................... 7-24
Starting and stopping the engine (models Continuously variable transmission features ......... 7-24
without push-button start system) ..................... 7-9 Select lever .......................................................... 7-25
Starting engine ...................................................... 7-9 Selection of manual mode (if equipped) ................ 7-26
Stopping the engine.............................................. 7-11 Selection of “L” (if equipped)................................ 7-28
Starting and stopping engine (models with Shift lock function ................................................ 7-28
push-button start system)................................. 7-11 Driving tips........................................................... 7-30
Safety precautions ................................................ 7-11 Power steering...................................................... 7-30
Operating range for push-button start system ....... 7-11 Power steering warning light ................................ 7-30
Starting engine ..................................................... 7-11 Power steering system features ............................ 7-30 7
Stopping engine.................................................... 7-13 Braking .................................................................. 7-31
When access key fob does not operate properly ... 7-14 Braking tips.......................................................... 7-31
Remote engine start system (dealer option) ...... 7-14 Brake system ....................................................... 7-32
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)................. 7-15 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators................ 7-33
Alternate operation method for models with ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............................. 7-33
“keyless access with push-button start ABS self-check ..................................................... 7-34
system” .............................................................. 7-18 ABS warning light................................................. 7-34
Entering the vehicle while it is running via Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
remote start ........................................................ 7-18 system ................................................................ 7-34
Entering the vehicle following remote engine Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions............. 7-34
start shutdown.................................................... 7-19
Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...................... 7-35
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle................................................................ 7-19 Safety precautions................................................ 7-35
Remote transmitter program (Remote engine System features.................................................... 7-36
starter transceiver).............................................. 7-19 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ............ 7-37
System maintenance ............................................. 7-19 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................... 7-37

(268,1)
Starting and operating
X-MODE (if equipped) ........................................... 7-38 BSD/RCTA (if equipped)....................................... 7-53

To activate/deactivate the X-MODE ........................ 7-39 System features.................................................... 7-53
Hill descent control function ................................. 7-40 System operation ................................................. 7-55
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
(U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 7-42 buzzer ............................................................... 7-57
Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-43 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ...................................... 7-58
Parking brake ....................................................... 7-43 BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-59
Parking tips .......................................................... 7-44 BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-59
Hill start assist system......................................... 7-45 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-60
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-62
system................................................................ 7-47 Reverse Automatic Braking System
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist (if equipped) ....................................................... 7-62
OFF indicator light .............................................. 7-48 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview........ 7-63
Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-48 Operating conditions ............................................ 7-65
To set cruise control ............................................. 7-48 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation....... 7-68
To temporarily cancel the cruise control................ 7-50 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
To turn off the cruise control................................. 7-51 system operation............................................... 7-71
To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-51 Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF
Cruise control indicator light................................. 7-52 setting............................................................... 7-71
Cruise control set indicator light ........................... 7-52 RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-72
Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-72

(269,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3
Fuel concerned if your vehicle sometimes pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

S07AA
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or you use such fuels, your emission control
when you accelerate. Contact your system performance may deteriorate and
CAUTION SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
specified octane rating and your vehicle function indicator light may turn on. If this
. Use of a fuel which is low in knocks heavily or persistently. happens, return to your authorized
quality or use of an inappropriate SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
fuel additive may cause damage ! RON determined that the condition is caused
S07AA010301
to the engine and/or fuel system. This octane rating is the Research Octane by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
. Some gas stations, particularly Number. covered by your warranty.
those in high altitude areas, offer ! AKI ! Gasoline for cleaner air
fuels posted as regular octane S07AA010302 S07AA0107
gasoline with an octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of Research Octane and Motor Octane num- ditives will help prevent deposits from
bers and is commonly referred to as the forming in your engine and fuel system.
those fuels are not recom-
Anti Knock Index (AKI). This helps keep your engine in tune and
7
mended.
your emission control system working
! Unleaded gasoline
S07AA0104 properly, and is a way of doing your part
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
& Fuel requirements to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
S07AA01 high quality fuel with the proper detergent
The engine is designed to operate using nozzle. Under no circumstances should and other additives, you should never
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating leaded gasoline be used because it will need to add any fuel system cleaning
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. damage the emission control system and agents to your fuel tank.
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Mexico only Many gasolines are now blended with
Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fuel
S07AA0121
! Reformulated gasoline
S07AA0128 materials called oxygenates. Use of these
additive to the fuel every 15,000 km (9,000 SUBARU supports the use of reformulated fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
miles). Refer to an authorized SUBARU gasoline when available. Reformulated Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
dealer for details. gasoline has been blended to burn more (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions. vehicle, but should contain no more than
! Fuel octane rating
S07AA0103
! MMT 15% ethanol for the proper operation of
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
S07AA0106
your SUBARU.
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo- Do not use any gasoline that contains
– CONTINUED –

(270,1)
7-4 Starting and operating/Fuel
more than 15% ethanol, including from any . If undesirable driveability problems are & Fuel filler lid and cap
pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are experienced and you suspect they may be S07AA02
only some examples of fuel containing fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- ! Locations of the fuel filler lid and the
more than 15% ethanol). line before seeking service at your lid release lever
S07AA0202
SUBARU dealer.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, CAUTION

you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter- Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
gents and oxygenates and if they have surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- may damage the paint, be sure to
sions. wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
As additional guidance, only use fuels is not covered under the SUBARU Fuel filler lid
suited for your vehicle as explained in the Limited Warranty.
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT Fuel filler lid release lever
under these conditions.

(271,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5
! Refueling firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

S07AA0201
Only one person should be involved in Do not remove the cap quickly.
refueling. Do not allow others to approach Fuel may be under pressure and
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler spray out of the fuel filler neck,
pipe while refueling is in progress. especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
Be sure to observe any other precautions
are removing the cap, wait for the
that are posted at the service station.
sound to stop and then slowly
1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition open the cap to prevent fuel from
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and spraying out and creating a fire
turn off all the other electrical components. hazard.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor at
the left of the driver’s seat. 1) Open
2) Close 7
WARNING 3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
Before opening the fuel filler cap, slowly counterclockwise.
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
WARNING
similar object to discharge any sta- . Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
tic electricity that may be present on mable. Before refueling, always
your body. If your body is carrying turn the ignition switch to the
an electrostatic charge, there is a “LOCK”/“OFF” position first and
possibility that an electric spark then close all vehicle doors and
could ignite the fuel, which could windows. Make sure that there 4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new are no lighted cigarettes, open inside the fuel filler lid.
static electric charge, do not get flames or electrical sparks in the
back into the vehicle while refueling adjacent area. Only handle fuel
is in progress. outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
– CONTINUED –

(272,1)
7-6 Starting and operating/Fuel
WARNING 7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
. When refueling, insert the fuel CAUTION driven or fuel spillage could oc-
nozzle securely into the fuel filler cur in the event of an accident,
If you spill any fuel on the painted creating a fire hazard.
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
surface, rinse it off immediately.
fully inserted, its automatic stop- . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
Otherwise, the painted surface
ping mechanism may not func- surfaces of the vehicle. Because
could be damaged.
tion, causing fuel to overflow the fuel may damage the paint, be
tank and creating a fire hazard. sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
. Stop refueling when the auto- quickly. Paint damage caused by
matic stop mechanism on the NOTE spilled fuel is not covered under
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
tinue to add fuel, temperature gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU
changes or other conditions door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the
may cause fuel to overflow from the vehicle. wrong cap, it may not fit or have
the tank and create a fire hazard. . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened proper venting and your fuel tank
until it clicks or if the tether is caught and emission control system
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE may be damaged. It could also
pump automatically stops. Do not add any warning light/malfunction indicator lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
more fuel. light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- . Immediately put fuel in the tank
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise whenever the low fuel warning
dicator light” F3-15.
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain light illuminates. Engine misfires
not to catch the tether under the cap while as a result of an empty tank could
tightening. CAUTION cause damage to the engine.
. Never add any cleaning agents to Continuing to operate your vehi-
CAUTION cle at an extremely low fuel level
the fuel tank. The addition of a
Make sure that the cap is tightened cleaning agent may cause da- may result in a reduction of
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage mage to the fuel system. engine performance.
in the event of an accident. . After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is

(273,1)
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7
State emission testing its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
(U.S. only) California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete.
S07AB
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
WARNING inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to faulty LED [Light
when testing an All-Wheel Drive your vehicle’s registration. Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more
(AWD) model. diagnostic trouble codes stored in the
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
vehicle’s computer.
Testing of an AWD model must that monitors the performance of the
NEVER be performed on a single engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt- fied emission inspectors will inspect the (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
ing to do so will result in uncon- On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
trolled vehicle movement and may part of the state emission inspection READY” is greater than one. If the
cause an accident or injuries to process. The OBDII system is designed vehicle’s battery has been recently re- 7
persons nearby. to detect engine and transmission pro- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII not ready for the emission test. Under this
CAUTION inspections apply to all 1996 model year condition, the vehicle driver should be
and newer passenger cars and trucks. instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
. At state inspection time, remem- Over 30 states plus the District of Colum- few days to reset the readiness monitors
ber to tell your inspection or bia have implemented emission inspection and return for an emission re-inspection.
service station in advance not to of the OBDII system. . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
. The inspection of the OBDII system
on a two-wheel dynamometer. service.
consists of a visual operational check of
Otherwise, serious transmission
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
damage will result.
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex- their emission inspection program. A
. Resultant vehicle damage due to amination of the OBDII system with an
improper testing is not covered dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
under the SUBARU Limited War- . A vehicle passes the OBDII system
ranty and is the responsibility of wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
the state inspection program or “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
– CONTINUED –

(274,1)
7-8 Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
on a dynamometer, tell your emission Preparing to drive CAUTION

inspector not to place your SUBARU S07AC
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- Trapping small animals in the cool-
You should perform the following checks
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- ing fan and belts of the engine may
and adjustments every day before you
sion damage will result. result in a malfunction. Check that
start driving.
The U.S. Environmental Protection no small animal enters the engine
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel compartment and under the vehicle
lights are clean and unobstructed.
dynamometers in their emission testing before starting the engine.
2. Check the appearance and condition
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU of the tires. Also check tires for proper
AWD vehicles from the portion of the inflation. NOTE
testing program that involves a two-wheel 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of . Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
dynamometer. There are some states that leaks. fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
4. Check that no small animals enter the should be checked daily, weekly or at
testing program. When properly used, this
engine compartment. fuel stops.
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are . When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-
AWD vehicle.
fully closed. ler hitch (dealer option)” F8-16
Under no circumstances should the rear 6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor 7. Check the adjustment of the inside and
should the driveshaft be disconnected in outside mirrors.
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded. 9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.

(275,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-9
Starting and stopping the en- & Starting engine . When starting the engine, be sure
S07BD01
gine (models without push- to sit in the driver’s seat (except
! General precautions when starting when using the remote engine
button start system) engine start system).
S07BD0105
S07BD
WARNING
CAUTION NOTE
. Never start the engine from out- . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
Do not operate the starter motor side the vehicle (except when eration immediately after the engine
continuously for more than 10 sec- using the remote engine start has started.
onds. If the engine fails to start after system). It may result in an acci- . For a short time after the engine has
operating the starter for 5 to 10 dent. started, the engine speed is kept high.
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or . Do not leave the engine running When the warm-up is completed, the
more before trying again. in locations with poor ventilation, engine speed lowers automatically.
such as a garage and indoors. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult 7
NOTE The exhaust gas may enter the to start the engine depending on the
vehicle or indoors, and it may fuel and the usage condition (repeated
It may be difficult to start the engine
result in carbon monoxide poi- driving of a distance in which the
when the battery has been discon-
soning. engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
. Do not start the engine near dry In such a case, it is recommended that
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
foliage, paper, or other flammable you change to a different brand of fuel.
culty is caused by the electronically
substances. The exhaust pipe . On rare occasions, transient knock-
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
and exhaust emissions can cre- ing may be heard from the engine when
function. To overcome it, keep the
ate a fire hazard at high tempera- the accelerator is operated rapidly such
ignition switch in the “ON” position
tures. as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-
for approximately 10 seconds before
eration. This is not a malfunction.
starting the engine.
. The engine starts more easily when
CAUTION the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. If the engine is stopped during . Do not shift the select lever (CVT
driving, the catalyst may over- models) or shift lever (MT models)
heat and burn. while the starter is cranking.
– CONTINUED –

(276,1)
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
! MT models the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ position and check the operation of the
S07BD0101 “OFF” position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to
1. Apply the parking brake. seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator” F3-12.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
sories. switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera-
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor engine starts, quickly release the ac- tor pedal. Release the key immediately
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold celerator pedal. after the engine has started.
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the engine. the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/ If the engine does not start, try the
The starter motor will only operate when “OFF” position. After waiting for 10 following procedure.
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the seconds or longer, turn the ignition (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
floor. switch to the “START” position without “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” depressing the accelerator pedal. least 10 seconds. After checking that
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still fails to start, the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position
“Warning and indicator” F3-12. for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
full stroke). Release the accelerator
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
engine warms up. the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
If the engine does not start, try the “OFF” position and wait for at least 10
following procedure. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ! CVT models
S07BD0104 erator pedal and turn the ignition
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the
least 10 seconds. After checking that 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- engine starts, quickly release the ac-
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the sories. celerator pedal.
ignition switch to the “START” position (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
while depressing the accelerator pedal the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/
position (preferably the “P” position).
slightly (approximately a quarter of the “OFF” position. After waiting for 10
full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. seconds or longer, turn the ignition
pedal as soon as the engine starts. switch to the “START” position without
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
depressing the accelerator pedal.

(277,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-11
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, & Stopping the engine Starting and stopping engine
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer S07BD02
for assistance.
The ignition switch should be turned off (models with push-button
only when the vehicle is stopped and the start system)
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator engine is idling. S07BE
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
WARNING S07BE06
matically lowers the idle speed as the Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3.
engine warms up. Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause & Operating range for push-
While the engine is warming up, make sure loss of power to the power steering button start system
that the select lever is at the “P” or “N” and the brake booster, making steer- S07BE01
position and that the parking brake is Refer to “Operating range for push-button
ing and braking more difficult. It start system” F3-6.
applied. could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- & Starting engine
CAUTION tion on the ignition switch, causing 7
S07BE03
If you restart the engine while the the steering wheel to lock.
WARNING
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not . There are some general precau-
attempt to place the select lever of a tions when starting the engine.
moving vehicle into the “P” position. Carefully read the precautions
described in “Starting engine”
F7-9.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
– CONTINUED –

(278,1)
7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
CAUTION ignition switch.

NOTE . The engine start procedures may not
. When the operation indicator on . For a short time after the engine has function depending on the radio wave
the push-button ignition switch is started, the engine speed is kept high. conditions around the vehicle. In such
flashing in orange, there may be a When the warm-up is completed, the a case, refer to “Starting engine” F9-
malfunction with the vehicle. engine speed lowers automatically. 18.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- . When the push-button ignition . If the vehicle battery is discharged,
diately. switch is pressed while depressing the steering cannot be unlocked.
the clutch pedal (MT models) or the Charge the battery.
. If the indicator on the push-but- brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
ton ignition switch is flashing in . Do not shift the select lever while the
starter operates for a maximum of 10 starter is cranking.
green after the engine has seconds and after starting the engine,
started, it means that the steering the starter stops automatically.
is still locked. Depress the brake . When the push-button ignition
pedal while moving the steering switch is pressed while depressing
wheel to the right and left, and the clutch pedal (MT models) or the
press the push-button ignition brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
switch. can be started regardless of the status
. Do not continue pushing the of the push-button ignition switch.
push-button ignition switch for . If the security indicator light illumi-
more than 10 seconds. Doing so nates when you attempt to start the
could cause a malfunction. If the engine but the engine does not start,
engine does not start, stop push- press the push-button ignition switch
ing the push-button ignition to switch the power to “OFF” and then
switch. Instead, press the push- try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press the 1) Operation indicator
button ignition switch without
2) Push-button ignition switch
depressing the brake pedal to push-button ignition switch without
switch the power status to depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod- When the push-button ignition switch is
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to pressed while depressing the clutch pedal
push the push-button ignition switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT
switch to start the engine. depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod- models), the engine will start. The starting
els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) procedure for the engine is as follows.
more forcefully, press the push-button

(279,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-13
! MT models ! CVT models of emergency.

S07BE0301 S07BE0304
. When the engine is not started, the
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the 1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
driver’s seat. driver’s seat.
case, depress the brake pedal more
2. Apply the parking brake. 2. Apply the parking brake. forcefully than usual. Check that the
3. Shift the shift lever to neutral. 3. Shift the select lever into the “P” operation indicator on the push-button
4. Depress the brake pedal. position. The engine can also start when ignition switch turns green, and press
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the the select lever is in the “N” position, the push-button ignition switch to start
indicator on the push-button ignition switch however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” the engine.
turns green. position.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal, 4. Depress the brake pedal until the & Stopping engine
S07BE04
press the push-button ignition switch. operation indicator on the push-button 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
ignition switch turns green. When starting
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
NOTE position (CVT models).
indicator does not turn green.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
7
In case the engine does not start by the 5. While depressing the brake pedal,
normal engine start procedure, move The engine will stop, and the power will be
press the push-button ignition switch.
the shift lever to the neutral position, switched off.
and switch the power to “ACC”. De-
press the clutch pedal, and press the NOTE
WARNING
push-button ignition switch for at least . While pressing the select lever but-
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only ton in, the indicator on the push-button . Do not touch the push-button
use this engine start procedure in case ignition switch will not turn green even ignition switch during driving.
of emergency. when the select lever is in the “P”
When the push-button ignition
position.
switch is operated as follows,
. In case the engine does not start by
the engine will stop.
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi- – The switch is pressed and held
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. for 3 seconds or longer.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the – The switch is pressed briefly 3
push-button ignition switch for at least times or more in succession.
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only When the engine stops, the brake
use this engine start procedure in case
– CONTINUED –

(280,1)
7-14 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
booster will not function. A great- NOTE Remote engine start system
er foot pressure will be required (dealer option)
on the brake pedal. Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition S07AZ
The power steering system will switch, do not stop the engine during
not operate either. A greater force driving except in an emergency.
WARNING
will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident. . There are some general precau-
& When access key fob does tions when starting the engine.
. If the engine stops during driving, not operate properly Carefully read the precautions
S07BE05
do not operate the push-button Refer to “Access key fob – if access key described in “General precau-
ignition switch or open any of the fob does not operate properly” F9-17. tions when starting engine” F7-
doors until the vehicle is stopped 9.
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be . Do not remote start a vehicle in an
activated. Stop the vehicle in a enclosed environment (e.g.
safe place, and contact a closed garage). Prolonged opera-
SUBARU dealer immediately. tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
CAUTION Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
For CVT models to high levels of Carbon Monox-
. Do not stop the engine while the ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
select lever is in a position other ness or in extreme cases uncon-
than the “P” position. sciousness and/or death.
. If the engine is stopped while the The remote engine start system allows you
select lever is in a position other to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
than the “P” position, the power In addition, the remote engine start system
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is can activate the heater or air conditioner,
left in this condition, the battery providing you with a comfortable cabin
may be discharged. upon entry. For more details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

(281,1)
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-15
mote engine start system. ! Starting the engine . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
S07AZ2101
parking lights flash once.
NOTE NOTE
. The length of time for which it is All vehicle doors (including rear gate) While the engine is idling via the remote
acceptable to allow the engine to and the engine hood must be closed engine start system, the following phe-
remain idling may be bound by local prior to activating the remote engine nomena will occur.
laws and regulations. Check the local start system. Any open entry point will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
rules when using the remote engine prevent starting or cause the engine to parking lights remain illuminated.
start system. stop. . The fob button flashes once every 3
. When taking your vehicle in for seconds.
service, it is recommended that you The remote engine start system is acti-
. The power windows are disabled.
inform the service personnel that your vated by pressing the fob button on your
vehicle is equipped with a remote remote engine starter transceiver (fob) If the engine turns over but does not start
engine start system. twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within (or starts and stalls) the remote engine
operating range of the system and the start start system will power off and then 7
request is received, the following phenom- attempt to start the engine 3 additional
& Remote engine starter trans- ena will occur. times. The system will not attempt to
ceiver (fob) . The fob flashes and beeps once. restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
S07AZ21
. The horn sounds once. malfunction is preventing starting. If the
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and engine does not start after 3 additional
parking lights flash once. attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
If the fob is not within range (the user is too ! Stopping the engine
far away from the vehicle), the fob will S07AZ2102
indicate two long flashes without beeping. Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
The system will check certain safety flash and beep three times, indicating the
preconditions before starting, and if all engine has stopped. If the stop request is
conditions are met, the engine will start not received (for example, if the user is too
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, far away from the vehicle), the fob will
the following phenomena will occur. continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
1) Fob button . The fob flashes and beeps twice. The system will automatically stop the
. The horn sounds once. engine after 15 minutes.
– CONTINUED –

(282,1)
! Remote start safety features NOTE

S07AZ2103
For safety and security reasons, the . If the alarm system is armed at the
remote engine start system will prevent time of remote engine starter activation
starting (or stop the engine if running) and (the security indicator light on the
sound the horn twice if any of the following combination meter is flashing), the
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob alarm system will remain armed
will flash and beep 3 times. throughout the remote start run cycle.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20 . If the alarm system is disarmed at
minutes the time of remote engine starter acti-
. The brake pedal is depressed vation (the security indicator light on
. A key is in the ignition switch the combination meter is not flashing),
. The engine hood is open the alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
RPM ! Remote start operation - fob con-
. The security alarm is triggered firmation
S07AZ2104
. The select lever is not in the “P” position Your remote engine starter fob is a
(CVT models) bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
If the system detects any door (including
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
the rear gate) open during operation, it will
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
prevent starting or stop the engine, and
buzzer will indicate status of the system
sound the horn and flash side marker
using the following flash and beep se-
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
In addition to the items above, if the tional range of the system.
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.

(283,1)
Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above) 7
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
holding fob button for at least 2 sec. 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
– CONTINUED –

(284,1)
& Alternate operation method closed. ! Remote start safety features

S07AZ2204
for models with “keyless ac- . The engine hood is closed. For detailed information, refer to “Remote
cess with push-button start . The push-button ignition switch is in the start safety features” F7-16.
system” “OFF” position.
S07AZ22 & Entering the vehicle while it is
! When starting the engine running via remote start
S07AZ2202
To start the engine with remote engine S07AZ03
start system, briefly press the lock button 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
twice within 2 seconds, then press and keyless access function (if equipped) or
hold the lock button for 3 seconds. remote keyless entry system.
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manu-
1. Press the lock button briefly. The ally using the key, the vehicle’s alarm
hazard warning flashers then flash once system will trigger (if the alarm system is
and the keyless buzzer chirps once. armed prior to activating the remote
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button engine start system) and the engine will
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers turn off. Perform either of the following
then flash once again, and the keyless procedures to disarm the alarm system.
buzzer chirps once again. Refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.
Access key fob 3. After step 2, immediately press and . Insert the key into the ignition switch
1) Lock button hold the lock button. The hazard warning and turn it to the “ON” position (models
An access key fob can be used as the flashers then flash three times, and the without “keyless access with push-
remote engine start transmitter. Operate horn will honk once. button start system”)
the lock button to start or stop the engine 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, . Turn the push-button ignition switch
as follows. release the lock button. The engine will to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models
then start successfully. with “keyless access with push-button
! Before starting the engine start system”)
S07AZ2201
Before using the remote engine start ! When stopping the engine . Press any button on the access key
S07AZ2203
system to start the engine, confirm the Press and hold the lock button to stop the fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.
following conditions. engine with remote engine start system. 2. Enter the vehicle.
. The select lever is in the “P” position 3. The engine will shut down when any
(CVT models). door or rear gate is opened.
. All doors including the rear gate are 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch

(285,1)
and turn to the “START” position to restart ing to the following procedure. or after 2 minutes.
the engine. 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the & System maintenance
& Entering the vehicle following entire process).
NOTE
S07AZ09
remote engine start shut- 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
down 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
S07AZ10
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/ In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is replaced, discharged or disconnected,
opened by the remote keyless entry “OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
then back to “ON” again and leave the it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
transmitter within a few seconds immedi- minimum of one time using the key
ately following remote engine start shut- ignition “ON” throughout the programming
process. prior to activating the remote engine
down. start system. This is required to allow
4. The system will flash the side marker the vehicle electronic systems to re-
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling lights, tail lights and parking lights and synchronize.
the interior of the vehicle honk the horn three times, indicating that
S07AZ04 the system has entered the transmitter ! Changing the battery
7
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- learn mode. S07AZ0901
perature controls to the desired setting and
5. Press and release the “ ” button on CAUTION
operation. After the system starts the
the transmitter that you want to program.
engine, the heater or air conditioning will . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
activate and heat or cool the interior to 6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and or in the remote engine start
your setting. transmitter when replacing the
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon battery.
& Remote transmitter program
successful programming, the remote start . Be careful not to damage the
(Remote engine starter confirmation transmitter button will flash printed circuit board in the re-
transceiver) one time. mote engine start transmitter
S07AZ13
New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional when replacing the battery.
the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to . Be careful not to allow children to
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters). touch the battery and any re-
damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter moved parts; children could
desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the swallow them.
transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed
transmitters can be programmed accord- . There is a danger of explosion if
– CONTINUED –

(286,1)
an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key fob” F11-44.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)
cated on the back side lower left corner of
supplied in your remote engine start
the transmitter.
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the 2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
battery begin to weaken, you will notice a transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
decrease in range (distance from the head screwdriver.
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with new one. Be sure
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”

(287,1)
Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-21
should be pointed away from the transmit- ! Canada-spec. models Manual transmission
ter circuit board on battery). S07AZ2302
S07AF
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
& Certification for remote en-

gine starter
S07AZ23
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex- 7
pressly approved by the party re- The manual transmission is a fully syn-
sponsible for compliance could void chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
the user’s authority to operate the verse-speed transmission.
equipment. The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever
knob.
NOTE
following two conditions: (1) This de-
operation.
– CONTINUED –

(288,1)
7-22 Starting and operating/Manual transmission
To change the shift lever position: WARNING & Shifting speeds

S07AF01
1. Depress the clutch pedal.
. Do not drive the vehicle with the ! Recommended shifting speeds
2. To shift into all positions other than “R”, S07AF0101
move the shift lever accordingly. clutch disengaged (i.e., when the The best compromise between fuel econ-
clutch pedal is depressed) or with omy and vehicle performance during
the shift lever in the neutral normal driving is ensured by shifting up
position. Engine braking has no at the speeds listed in the following table.
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident Shift up mph (km/h)
is consequently increased. 1st to 2nd 15 (24)
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., 2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
release the clutch pedal) sud- 3rd to 4th 40 (64)
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might 4th to 5th 45 (72)
unexpectedly accelerate or the 5th to 6th 50 (81)
transmission could malfunction.
! Maximum allowable speeds
1) Slider S07AF0102
CAUTION The following table shows the maximum
3. To shift into the “R” position, hold up the speeds that are possible with each differ-
slider, move the lever to the “R” position, Shift into reverse ONLY when the ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will
then release the slider. vehicle has completely stopped. It enter the red area if these speeds are
4. Gradually release the clutch pedal. may cause damage to the transmis- exceeded.
sion to try shifting into reverse when With the exception of cases where sudden
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the the vehicle is moving. acceleration is required, the vehicle should
transmission in neutral, release the clutch not be driven with the tachometer’s needle
pedal momentarily, and then try again. inside the red area. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to excessive engine
wear and poor fuel economy.

(289,1)
Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-23
& Driving tips The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

Gear mph (km/h)
S07AF02 when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
1st 26 (42) rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
CAUTION phenomenon is not an indication of a
2nd 52 (84)
If the accelerator and brake pedals problem in your vehicle.
3rd 78 (126)
are depressed at the same time,
4th driving torque may be restrained.
5th Legal speed limit This is not a malfunction.
(Posted limit speed)
6th
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
WARNING hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
When shifting down a gear, ensure cause clutch damage.
that the vehicle is not travelling at a Do not drive with your hand resting on the 7
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- shift lever. This may cause wear on the
lowable Speed for the gear which is transmission components.
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
engine over-revving and this in turn speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
can result in engine damage. or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
In addition, sudden application of lower gear before the engine starts to
engine brakes when the vehicle is labor.
travelling on a slippery surface can On steep downgrades, downshift the
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
quence, control of the vehicle may as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
be lost and the risk of an accident speed and to extend brake pad life.
increased. In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
NOTE the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
Never exceed the posted speed limit.

(290,1)
7-24 Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
Continuously variable trans- in the “R” position. Doing so may shorten the warm-up time and improve
result in an unexpected accident driveability. The gearshift timing will
mission automatically shift to the normal timing
S07BG
or malfunction.
. Do not shift from the “D” position after the engine has warmed up.
WARNING into the “R” position or vice versa . Immediately after transmission fluid
until the vehicle has completely is replaced, you may feel that the
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” stopped. Such shifting may transmission operation is somewhat
position into the “D” or “R” position cause damage to the transmis- unusual. This results from invalidation
while depressing the accelerator sion. of data which the on-board computer
pedal. This may cause the vehicle has collected and stored in memory to
. When parking the vehicle, first allow the transmission to shift at the
to jump forward or backward. securely apply the parking brake most appropriate times for the current
and then place the select lever in condition of your vehicle. Optimized
the “P” position. Do not park for a shifting will be restored as the vehicle
CAUTION long time with the select lever in continues to be driven for a while.
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position any other position as doing so . When driving a CVT model under
only after the vehicle is comple- could result in a dead battery. continuous heavy load conditions such
tely stopped. Shifting while the as when towing a camper or climbing a
vehicle is moving may cause long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
damage to the transmission. & Continuously variable trans- vehicle speed may automatically be
mission features reduced. This is not a malfunction. This
. Do not race the engine for more S07BG06
than 5 seconds in any position The continuously variable transmission is phenomenon results from the engine
except the “N” or “P” position electronically controlled and provides an control function maintaining the cool-
when the brake is applied or infinite number of forward speeds and 1 ing performance of the vehicle. The
when chocks are used in the reverse speed. For some models, it also engine and vehicle speed will return to
wheels. This may cause the has a manual mode or an “L” position. a normal speed when the engine is able
transmission fluid to overheat. to maintain the optimum cooling per-
NOTE formance after the heavy load de-
. Never move the vehicle rearward . When the engine coolant tempera- creases. Driving under a heavy load
by inertia with the select lever set ture is still low, the transmission will must be performed with extreme care.
in a forward driving position or upshift or downshift at higher engine Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
move the vehicle forward by speeds than when the coolant tempera- when driving on an uphill slope while
inertia with the select lever set ture is sufficiently high in order to towing.

(291,1)
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-25
. The continuously variable transmis- too high even if the accelerator pedal is
sion is a chain type system that pro- depressed hard.
vides superior transmission efficiency
for maximum fuel economy. At times, ! P (Park)
S07BG0101
depending on varying driving condi- This position is for parking the vehicle and
tions, a chain operating sound may be starting the engine. In this position, the
heard that is characteristic of this type transmission is mechanically locked to
of system. prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
& Select lever parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
S07BG01
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
! Select lever positions the mechanical friction of the transmission.
S07BG0105
1) Models with “L” position To shift the select lever from the “P”
2) Models with manual mode position to any other position, you should 7
depress the brake pedal fully then move
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift the select lever. This prevents the vehicle
while pressing the select lever button
in. from lurching when it is started.
: Shift while pressing the select lever ! R (Reverse)
button in. S07BG0102
: Shift without pressing the select lever

This position is for backing the vehicle. To
button. shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
The select lever has four positions, “P”, lever button in.
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”
1) Select lever button gate. When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement
NOTE of the select lever from the “N” to “R”
For some models, to protect the engine position is possible for a limited time period
while the select lever is in the “P” or “N” by depressing the brake pedal, and then it
position, the engine is controlled so becomes impossible. For details, refer to
that the engine speed may not become “Shift lock function” F7-28.
– CONTINUED –

(292,1)
! N (Neutral) the transmission will temporarily switch to

S07BG0103
NOTE the manual mode. In this mode, you can
This position is for restarting a stalled If the select lever is in the “N” position
engine. In this position, the transmission is shift into any gear position using the shift
when you stop the engine for parking, paddles. For details about the manual
neutral, meaning that the wheels and you may not subsequently be able to
transmission are not locked. Therefore, mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If F7-26. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the this happens, turn the ignition switch to
slightest incline unless the parking brake the transmission will switch from the
the “ON” position. You will then be able manual mode back to the “D” position for
or foot brake is applied. to move the select lever to the “P” normal driving.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in position.
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in ! D (Drive) & Selection of manual mode (if
this condition. S07BG0104 equipped)
This position is for normal driving. The S07BG02
WARNING transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to
Do not drive the vehicle with the the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
select lever in the “N” (neutral) require. Also, while driving up and down a
position. Engine braking has no hill, the transmission assists and controls
effect in this condition and the risk the driving performance and engine brak-
of an accident is consequently in- ing while corresponding to the road grade.
creased.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis- With the vehicle either moving or station-
sion. When you release the pedal, the ary, move the select lever from the “D”
transmission will return to the original gear position to the “M” position to select the
position. manual mode.
For models with manual mode, if one of the
shift paddles behind the steering wheel is
operated while driving in the “D” position,

(293,1)
signals) the gear will be automatically

shifted to the 1st position and the down-
shift indicator will turn off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator 7
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
combination meter illuminate.
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
The gear position indicator shows the position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-7th- indicated on it.
gear range. The upshift and downshift
To deselect the manual mode, return the
indicators show when a gear shift is
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
possible. When the upshift indicator “ ”
position.
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
– CONTINUED –

(294,1)
CAUTION and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in & Selection of “L” (if equipped)
accidental gear shifting. S07BG03
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
downshift would push the tachometer When selected, the indicator “L” will
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will illuminate on the combination meter.
be emitted to warn you that the down-
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
shift is not possible.
the “D” position.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- “L” is for using engine braking when going
sion will not respond. down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move & Shift lock function
S07BG04
. You can perform a skip-shift (for the select lever from the “D” position to the The shift lock function helps prevent the
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating “L” position. improper operation of the select lever.
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- . The select lever cannot be operated
sion. unless the ignition switch is turned to the
. The transmission automatically se- “ON” position and the brake pedal is
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops depressed.
moving. . The select lever cannot be moved from
. If the temperature of the transmis- the “P” position to any other position before
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi- brake pedal first, and then operate the
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi- select lever.
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location . Only the “P” position allows you to turn

(295,1)
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position select lever button pressed and brake
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove pedal depressed.
the key from the ignition switch.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the If you must perform the above procedure,
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
may not be moved to the “P” position after SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
a period of time. Therefore, move the as possible.
select lever to the “P” position with the If the select lever does not move after
brake pedal depressed soon after the performing the above procedure, refer to
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/ “Shift lock release using the shift lock
“OFF” position. release button” F7-29.
! Shift lock release using the shift
! Shift lock release lock release button 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
S07BG0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn S07BG0402 with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to 7
Perform the following procedure to release remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
the shift lock. release button is located under the shift
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button 1. Apply the parking brake and turn the lock cover.
pressed and brake pedal depressed. ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-29.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition
switch in the “ACC” position, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
– CONTINUED –

(296,1)
7-30 Starting and operating/Power steering
then move the select lever. Power steering

S07AJ
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift & Power steering warning light
S07AJ10
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
& Driving tips
S07BG05
CAUTION
If the accelerator and brake pedals
are depressed at the same time,
3. Remove the grip portion of the screw- driving torque may be restrained.
driver. This is not a malfunction.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position. & Power steering system fea-
. Always apply the parking brake when tures
S07AJ11
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the The vehicle is equipped with an electric
vehicle with only the mechanical friction power steering system. When the ignition
of the transmission. switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary power steering warning light on the com-
position on an uphill grade by using the “D” bination meter illuminates to inform the
position. Use the brake instead. driver that the warning system is function-
. The engine may, on rare occasions, ing properly. Then, if the engine started,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- the warning light turns off to inform the
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. driver that the steering power assist is
4. While depressing the brake pedal, operational.
insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it This phenomenon does not indicate a
right and left while pushing the shift lock malfunction.
release button using a screwdriver, and

(297,1)
Starting and operating/Braking 7-31
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and Braking

the power steering control system has S07AK
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However, & Braking tips
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a S07AK01
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power WARNING
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too frequently,
the nearest SUBARU dealer and this may result in a malfunction of the Never rest your foot on the brake
have the vehicle inspected immedi- power steering control system. pedal while driving. This can cause
ately. dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the ! When the brakes get wet
following ways, the power steering S07AK0101
control system may temporarily limit When driving in rain or after washing the 7
the power assist in order to prevent the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
system components, such as the con- result, brake stopping distance will be
trol computer and drive motor, from longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
overheating. at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the ! Use of engine braking
S07AK0102
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low Remember to make use of engine braking
speeds, such as while frequently turn- in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing the steering wheel during parallel ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
parking. the brakes may start working improperly
. The steering wheel remains in the because of brake fluid overheating,
fully turned position for a long period of caused by overheated brake pads. To help
time. prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is ! Braking when a tire is punctured
S07AK0103
not a malfunction. Normal steering Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
force will be restored after the steering when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –

(298,1)
7-32 Starting and operating/Braking
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Supplemental booster function Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
driving straight ahead while gradually when vacuum pressure fails It assists the brake power when the driver
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the S07AK0205
While the ignition switch is turned “ON” cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
road to a safe location. and the engine is running, the supple- and the brake power is insufficient.
mental booster function operates when the Brake assist generates the brake power
& Brake system brake booster performance is decreased according to the speed at which the driver
S07AK02
due to insufficient vacuum boost. depresses the brake pedal.
! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201 When the brake pedal is depressed while NOTE
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake
the supplemental booster function is oper-
systems. Each circuit works diagonally When you depress the brake pedal
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the strongly or suddenly, the following
vibration may be generated. This is not a
brake system should fail, the other half of phenomena occur. However, even
malfunction.
the system still works. If one circuit fails, though these occur, they do not indi-
the brake pedal will go down much closer ! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake
S07AK0203
to the floor than usual and you will need to assist system is operating properly.
press it down much harder. And a much WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal is
longer distance will be needed to stop the applied by lighter force and generates a
vehicle. Do not be overconfident about the greater braking force.
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear an ABS operating
! Brake booster brings more braking ability to the
The brake booster uses engine manifold
S07AK0202 noise from the engine compartment.
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn ity. Always use the utmost care
off the engine while driving because that when driving regarding vehicle
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in speed and safe distance.
poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops CAUTION
functioning. If this happens, you will have
to depress the pedal much harder than When you need to brake suddenly,
during normal braking, and the braking continue depressing the brake pedal
distance will increase. strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.

(299,1)
Starting and operating/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-33
& Disc brake pad wear warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- CAUTION
indicators tem)
S07AK03
S07AL
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels should always maintain a safe
which may occur during sudden braking or following distance from other
braking on slippery road surfaces. This vehicles.
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel . When driving on badly surfaced
lock-up. roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
When the ABS is operating, you may hear stopping distances may be long-
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration er for a vehicle with the ABS than
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the one without. When driving under
ABS operates. these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample 7
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 distance from other vehicles.
tors on the disc brakes give a warning km/h). . When tire chains are installed,
noise when the brake pads are worn. stopping distances may be long-
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard WARNING er for a vehicle with the ABS than
from the disc brakes while braking, im- one without. Be sure to reduce
mediately have your vehicle checked by Always use the utmost care in driv- your speed and maintain a safe
your SUBARU dealer. ing – overconfidence because you distance from the vehicle in front.
are driving a vehicle with the ABS . When you feel the ABS operating,
could easily lead to a serious acci- you should maintain constant
dent. brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
– CONTINUED –

(300,1)
7-34 Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
& ABS self-check Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
S07AL01
Just after the vehicle is started, you may tribution (EBD) system malfunctions
S07AM01
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar S07AM
to when the ABS operates, and you may The EBD system maximizes the effective-
also hear the sound of the ABS working ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
from the engine compartment. This is brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
caused by an automatic functional test of braking force. It functions by adjusting the
the ABS being carried out and does not distribution of braking force to the rear
indicate a malfunction. wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
& ABS warning light The EBD system is an integral part of the
S07AL02
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20. ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
system malfunction, the EBD system also If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
stops working. the system stops working and the following
warning lights illuminate simultaneously.
When the EBD system is operating, you . Brake system warning light
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
. ABS warning light
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction. . Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
all the warning lights illuminate simulta-
neously during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s
motion may therefore become somewhat
harder to control.

(301,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-35
If all the warning lights illuminate simulta- have the vehicle towed to the nearest Vehicle Dynamics Control
neously, take the following steps. SUBARU dealer for repair.
system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat S07AN
location. WARNING
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the . Driving with the brake system
S07AN05
engine. warning light illuminated is dan- WARNING

3. Restart the engine. gerous. This indicates your brake
4. Release the parking brake. system may not be working prop- Always use the utmost care in driv-
erly. If the light remains illumi- ing – overconfidence because you
If all the warning lights do not come are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle
nated, have the brakes inspected
back on: Dynamics Control system could ea-
by a SUBARU dealer immedi-
The EBD system have a possible malfunc- ately. sily lead to a serious accident.
tion. Drive carefully to the nearest
SUBARU dealer and have the system . If at all in doubt about whether the
inspected. brakes are operating properly, do CAUTION 7
not drive the vehicle. Have your
If all the warning lights stay illuminated vehicle towed to the nearest . Even if your vehicle is equipped
or come back on after approximately 2 SUBARU dealer for repair. with Vehicle Dynamics Control
seconds: system, winter tires should be
1. Turn off the engine again. used when driving on snow-cov-
2. Apply the parking brake. ered or icy roads; in addition,
3. Check the brake fluid level. For details vehicle speed should be reduced
about checking the brake fluid level, refer considerably. Simply having a
to “Checking the fluid level” F11-15. Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
. If the brake fluid level is not below the vehicle will be able to avoid
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be accidents in any situation.
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the . Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the namics Control system is an
system inspected. indication that the road being
. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” travelled on has a slippery sur-
mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, face; since having Vehicle Dy-
– CONTINUED –

(302,1)
7-36 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
namics Control is no guarantee Vehicle Dynamics Control & System features

S07AN06
that full vehicle control will be system is reduced and this In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
maintained at all times and under should be taken into account on a slippery road surface and/or during
all conditions, its activation when driving the vehicle in cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
should be seen as a sign that such a condition. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
the speed of the vehicle should . If non-matching tires are used, adjusts the engine’s output and the
be reduced considerably. the Vehicle Dynamics Control wheels’ respective braking forces to help
. Whenever suspension compo- system may not operate cor- maintain traction and directional control.
nents, steering components, or rectly.
an axle are removed from a . Traction Control Function
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
vehicle, have an inspection of The traction control function is designed to
system helps prevent unstable
that system performed by an prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
vehicle motion such as skidding
authorized SUBARU dealer. slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
using control of the brakes and
maintain traction and directional control.
. The following precautions should engine power. Do not turn off the
Activation of this function is shown by
be observed in order to ensure Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- tem unless it is absolutely neces-
operation indicator light.
trol system is operating properly: sary. If you must turn off the
– All four wheels should be Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- . Skid Suppression Function
fitted with tires of the same tem, drive very carefully accord- The skid suppression function is designed
size, type, and brand. Further- ing to the road surface condi- to help maintain directional stability by
more, the amount of wear tions. suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
should be the same for all four sideways during steering operations. Acti-
tires. vation of this function is shown by flashing
– Keep the tire pressure at the the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
proper level as shown on the indicator light.
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
– Use only the specified tempor- tem may be considered normal when
ary spare tire to replace a flat the following conditions occur.
tire. With a temporary spare
– Slight twitching of the brake
tire, the effectiveness of the

(303,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-37
pedal is felt. replacing a tire. Failure to do so may Dynamics Control system may help to
– The vehicle or steering wheel render the Vehicle Dynamics Control recover from the loss of traction. Use the
shakes to a small degree. system unable to operate correctly. Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as
– An operating sound from the necessary.
engine compartment is heard briefly & Vehicle Dynamics Control . a standing start on a steeply sloping
when starting the engine and when system monitor road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
driving off after starting the engine. S07AN01 otherwise slippery surface
– The brake pedal seems to jolt Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- . extrication of the vehicle when its
when driving off after starting the ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
engine. tion indicator light” F3-23 and “Vehicle
. In the circumstances shown in the Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-
following list, the vehicle may be less 24.
stable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may & Vehicle Dynamics Control
therefore operate. Such operation does OFF switch 7
S07AN02
not indicate a system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics When the switch is pressed during engine
Control system will cause operation of operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
the steering wheel to feel slightly OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination
different compared to that for normal meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
conditions. Control system will be deactivated and the
. It is always important to reduce vehicle will behave like a model not
speed when approaching a corner, Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
even if your vehicle is equipped with trol system. When the switch is pressed
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Control system. Creating adequate driving
wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
. Always turn off the engine before
– CONTINUED –

(304,1)
7-38 Starting and operating/X-MODE
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de- X-MODE (if equipped)
Control OFF indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control S07BI
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
deactivated, traction and stability en- sary. WARNING
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore Control system is deactivated, compo- . Always use the utmost care in
you should not deactivate the Vehicle nents of the brake control system may driving – overconfidence be-
Dynamics Control system except under still activate. When the brake control cause you are driving a vehicle
above-mentioned situations. system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- with X-MODE could easily lead to
namics Control operation indicator a serious accident.
NOTE light flashes. . Always use the utmost care in
. When the switch has been pressed driving – overconfidence be-
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics cause you are driving a vehicle
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics with hill descent control function
Control system automatically reacti- could easily lead to a serious
vates itself the next time the ignition accident. Be especially careful,
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” and depress the brake pedal if
position and the engine is restarted. necessary when driving on ex-
. If the switch is held down for 30 tremely steep downhill, frozen,
seconds or longer, the indicator light muddy or sandy roads. Failure
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control to control the vehicle’s speed
system is activated, and the system may cause a loss of control and
ignores any further pressing of the result in a serious accident.
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the CAUTION
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to . Even if your vehicle is equipped
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- with X-MODE, winter tires should
trol system, the vehicle’s running per- be used when driving on snow-
formance is comparable with that of a covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having X-

(305,1)
Starting and operating/X-MODE 7-39
MODE does not guarantee that – Use only the special tempor- X-MODE has the following functions.
the vehicle will be able to avoid ary spare tire to replace a flat . Hill descent control function:
accidents in any situation. tire. With a normal temporary Using the hill descent control function, you
. Activate the X-MODE when you spare tire, the effectiveness of can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
encounter a very slippery surface the X-MODE is reduced and driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
at low speed. However, having X- this should be taken into ac- likely to increase, the brake control system
MODE is no guarantee that full count when driving the vehi- will be activated to adjust the vehicle
vehicle control will be maintained cle in such a condition. speed.
at all times and under all condi- . If the hill descent control function . Driving ability control:
tions. When activating X-MODE, has operated continuously for a This mode increases the hill-climbing
the speed of the vehicle should long time, the temperature of the ability and driving ability as well as
be reduced considerably. brake disc may increase and the enabling smooth application of torque for
. Whenever suspension compo- hill descent control function may easier control of the steering wheel.
nents, steering components, or be temporarily disabled. In this
an axle are removed from a case, the hill descent control 7
vehicle, have the system in- indicator will disappear. When & To activate/deactivate the X-
spected by an authorized the hill descent control indicator MODE
S07BI01
SUBARU dealer. disappears, the hill descent con-
trol function is disabled.
. Observe the following precau-
tions in order to ensure that the X-MODE is the integrated control system
X-MODE is operating properly: of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
– All four wheels should be Control system, etc. for driving with bad
fitted with tires of the same road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
size, type, and brand. Further- drive more comfortably even in slippery
more, the amount of wear road conditions including uphill and down-
should be the same for all four hill.
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s X-MODE switch
door pillar.
– CONTINUED –

(306,1)
7-40 Starting and operating/X-MODE
appears. . If the engine could overheat because

of a temperature increase of the engine
To deactivate: coolant, it may not be possible to
Press the X-MODE switch again. The X- activate the X-MODE. Even while the
MODE indicator will disappear when the X- X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will
MODE is deactivated. be deactivated when the engine coolant
temperature increases.
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate the X-
MODE by pressing the X-MODE switch & Hill descent control function
S07BI03
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 The hill descent control function will be in
km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be standby mode when the X-MODE is
activated. At this time, a buzzer will activated and the vehicle speed is less
X-MODE indicator (type A) sound twice. than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph The function will operate when the vehicle
(40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is speed is less than approximately 12 mph
activated, a buzzer will sound once and (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
the X-MODE will be deactivated. than approximately 10%.
. While the engine is running, if any of The function will turn off when the vehicle
the following conditions is met, the X- speed is more than approximately 12 mph
MODE will be deactivated. In this case, (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
it is not possible to activate the X- depressed.
MODE.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning CAUTION
light/malfunction indicator light illu-
minates. The braking power of the hill des-
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light cent control function may not be
X-MODE indicator (type B) flashes. sufficient when strong braking
– The ABS warning light illumi- power is needed (e.g., when towing
To activate: nates. a trailer).
Press the X-MODE switch. While the X- – The Vehicle Dynamics Control
MODE is activated, the X-MODE indicator warning light illuminates.

(307,1)
Starting and operating/X-MODE 7-41
! Hill descent control indicator operating. It will disappear when the

NOTE S07BI0301
function is in the disabled mode. When
. Even while the hill descent control this function is changed from operational
function is operating, you can vary the to non-operational, it will disappear when
vehicle speed by using the brake pedal the vehicle speed reaches more than
or accelerator pedal. approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent con-
trol indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur. 7
Hill descent control indicator (type A)
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
Hill descent control indicator (type B)

This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is

(308,1)
7-42 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
Tire pressure monitoring WARNING function when the vehicle is sta-

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. tionary. After adjusting the tire
. If the low tire pressure warning pressures, increase the vehicle
models) light illuminates while driving, speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
S07AO
never brake suddenly. Instead, to start the TPMS rechecking of
perform the following procedure. the tire inflation pressures. If the
Otherwise, an accident involving tire pressures are now above the
serious vehicle damage and ser- severe low pressure threshold,
ious personal injury could occur. the low tire pressure warning
(1) Keep driving straight ahead light should turn off a few min-
while gradually reducing utes later.
speed. If this light still illuminates while
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a driving after adjusting the tire
safe location. pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
(3) Check the pressure for all four causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
tires and adjust the pressure If you have a flat tire, replace it
to the COLD tire pressure with a spare tire as soon as
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- shown on the tire placard.
vides the driver with a warning message possible.
The tire placard is located on
when tire pressure is severely low. the door pillar on the driver’s . When a spare tire is mounted or a
The tire pressure monitoring system will side. wheel rim is replaced without the
activate only when the vehicle is driven at original pressure sensor/trans-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mitter being transferred, the low
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
very short distance, the tires get tire pressure warning light will
system may not react immediately to a
warm and their pressures in- illuminate steadily after blinking
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
crease accordingly. Be sure to for approximately one minute.
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
let the tires cool thoroughly be- This indicates the TPMS is unable
object).
fore adjusting their pressures to to monitor all four road wheels.
the standard values shown on the Contact your SUBARU dealer as
tire placard. Refer to “Tires and soon as possible for tire and
wheels” F11-21. The tire pres- sensor replacement and/or sys-
sure monitoring system does not tem resetting.

(309,1)
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-43
. When a tire is repaired with liquid CAUTION Parking your vehicle

sealant, the tire pressure warning S07AP
valve and transmitter may not Do not place metal film or any metal & Parking brake
operate properly. If a liquid sea- parts in the cargo area. This may To set the parking brake, depress the
S07AP01
lant is used, contact your nearest cause poor reception of the signals brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
SUBARU dealer or other qualified from the tire pressure sensors, and the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
service shop as soon as possi- the tire pressure monitoring system
ble. Make sure to replace the tire will not function properly.
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if NOTE
there is no damage to it and if the This device complies with part 15 of the
sealant residue is properly FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire following two conditions: (1) This de-
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into vice may not cause harmful interfer- 7
the tires, as this may cause a ence, and (2) this device must accept
malfunction of the tire pressure any interference received, including
sensors. If the light illuminates interference that may cause undesired
steadily after blinking for ap- operation.
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU FCC CAUTION To release the parking brake, pull the lever
dealer to have the system in- Changes or modifications not ex- up slightly, press the release button, then
spected. pressly approved by the party respon- lower the lever while keeping the button
sible for compliance could void the pressed.
user’s authority to operate the equip- When the parking brake is set while the
ment. engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”
F3-21.
– CONTINUED –

(310,1)
7-44 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
CAUTION WARNING
Never drive while the parking brake . Never leave unattended children
is set because this will cause un- or pets in the vehicle. They could
necessary wear on the brake linings. accidentally injure themselves or
Before starting to drive, always others through inadvertent op-
make sure that the parking brake eration of the vehicle. Also, on
has been fully released. hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
& Parking tips cause severe or possibly fatal
When parking your vehicle, always per-
S07AP02
injuries to people.
form the following items. . Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the headed up the hill, the front wheels should
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
downgrade.
tem parts.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position. . Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
Never rely on the mechanical friction of the exhaust gas enters the passen-
transmission alone to hold the vehicle. ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

(311,1)
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-45
CAUTION Hill start assist system

S07AU
. If your vehicle has a bumper
under guard (optional), pay atten- WARNING
tion to blocks and other obstruc-
tions on the ground when park- . The Hill start assist system is a
ing. The underspoiler could be device only for helping the driver
damaged by contact with them. to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
. The braking power of the parking when the vehicle is parked on a
brake may not be sufficient when slope, be sure to firmly set the
stronger braking power is parking brake. When setting the
needed (e.g., when parking on a parking brake, make sure that the
steep slope while towing a trai- vehicle remains stationary when
ler). the clutch pedal (MT models) and 7
brake pedal (both MT and CVT
models) are released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist
system will be deactivated and
may lead to an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations
1) Starting forward facing uphill
easier.
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-
– CONTINUED –

(312,1)
7-46 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
ditions. Hill start assist OFF indicator light is

. when the clutch pedal is depressed illuminated. Refer to “Hill start assist
while the brake pedal is also depressed warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator
(MT models) light” F3-22.
. when the vehicle has stopped with the When using the Hill start assist system, a
brake pedal depressed (CVT models) braking effect may be felt even after the
Braking power is maintained temporarily brake pedal has been released. However,
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill for MT models, this braking effect should
start assist system after the brake pedal is disappear once the clutch pedal is re-
released. The driver is therefore able to leased.
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
CAUTION
level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT
models only) and accelerator pedal (all The braking power of the Hill start
models). assist system may not be sufficient
If the braking power of the Hill start assist when strong braking power is
system is insufficient after the brake pedal needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again. NOTE
The Hill start assist system may not A slight jolt may be felt when the
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill vehicle begins to move forward after
start assist system does not operate in the being reversed.
following cases.
. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill
. while the parking brake is applied
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
. while the Hill start assist warning light/

(313,1)
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-47
& To activate/deactivate the Hill place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
start assist system “OFF” position once and then start
S07AU02 over again.
! To deactivate
S07AU0201
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
3. Restart the engine.
5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until 7
Hill start assist OFF indicator the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light on the combination meter turns
CAUTION on and off.
6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle
When starting on an up hill grade, Dynamics Control OFF switch.
make sure the Hill start assist OFF 7. Within 2 seconds, press back the
indicator light is off. Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.
If the Hill start assist OFF indicator The Hill start assist OFF indicator light
light is on, make sure the parking 4. Confirm the following items. turns on and off.
brake is applied. (1) The brake system warning light 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
illuminates. “OFF” position. Hill start assist is deacti-
To activate or deactivate the Hill start (2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control vated.
assist system, perform the following steps. warning light turns off.
NOTE (3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control NOTE
OFF indicator light turns off. When the Hill start assist system is
If you make an error when performing
any steps in the following procedure, (4) The ABS warning light turns off. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
– CONTINUED –

(314,1)
7-48 Starting and operating/Cruise control
indicator light illuminates. Cruise control (if equipped) NOTE

S07AQ
! To reactivate Make sure the cruise control system is
S07AU0202 NOTE turned off when the cruise control is not
To reactivate Hill start assist system,
repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start For models with EyeSight system: in use to avoid unintentionally setting
assist system is activated, the Hill start Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple- of the cruise control.
assist OFF indicator light turns off. ment for the EyeSight system.
& Hill start assist warning light/ Cruise control enables you to maintain a & To set cruise control
S07AQ01
Hill start assist OFF indicator constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
light operative when the vehicle speed is 20
S07AU01
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill mph (30 km/h) or more.
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-22.
WARNING
. Do not use the cruise control
under any of the following condi-
tions. These may cause loss of
vehicle control.
– driving up or down a steep
grade
– driving on slippery or winding Cruise control main button
roads 1. Press the cruise control main button.
– driving in heavy traffic
– towing a trailer
. When using the cruise control,
always set the speed appropri-
ately according to the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions, and
other conditions.

(315,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-49
Cruise control indicator light (type A) 3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
“SET” side and release it. Then release the 1) When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”.
7
accelerator pedal. 2) When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”.
NOTE
When setting a cruise speed for the first
time during a drive, both “SET” and
“RES” may be used to set the initial
cruise speed.
Cruise control indicator light (type B)

The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
– CONTINUED –

(316,1)
creased while driving with the cruise WARNING

control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- For CVT models, you can cancel the
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- cruise control by shifting the select
leased, the vehicle will return to and lever into the “N” position. However,
maintain the previous cruising speed. do not shift the lever into the “N”
position while driving except in case
& To temporarily cancel the of emergency. If the select lever is
cruise control shifted into the “N” position, the
S07AQ02
The cruise control can be temporarily engine brake will no longer work.
canceled in the following ways. This could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator light in the

Cruise control set indicator light (type B) combination meter turns off when the
1) When setting the displayed unit as cruise control is canceled.
“MPH”.
2) When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
meter. The set speed will be shown on
the combination meter. You can change
the displayed unit by operating the combi-
nation meter display.
. For type A meter details, refer to . Press the “CANCEL” button.
“Combination meter settings” F3-11. . Press the X-MODE switch to activate
. For type B meter details, refer to the X-MODE (models with X-MODE).
“Screen Settings” F3-38.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models To resume the cruise control after it has
The vehicle will maintain the desired
only). been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
speed.
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

(317,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-51
switch to the “RES” side to return to the Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” ! To increase the speed (by accelera-
original cruising speed automatically. side and hold it until the vehicle reaches tor pedal)
The cruise control set indicator light in the the desired speed. Then, release the S07AQ0402
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
combination meter will automatically illu- celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
minate at this time. will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
& To turn off the cruise control When setting the displayed unit as
S07AQ03
There are two ways to turn off the cruise “MPH”:
control: The set speed can be increased 1 mph
. Press the cruise control main button (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
again. SET” switch to the “RES” side.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
When setting the displayed unit as
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
“km/h”:
vehicle is completely stopped). 7
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
& To change the cruising speed switch to the “RES” side.
S07AQ04
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/ 2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
SET” switch) “SET” side once. Now the desired speed is
S07AQ0405
set and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
– CONTINUED –

(318,1)
! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/ ! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light
S07AQ05
SET” switch) pedal) Refer to “Cruise control indicator light” F3-
S07AQ0406 S07AQ0404
1. Depress the brake pedal to release 30.
cruise control temporarily.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
S07AQ06
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-31.
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
2. When the speed decreases to the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
will be memorized and treated as the new
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
set speed.
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
When setting the displayed unit as keep running at that speed without depres-
“MPH”: sing the accelerator pedal.
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side.

(319,1)
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-53
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) at all even when a vehicle is present ! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
S07BM0101
S07BM in a neighboring lane or approach-
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with ing from either side.
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross The driver is responsible for paying
Traffic Alert. attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
These functions enable the system to
detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
drawing attention to the driver when & System features
changing a lane or when driving in reverse. S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
WARNING tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
The driver is responsible for driving adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
safely. Always be sure to check the high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind 7
1) Operating range
surroundings with your eyes when Spot Detection)
changing lanes or reversing the . To detect a vehicle approaching from The system warns the driver of dangers as
vehicle. the right or left while reversing the vehicle follows.
The system is designed to assist the (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . If the system detects a vehicle existing
driver to change lanes or reverse in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach
safely by monitoring the rear and The system uses radar sensors for the indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s)
side areas of the vehicle. However, above functions. will illuminate.
you cannot rely on this system alone NOTE
in assuring the safety during a lane
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
change or reversing. Overconfi-
certified by the radio wave related laws
dence in this system could result in
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in
an accident and lead to serious
other countries, certification of the
injury or death. Since the system
country where the vehicle is driven
operation has various limitations,
must be obtained. For certification in
the flashing or illumination of the
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-60.
may be delayed or it may not operate
– CONTINUED –

(320,1)
7-54 Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
! Lane Change Assist (LCA) ! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM010101 S07BM0103
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal 1) Operating range 1) Operating range
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA
The system warns the driver of dangers as The system notifies the driver of another
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
follows. vehicle approaching from either side when
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light will flash. . If the system detects a vehicle ap- driving in reverse. This feature helps the
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor- driver check the rear and side areas of the
ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi- vehicle when moving backward.
cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
illuminate.
ing from either side while moving back-
. If the driver operates the turn signal ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA following way.
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
cator light will flash.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

(321,1)
! Limitations of the detectability of reversing the vehicle. & System operation

RCTA S07BM02
S07BM010301 ! Operating conditions
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, S07BM0201
the RCTA may not operate properly in The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
angled parking. following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
position (when reversing).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the 7
Example 2 following situations.
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
C) Vehicle that may be detected
. The vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12
Example 1 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
1) The detection range of the radar sensors NOTE indicator remains off (except when rever-
2) Area out of detection range of the radar The system may detect that a vehicle sing).
sensors (C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
A) Vehicle that may not be detected Always be sure to check the surround- NOTE
B) Parked vehicle ings with your eyes when reversing the . In the following case, the BSD/RCTA
vehicle. will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA
WARNING warning indicator will appear. If the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
An approaching vehicle (A) may not have your vehicle inspected at a
be detected because the detection SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
range is limited by the parked vehi- – When a malfunction occurs in the
cle (B). Always be sure to check the system, including the BSD/RCTA
surroundings with your eyes when approach indicator light
– CONTINUED –

(322,1)
. In the following cases, the BSD/ eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica- with a low body height such as
RCTA will temporarily stop operating tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/ sports cars or a trailer with no
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a cargo)
RCTA OFF indicator will appear. prolonged time, have the system in- – Vehicles that are not approaching
– When the radar sensor becomes spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as your vehicle even though they are in
significantly misaligned (If the or- possible. the detection area (either on a
ientation of the radar sensor is . The detectability of the radar sen- neighboring lane to the rear or be-
shifted for any reason, readjust- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de- side your vehicle when reversing)
ment is required. Have the sensor tection may be impaired and the system (The system determines the pre-
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) may not operate properly under the sence of approaching vehicles
– When a large amount of snow or following conditions. based on data detected by the radar
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- – When the rear bumper around the sensors.)
face around the radar sensors radar sensors is distorted – Vehicles traveling at significantly
– When the vehicle is driven on a – When ice, snow or mud adheres different speeds
snow-covered road or in an envir- to the rear bumper surface around – Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
onment in which there are no ob- the radar sensors most the same speed as your vehi-
jects around (such as in a desert) for – When stickers, etc. are affixed on cle for a prolonged time
a long time the areas of the radar sensors on – Oncoming vehicles
– When the temperature around the the rear bumper – Vehicles in a lane beyond the
radar sensors increased exces- – During adverse weather condi- neighboring lane
sively due to long driving on uphill tions such as rain, snow or fog – Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
grades in summer, etc. – When driving on wet roads such cantly lower speed that you are
– When the temperature around the as snow-covered roads and through trying to overtake
radar sensors becomes extremely puddles . On a road with extremely narrow
low . The radar sensors may not detect or lanes, the system may detect vehicles
– When the vehicle battery voltage may have difficulty detecting the fol- driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lowers lowing. lane.
– When the vehicle battery be- – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe- . When the 8-inch audio/navigation
comes overvoltage destrians, stationary objects on the system is performing a software up-
road or road side, etc. date, the RCTA warning icons may not
When the above conditions are cor- be displayed on the audio/navigation
– Vehicles with body shapes that
rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op- screen until the update is complete.
the radar may not reflect (vehicles

(323,1)
& BSD/RCTA approach indica- driver of dangers under the following ! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
tor light/warning buzzer conditions. zer (only when reversing)
S07BM0302
S07BM03 . While the indicator light illuminates, if A warning buzzer sounds along with
When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ you operate the turn signal lever toward
RCTA approach indicator light will operate flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
the side in which this light turned on. dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
to alert the driver when there are vehicles
. When reversing the vehicle while the
in the neighboring lanes. When reversing The setting of the warning buzzer volume
system detects a vehicle approaching
the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach can be changed by operating the combi-
from either side.
indicator light and warning buzzer will nation meter display (color LCD). For
operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is details, refer to “Menu screens” F3-38.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
approaching from the left or right side.
light dimming function ! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
S07BM030101
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light When the headlights are turned on, the approach indicator light/warning
S07BM0301
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach buzzer
S07BM0303
indicator light will be reduced. . In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
7
NOTE the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
. You may have difficulty recognizing system may fail to issue these warnings.
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light – When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
under the following conditions. boring lane from a lane next to the
– When affected by direct sunlight neighboring lane
– When affected by the headlight – When driving on a steep incline or
beams from the vehicles behind on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
. While the illumination brightness grades
control dial is in the fully upward – When going beyond a pass
position, even if the headlights are – When both your vehicle and a
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
It is mounted in each side of the outside RCTA approach indicator light will not are driving on the far side of each lane.
mirrors. be reduced. For details about the – When several narrowly-spaced ve-
The indicator light will illuminate when a illumination brightness control dial, hicles are approaching in a row
vehicle approaching from behind is de- refer to “Illumination brightness con-
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
tected. trol” F3-12.
when making turns at an intersection)
The indicator light will flash to warn the
– CONTINUED –

(324,1)
– When there is a difference in height away is driving on the near side of its
between your lane and the neighboring lane from your vehicle
lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is & BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
S07BM08
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch ! System temporary stops
S07BM0801
– Immediately after the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
under the following conditions. light may illuminate when driving close to
– When backing out of an angled solid objects on the road or road side (such
parking space as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
– When a large-sized vehicle is . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
parked next to your vehicle (That light may flash when turning at an inter-
section in urban areas or a multilane 1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
vehicle prevents the propagation of 2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
radar waves.) intersection.
– When reversing on sloped roads . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator This display appears when the system is
– When reversing at a high speed light may flash and the warning buzzer used under the following conditions.
may sound if a building or a wall exists in . Extremely high or low temperatures
the reversing direction. . When abnormal voltage exists for the
. In the following cases, the system may vehicle battery
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away . When the radar sensor is significantly
from your vehicle. misaligned
– When you are driving on the near
side of its lane from the corresponding Once the above conditions are corrected,
vehicle the system will recover from the temporary
– When the vehicle driving two lanes stop condition and the indicator will dis-

(325,1)
appear. If the indicator remains displayed & BSD/RCTA warning indicator & BSD/RCTA OFF switch
for a prolonged time, have the system S07BM04 S07BM05
inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ! System malfunction

S07BM0403
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
S07BM0802
BSD/RCTA OFF switch 7

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due 4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
This display appears when the detectabil-
dealer and have the system inspected.
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear. If the
indicator remains displayed for a pro-
longed time, have the system inspected
at a SUBARU dealer. BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type A)
– CONTINUED –

(326,1)
– When towing a trailer & Certification for the BSD/

– When a bicycle carrier or other RCTA
carrier item is fitted to the rear of the S07BM06
vehicle ! U.S.-spec. models

S07BM0601
– When using a chassis dynam- FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and CAUTION
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle FCC WARNING
. If the ignition switch is turned to the Changes or modifications not ex-
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known pressly approved by the party re-
status of the system is maintained. For sponsible for compliance could void
example, if the ignition switch is turned the user’s authority to operate the
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type B) to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the equipment.
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed, BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on will remain deactivated the next time
the combination meter, and the BSD/ the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” NOTE
RCTA is deactivated. position. This device complies with part 15 of the
Press the switch again to activate the BSD/ FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will following two conditions: (1) This de-
disappear. vice may not cause harmful interfer-
When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap-
proach indicator light on the side of the
rearview mirror illuminates for a few
operation.
seconds and then turns off.
NOTE
. In the following cases, the system
may not operate properly due to
blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the
system.

(327,1)
! Canada-spec. models ! Mexico-spec. models

S07BM0602 S07BM0603
– CONTINUED –

(328,1)
7-62 Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
& Handling of radar sensors sensor becomes misaligned, a system Reverse Automatic Braking
S07BM07 malfunction may occur, including the in-
ability to detect vehicles entering the
System (if equipped)
S07BN
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact Reverse Automatic Braking is a system
your SUBARU dealer for inspection. designed to help avoid collisions or reduce
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors. collision damage when reversing the
vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected
NOTE in the reversing direction, the system will
If the radar sensors require repair or notify the driver with a warning sound and
replacement, or the bumper area may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-
around the radar sensors requires matically.
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis- WARNING
1) Sensors tance. . Reverse Automatic Braking is not
a system intended to replace the
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
driver’s responsibility to check
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
surrounding areas for vehicles or
bumper.
obstacles to avoid a collision.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions. . The driver is responsible for driv-
ing safely. Always be sure to
. Always keep the bumper surface near
check the surroundings visually
the radar sensors clean.
when reversing the vehicle.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar . There are some cases in which
sensors. the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
. Do not modify the bumper near the
tion has limitations. The warning
radar sensors.
sound or automatic braking may
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar be delayed or may not operate at
sensors. all even when an obstacle is
. Do not expose the bumper near the present.
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

(329,1)
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-63
. The system is not designed to the acquired data to any other third
detect people (including chil- party except under the following con-
dren), animals or other moving ditions.
objects. . The vehicle owner has given his/her
. Depending on the vehicle condi- consent.
tion or the surrounding environ- . The disclosure/provision is based
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability on a court order or other legally en-
to detect objects may be compro- forceable request.
mised. . Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institution
NOTE for statistical processing or similar
The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys- purposes.
tem records and stores the following
data when automatic braking operates. & Reverse Automatic Braking 7
It does not record conversations, per- System overview
sonal information or other audio data. S07BN01
The system detects objects using sonar
. Distance from the object sensors installed in the rear bumper.
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status . If the system determines a possible
. Brake pedal operation status collision with an object in the reversing
. Select lever position direction, automatic deceleration will be
. Outside temperature activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar vate.
sensors . If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-
matic hard braking will be applied and a
SUBARU and third parties contracted continuous beeping sound will activate.
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
– CONTINUED –

(330,1)
! Detecting range
S07BN0101
1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2) Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
3) Detecting range (length): Approximately
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle
1) When reversing 3) When the vehicle is stopped by the

2) When either strong automatic braking or system (in this case, the continuous
torque control is applied to prevent beep will remain sounding)
collision (in this case, short warning 4) Object (e.g., a wall)
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)

(331,1)
WARNING NOTE
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- . In the following cases, the Reverse
road crossing and you are trying to Automatic braking system will not
escape by reversing through the operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU
crossing gate, the system may re- dealer to have the system inspected.
cognize the crossing gate as an – The EyeSight warning indicator
obstacle and the brake may activate. is illuminated
In this case, remain calm and either – The Reverse Automatic Braking
continue to depress the accelerator fail indicator is illuminated
pedal or cancel the system. To . When the Reverse Automatic Brak-
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel- ing system OFF indicator is illumi-
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking nated, the Reverse Automatic braking
system operation” F7-71. 1) EyeSight warning indicator system cannot be operated.
2) RAB warning indicator . In the following cases, the system 7
3) RAB OFF indicator may not be able to properly detect an
& Operating conditions obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
S07BN02 dealer to have the system inspected.
The Reverse Automatic Braking system position
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
will operate when all of the following . The EyeSight warning indicator is off
applied to the sonar sensor or the
conditions are met. . The RAB warning indicator is off rear bumper near the sonar sensor
. HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off – The rear bumper is modified
. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys- – The rear bumper has been re-
tem is set to on moved and reattached
. The select lever is in the “R” position – The ground clearance is changed
. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 due to the vehicle’s loading condi-
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h) tion or modification
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the rear bumper near the sonar
sensor
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper is
– CONTINUED –

(332,1)
deformed set to the “R” position – A sound wave with a frequency

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation – Objects with a surface which may similar to the vehicle’s system is
system is performing a software up- not reflect the sound wave emitted transmitted nearby
date, the Reverse Automatic Braking from the sonar sensor such as a – A vehicle equipped with the same
System may not display the following chain link fence. system is reversing toward your
items on the audio/navigation screen . Objects the system is not designed reversing direction
until the update is complete. to detect
– Display Icon on/off Function – Pedestrians Weather conditions
– Distance Indicator Image – Moving objects including moving – Extremely high or extremely low
– Warning Message vehicles temperatures in which the area near
the sonar sensor becomes too hot
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto- – Objects which absorb sound
or too cold to operate
matic braking ability will be reduced. waves such as cloth or snow
. The system is designed to avoid – The rear bumper near the sonar
– Objects whose surface has a
collisions by automatic hard braking sensors is exposed to heavy rain or
diagonal angle
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is a significant amount of water
– Objects that are low to the ground
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). – Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
such as parking blocks
However, the system does not guaran- – Air is moving rapidly such as
– Objects that are high above the
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid when a strong wind is blowing
ground such as objects hanging
collisions in any situation. from above Parts attached to the rear bumper
. If the vehicle is reversed at an . The system may not be able to near the sonar sensor
extremely slow speed, the driver’s properly detect objects or may cause
operation may be prioritized. In this – Commercial electronic parts (fog
a system malfunction when the follow- light, fender pole, radio antenna) or
case, automatic braking will not oper- ing conditions exist
ate. commercial attachment parts (trai-
. The system may not be able to detect ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
High frequency sound from other
the following objects guard) are attached
sources are nearby
– Sharp or thin objects such as – Parts that emit high frequency
– Horn sound from another vehicle
poles, fences and ropes which may sound, such as a horn or speaker,
– Engine sound from other vehi- are attached
not reflect the sound wave emitted cles
from the sonar sensor – Sound of an air brake Vehicle conditions
– Objects that are too close to the – Vehicle detection equipment or a – The vehicle is significantly in-
rear bumper when the select lever is sonar from another vehicle clined

(333,1)
– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is mis-
aligned due to a collision or an
accident
Surrounding environment
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direc-
tion
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area – When reversing on an uneven
– When reversing in an area where road 7
objects or walls are adjacent to the
vehicle such as narrow tunnels, . In circumstances such as the follow-
narrow bridges, narrow roads or ing, it may not be possible to avoid a
narrow garages collision even when the system oper-
– Wheel tracks or a hole is present ates normally.
in the ground of the reversing – The tire air pressure is not cor-
direction rect.
– When reversing over a drainage – The tires have become worn.
cover (grate cover) – Tires which are not the desig-
nated size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were per-
– The path of the reversing direc- formed using a puncture repair kit.
tion is inclined such as on a steep – The suspension was modified.
uphill – Tire chains are installed.
– A curb is present in the reversing – Vehicle driving is unstable due to
direction accident or malfunction.
– When reversing downhill
– CONTINUED –

(334,1)
– The brake warning light is illumi- Guideline of detecting range

nated. Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (ob- 35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound
& Reverse Automatic Braking ject detected)
System operation Medium proximity
S07BN03 alert (approaching the 28
cm)
to 35 inches (70 to 90 Yellow Short beeps
When the Reverse Automatic Braking object)
System is in operation, the range between Short proximity alert
the vehicle and the detected object will be (approaching closer 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 Orange Rapid short beeps
cm)
indicated on the audio/navigation monitor. to the object)
Also, warning sounds will activate in 3 Closest proximity
levels to warn the driver of a potential alert (too close to the 20 inches (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep
collision. object)
While the RAB is operating, a warning *: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
message is displayed on the audio/navi-
gation monitor and the combination meter
display (color LCD).

(335,1)
! Obstacle detected and alert level When an object is detected in the rever-
S07BN0301
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer) 7
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)
1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more
Automatic braking warning

1) Warning message
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,
the system may determine the risk of
collision with the object. In this case, short
warning beeps or continuous warning
Closest proximity alert (too close to the beeps will sound and either strong auto-
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
object) matic braking or torque control will be
1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less applied to prevent collision.
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)
– CONTINUED –

(336,1)
! When the vehicle is being stopped ! After the vehicle is stopped by the illuminates.
by the system system – There is ice, snow, mud, or other
S07BN0303 S07BN0304
substance on the sonar sensors.
– The select lever was shifted to R when
there is an obstacle located close to the
rear bumper.
– A sound with a frequency close to that
of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking system was detected.
NOTE
Automatic braking only holds the vehi-
cle for 2 seconds. Before the automatic
brake is released, a warning sound (3
short beeps followed by a long beep)
Depress brake pedal warning RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the will activate to alert the driver that the
1) Warning message Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned automatic will be released.
OFF.
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by After the brake pedal is depressed, the
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF
depressed, a message will be displayed indicator will illuminate and the system will
on the audio/navigation monitor and the temporarily stop operating. The Reverse
continuous beep will remain sounding. Automatic Braking system OFF indicator
will turn off when the select lever is shifted
At this time, a warning message is also
to a position other than the “R” position.
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play (color LCD). The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to “R”
position.
In circumstances such as the following, the
Reverse Automatic Braking system auto-
matically stops operating and the Reverse
Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

(337,1)
& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking system opera-
tion
S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking system
can be temporarily canceled by any of the
following operations.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the brake
pedal is depressed
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the accel-
erator pedal is depressed
. The accelerator pedal is kept de- 1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
pressed (In this case, limited acceleration Braking Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned 7
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic OFF.
will be canceled and the vehicle will
Braking
continue reversing.) 3) ON setting key of the object detection RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the
. The select lever is shifted to a position warning beeping sound Reverse Automatic Braking system is
other than the “R” position 4) OFF setting key of the object detection turned ON.
warning beeping sound
NOTE NOTE
When the ON setting key is shown, the
The system will be canceled if the . When the settings cannot be chan-
corresponding setting is ON.
object is no longer detected. ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn grayed out.
the setting OFF. . The ON/OFF setting key may be
& Reverse Automatic Braking When the OFF setting is shown, the greyed out if the Reverse Automatic
system ON/OFF setting corresponding setting is OFF. Braking system malfunctions, etc. In
S07BN05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R” Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn this case, turn the ignition switch to the
position, the below functions of the Re- the setting ON. “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it
verse Automatic Braking system can be to the “ON” position again. If the setting
set by operating the audio/navigation When the Reverse Automatic Braking cannot be changed even after turning
monitor. system is turned OFF, the following in- the ignition switch to the “ON” position
dicator will illuminate.
– CONTINUED –

(338,1)
again, consult your SUBARU dealer. & RAB warning indicator & Handling of the sonar sen-
. The settings will be restored as S07BN07
sors
follows when the select lever is shifted S07BN06
to the “R” position next time. The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
– Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
the Reverse Automatic Braking system,
tem settings: default (ON setting)
observe the following precautions.
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
operating the combination meter
display (color LCD)
Also, the following settings can be chan-
ged by operating the combination meter
display (color LCD).
. Warning volume
1) RAB malfunction message
. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF
2) RAB warning indicator
For details, refer to “Menu screens” F3- If the Reverse Automatic Braking System
38. malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-
nates on the combination meter. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. . Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-

(339,1)
tion may occur, including inability to detect

objects in the reversing direction. If any
strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
7

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(341,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 Tire chains ........................................................... 8-11
S08
miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2 Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-11
Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Loading your vehicle............................................ 8-12
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-12
Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13
Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4 Roof rail ............................................................... 8-14
Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4 Roof tent .............................................................. 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4 Trailer hitch (dealer option) ................................. 8-16
Off road driving....................................................... 8-6 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-17
Before driving ........................................................ 8-6 If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-18
During driving........................................................ 8-7 Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-18
After driving........................................................... 8-7 Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-19
Winter driving.......................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits............................................. 8-19
Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-8 Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-22
Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-9 When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-23
Corrosion protection ............................................. 8-10 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-23 8
Snow tires ............................................................ 8-10 Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-24

(342,1)
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving – Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) S08AB monoxide)
S08AA The following suggestions will help to save S08AC
The performance and long life of your fuel.

vehicle are dependent on how you handle . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
and care for your vehicle while it is new. speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Follow these instructions during the first . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
1,000 miles (1,600 km): tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
. Do not race the engine. And do not reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm maintain that speed for as long as possi- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
except in an emergency. ble.
. Always properly maintain the en-
. Do not drive at one constant engine or . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
vehicle speed, either fast or slow. racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from entering
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac- . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. the vehicle.
celeration, except in an emergency. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
gency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
The same break-in procedures should be driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
applied to an overhauled engine, newly . Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
tire wear and fuel consumption.
mounted engine or when brake pads or hicle for a lengthy time while the
. Use the air conditioner only when engine is running. If that is un-
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
necessary. avoidable, then use the ventila-
. Keep the front and rear wheels in tion fan to force fresh air into the
proper alignment. vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

(343,1)
Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter your vehicle checked and repaired by an
vehicle, have the problem S08AD
authorized SUBARU dealer.
checked and corrected as soon . Do not apply undercoating or rust
as possible. If you must drive prevention treatment to the heat shield of
under these conditions, drive catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
only with all windows fully open. tem.
. Keep the rear gate closed while . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
driving to prevent exhaust gas level.
from entering the vehicle.
WARNING
NOTE . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Due to the expansion and contraction or park the vehicle anywhere
of the metals used in the manufacture near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the exhaust system, you may hear a grass, paper, rags or leaves),
crackling sound coming from the ex- The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to operates at very high tempera-
haust system for a short time after the
tures.
8
engine has been shut off. This sound is reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
normal. thus providing cleaner exhaust. . Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have

(344,1)
8-4 Driving tips/Periodic inspections
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
S08AE S08AF S08AG
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country:
WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. speed according to the road and
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and require- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage ments of each country. avoid having an accident on a
intervals. sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the same
for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is

(345,1)
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models 8-5
printed on the tire placard. The conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
tire placard is located on the There is little difference in handling, how-
driver’s door pillar. ever, during extremely sharp turns or
If all of four tires are not the same sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
for items (a) to (h), serious me- down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
chanical damage could occur to reduce your speed and maintain an ample
the drive train of your car, and distance from other vehicles.
affect the following. . Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended
– Ride
tire pressure is provided on the tire
– Handling placard, which is located under the door
– Braking latch on the driver’s side.
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
bration All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine under hard-driving conditions such as
power to all four wheels. AWD models steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
– Clearance between the body provide better traction when driving on more frequent replacement of the follow-
and tires slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and ing items than that specified in the “War- 8
It also may be dangerous and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
lead to loss of vehicle control, shifting power between the front and rear – Engine oil
and it can lead to an accident. wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide – Brake fluid
added traction during acceleration and – Rear differential gear oil
added engine braking force during decel-
CAUTION – Manual transmission oil (MT mod-
eration.
els)
If you use a temporary spare tire to Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle – Continuously variable transmission
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the may handle differently than an ordinary fluid (CVT models)
original temporary spare tire stored two wheel drive vehicle and it contains – Front differential gear oil (CVT
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may some features unique to AWD. For safety models)
result in severe mechanical damage purposes as well as to avoid damaging the . Never attempt to drive through pools
to the drive train of your vehicle. AWD system, you should keep the follow- and puddles, or roads flooded with water.
ing tips in mind. Water entering the engine air intake or the
. An AWD model is better able to climb exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
steeper roads under snowy or slippery electrical parts may damage your vehicle
– CONTINUED –

(346,1)
8-6 Driving tips/Off road driving
and may cause it to stall. Off road driving your SUBARU while operating it off-
. There are some precautions that you S08AH road and not using common sense
must observe when towing your vehicle. precautions such as those listed
For detailed information, refer to “Towing” WARNING here is not eligible for warranty
F9-13. coverage.
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and Because of the AWD feature and higher
weather conditions in order to ground clearance, you can drive your
avoid having an accident on a SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- But please keep in mind that an AWD
ing or under other similar condi- SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither
tions. a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-
. Always use the utmost care in terrain vehicle. If you do take your
driving – overconfidence be- SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
cause you are driving an All- precautions such as those in the following
Wheel Drive model could easily list should be taken.
lead to a serious accident.
& Before driving
S08AH09
. Make certain that you and all of your
CAUTION
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
Frequent driving of an AWD model . Carry some emergency equipment,
under hard-driving conditions such such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
as rough roads or off roads will wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
necessitate more frequent replace- citizens band radio.
ment of the following items than that . Secure all cargo carried inside the
specified in the maintenance sche- vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
dule described in the “Warranty and higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
Maintenance Booklet”. stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
. Engine oil thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
. Brake fluid Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
Remember that damage done to gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

(347,1)
Driving tips/Off road driving 8-7
. Never equip your vehicle with tires stops. This could create a fire hazard. mode” F7-26.
larger than those specified in this manual.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
& After driving
& During driving S08AH11
. Always check your brakes for effective-
S08AH10 . If driving through water, such as when
General precautions: crossing shallow streams, first check the ness immediately after driving in sand,
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- depth of the water and the bottom of the mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or stream bed for firmness and ensure that stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
over rough terrain. the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly process several times to dry out the brake
. Slow down and employ extra caution at and cross the stream without stopping. discs and brake pads.
all times. When driving off-road, you will The water should be shallow enough that it . After driving through tall grass, mud,
not have the benefit of marked traffic does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and riage. Water entering the engine air intake no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,
the like. or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-
. Do not drive across steep slopes. electrical parts may damage your vehicle body. Clear off any such matter from the
Instead, drive either straight up or straight and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more drive through rushing water; regardless of materials trapped or adhering to the
easily tip over sideways than it can end its depth, it can wash away the ground underbody, a mechanical breakdown or 8
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down from under your tires, resulting in possible fire could occur.
slopes that are too steep. loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- . If you must rock the vehicle to free it road driving. Suspension components are
cially at higher speeds. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ need to be washed thoroughly.
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the select lever back and forth between “1”/“D”
wheel and injure your hands. Instead, and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the engine. For the best possible traction,
outside of the rim. avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
. Do not drive or park over or near free the vehicle.
flammable materials such as dry grass or . When the road surface is extremely
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The slippery, you can obtain better traction by
exhaust system is very hot while the starting the vehicle with the transmission in
engine is running and right after the engine 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For
CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual

(348,1)
8-8 Driving tips/Winter driving
Winter driving the vehicle. CAUTION

S08AI SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
& Operation during cold weath- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
er surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- tration appropriately for the out-
S08AI01 perature varies according to how much it is side temperature. If the concen-
! Maintenance diluted, as indicated in the following table. tration is inappropriate, sprayed
S08AI0105
Carry some emergency equipment, such washer fluid may freeze on the
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Temperature windshield and obstruct your
centration
a small shovel and jumper cables. view, and the fluid may freeze in
30% 10.48F (−128C) the reservoir tank.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-
peratures reduce battery capacity. The 50% −48F (−208C) . State or local regulations on
battery must be in good condition to volatile organic compounds may
100% −498F (−458C) restrict the use of methanol, a
provide enough power for cold winter
starts. common windshield washer anti-
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,
freeze additive. Washer fluids
check the freezing temperatures in the
It normally takes longer to start the engine containing non-methanol anti-
table above when adjusting the fluid
in very cold weather conditions. Use an freeze agents should be used
concentration to the outside temperature.
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity only if they provide cold weather
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with protection without damaging
will make it harder to start the engine. a different concentration from the one your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
used previously, purge the old fluid from or washer system.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
the piping between the reservoir tank and
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
washer nozzles by operating the washer
Forcing a frozen door open may damage for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if ! Before driving your vehicle
S08AI0101
or separate the rubber weather strips the concentration of the fluid remaining in Before entering the vehicle, remove any
around the door. If the door is frozen, use the piping is too low for the outside snow or ice from your shoes because that
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards temperature, it may freeze and block the could make the pedals slippery and driving
thoroughly wipe the water away. nozzles. dangerous.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- While warming up the vehicle before
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
engine antifreeze or other substitutes brake pedal, and all other controls operate
because they may damage the paint of smoothly.

(349,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9
Clear away ice and snow that has accu- icing may develop on the brake an extended period, it is best to have the
mulated under the fenders to avoid making system, which could cause poor fuel tank filled to capacity.
steering difficult. During severe winter braking action. Check for snow or
driving, stop when and where it is safe to
& Driving on snowy and icy
ice buildup on the suspension,
do so and check under the fenders disc brakes and brake hoses
roads
S08AI02
periodically. underneath the vehicle. If there To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
! Parking in cold weather is caked snow or ice, remove it, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
S08AI0102 being careful not to damage the speed driving, and sharp turning when
disc brakes and brake hoses and driving on snowy or icy roads.
WARNING
ABS harness. Always maintain ample distance between
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
gases under your vehicle. Keep When parking for long periods in cold to avoid the need for sudden braking.
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and weather, you should observe the following To supplement the foot brake, use the
from around your vehicle if you park tips. engine brake effectively to control the
the vehicle in snow with the engine 1. For MT models, place the shift lever in vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
running. the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models, when necessary.)
place the select lever in the “P” position. Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- 8
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
CAUTION the vehicle from moving. leading to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use the parking brake ! Refueling in cold weather An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
when parking for long periods in S08AI0103 hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
cold weather since it could freeze To help prevent moisture from forming in mance on snowy and icy roads. For
in that position. the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, information on braking on slippery sur-
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
. When the vehicle is parked in tank is recommended during cold weather.
snow or when it snows, raise the System)” F7-33 and “Vehicle Dynamics
wiper blades off the glass to Use only additives that are specifically Control system” F7-35.
prevent damage to them. designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts WARNING
. When the vehicle has been left longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
parked after use on roads heavily fuel level reaches half empty. For models with cruise control:
covered with snow, or has been Do not use the cruise control on
left parked during a snowstorm, If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
– CONTINUED –

(350,1)
8-10 Driving tips/Winter driving
roads. This may cause loss of vehi- use the rear window defogger. Refer to (b) Circumference
cle control. “Defogger and deicer” F3-86. (c) Speed symbol
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts (d) Load index
CAUTION to stick on the surface of the windshield (e) Construction
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
(f) Manufacturer
Avoid prolonged continuous driving with the airflow selection in “ ” and the
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the temperature set for maximum warmth. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
engine’s intake system and may After the windshield gets warmed enough (h) Degrees of wear
hinder the airflow, which could re- to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away For the items (a) to (d), you must
sult in engine shutdown or even using the windshield washer. Refer to obey the specification that is
breakdown. “Windshield washer” F3-75. printed on the tire placard. The
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the tire placard is located on the
! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is driver’s door pillar.
S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to If all of four winter tires are not
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the the same for items (a) to (h),
the windshield or rear window. vehicle at road side, use the hazard serious mechanical damage
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer could occur to the drive train of
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8. your car, and affect the following.
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure. – Ride
& Corrosion protection
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade S08AI03 – Handling
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
– Braking
selection in “ ” and the temperature set – Speedometer/Odometer cali-
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade & Snow tires
S08AI04 bration
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
“Climate control” F4-1. WARNING – Clearance between the body
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper and tires
. When replacing or installing win- It also may be dangerous and
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
ter tire(s), all four tires must be lead to loss of vehicle control,
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
the same for following items. and it can lead to an accident.
“Defogger and deicer” F3-86.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, (a) Size . Do not use a combination of

(351,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-11
radial, belted bias or bias tires & Tire chains cause you are using a traction device
since it may cause dangerous S08AI05 could easily lead to a serious accident.
handling characteristics and lead CAUTION
to an accident. & Rocking the vehicle
Tire chains cannot be used on your S08AI06
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season vehicle because of the lack of clear- If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
tires” as original equipment, which are ance between the tires and vehicle snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
designed to provide an adequate measure body. erator pedal slightly and move the shift
of traction, handling and braking perfor- lever/select lever back and forth between
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it “1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
may be possible to enhance performance NOTE engine. For the best possible traction,
through use of tires designed specifically When tire chains cannot be used, use of avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
for winter driving conditions. another type of traction device (such as free the vehicle.
When you choose to install winter tires on spring chains) may be acceptable if use When the road surface is extremely
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire on your vehicle is recommended by the slippery, you can obtain better traction by
size and type. You must install four winter device manufacturer, taking into ac- starting the vehicle with the transmission in
tires that are of the same size, construc- count tire size and road conditions. 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT
Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models). 8
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires structions, especially regarding max-
If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
since this may result in dangerous hand- imum vehicle speed.
information about holding the transmission
ling characteristics. When you choose a To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
tire, make sure that there is enough drive slowly, readjust or remove the manual mode” F7-26.
clearance between the tire and vehicle device if it is contacting your vehicle,
body. and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
Remember to drive with care at all times traction device is not covered under
regardless of the type of tires on your warranty.
vehicle.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-

(352,1)
8-12 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
Loading your vehicle WARNING CAUTION

S08AJ
. When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers
WARNING the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids
you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside
. Never allow passengers to ride the vehicle.
on a folded rear seatback in the thrown around inside the vehicle
cargo area. Doing so may result during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
in serious injury. NOTE
. Never stack luggage or other . Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry
cargo higher than the top of the roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo.
seatback because it could tumble cle’s center of gravity and make it
forward and injure passengers in more prone to tip over.
& Vehicle capacity weight
the event of a sudden stop or . Secure lengthy items properly to S08AJ01
accident. Keep luggage or cargo prevent them from shooting for-

low, as close to the floor as ward and causing serious injury
possible. during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.

(353,1)
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-13
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
hicle Weight Rating and weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to each
S08AJ02
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
Vehicle placard When possible, the load should be evenly
The load capacity of your vehicle is distributed throughout the vehicle.
determined by weight, not by available If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
cargo space. The maximum load you can Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and 8
carry in your vehicle is shown on the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s The certification label attached to the
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
side door pillar. It includes the total weight scale, found at a commercial weighing
of the driver and all passengers and their GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). station.
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
– CONTINUED –

(354,1)
8-14 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
& Roof rail does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). & Roof tent
S08AJ04 S08AJ14
Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the crossbars and any ap-
propriate carrying attachment
that may be needed. The roof
rails must never be used alone
to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-
mage to the roof or paint, or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
1) Crossbar
Cargo can be carried on the roof after NOTE WARNING
securing the crossbars to the roof rails and Remember that the vehicle’s center of
installing an appropriate carrying attach- gravity is altered with the weight of the Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof
ment. When installing crossbars and a load on the roof, thus affecting driving can adversely affect handling, brak-
carrying attachment, follow the manufac- characteristics. ing, and rollover resistance. The
turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard vehicle must never be driven with a
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind total roof rail load in excess of 176
and carrying attachment) of no more than effects will be increased. lbs (80 kg).
150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
CAUTION
CAUTION . The roof rail load limit for sta-
. When using a carrying attach- tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
ment, make sure that the total applies only when the vehicle is
carrying load of the cargo, cross- parked and the load is evenly
bars and carrying attachment distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and

(355,1)
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-15
roof tent are tightly secured to ! When the vehicle is parked on level
the vehicle. If these conditions ground
S08AJ1402
are not met, the load limit will be
lower.
. The maximum load limit of the
roof crossbars must be obtained
from the manufacturer or retailer
of the roof rack. When driving the
vehicle, the maximum roof rail
load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
crossbar load limit (whichever is
lower).
Roof tents may be used under certain

conditions at your own risk.
! When driving the vehicle
S08AJ1401 8
The total weight on the roof rails, including
the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not
exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176
lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg) A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent
– CONTINUED –

(356,1)
8-16 Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)
The total weight on the roof rails – Trailer hitch (dealer option) safety hazard.
including the roof crossbars, roof tent, S08AK . Although towing regulations for
and all occupants and contents in the roof trailer or caravan vehicles vary
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s WARNING by state/region, all regulations
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly agree that specifications such
distributed, or the load limit of the roof . Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer as the maximum gross trailer
crossbars, whichever is lower. weight must not exceed the les-
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
Load limit of the roof rail (A). weight could cause an accident ser of the following:
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg) resulting in serious personal in- – Maximum gross trailer weight
juries. Permissible trailer weight – Maximum gross tongue
Exceeding this load limit could cause
changes depending on the situa- weight
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
tion. For possible recommenda- – GVWR
The vehicle must never be driven with
tions and limitations, refer to
occupants in the roof tent. Before the – GAWR
“Trailer towing” F8-18.
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
. Trailer brakes are required when . Failure to comply with the proce-
must be removed from the roof tent and
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs dures set forth will not only
the roof rail load must be restored to within
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has compromise your safety, but will
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).
safety chains and that each chain also negate your insurance cov-
Refer to the user manual that accompa-
will hold the trailer’s maximum erage and/or may violate the state
nied the roof tent for important safety
gross weight. Towing trailers road and traffic acts and regula-
information and instructions on the proper
without safety chains could cre- tions.
installation and use of the tent.
ate a traffic safety hazard if the . Use only the ball mount supplied
trailer separates from the hitch with this hitch. Use the hitch only
due to coupling damage or hitch as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
ball damage. use with any type of weight dis-
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and tributing hitch.
safety pin for positive locking . The standard bumper beam must
placement before towing a trailer. be installed after you remove the
If the ball mount comes off the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
hitch receiver, the trailer could dealer for purchase of a standard
get loose and create a traffic bumper beam if you do not have

(357,1)
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option) 8-17
the original. & Connecting a trailer receiver tube.

S08AK01
. Safety performance is decreased 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
and there is increased risk of on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin
injury to passengers in the case passes through the ball mount.
of an accident if the trailer hitch 3. Insert the safety pin through the hole
or a standard bumper beam is not located on the hitch pin securely.
installed. One of them must al- 4. Check the ball mount assembly by
ways be installed on the vehicle. pulling on it to make sure it does not come
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is off the hitch receiver.
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Maximum gross trai- Maximum gross ton- 8
ler weight gue weight
200 lbs
1,500 lbs (680 kg) (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing” F8-18. 1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount and
1) Ball mount your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely
2) Hitch pin installed on the ball mount.
3) Safety pin 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
A) Hitch receiver tube 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
– CONTINUED –

(358,1)
8-18 Driving tips/Trailer towing
maximum gross weight. The chains should 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch Trailer towing
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent wire harness by individually activating the S08AL
the tongue from dropping onto the ground brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
in case it should disconnect from the hitch trailer.
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
taking tight turn situations into account; NOTE loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
however, be careful not to let them drag on
Always disconnect the trailer wire har- brakes, tires and suspension and has an
the ground.
ness before launching or retrieving a adverse effect on fuel economy.
WARNING watercraft. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
Do not connect safety chains to any & If not towing a trailer of correct equipment and cautious opera-
S08AK02
part of the vehicle other than the . Remove the ball mount from the hitch tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
safety chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
onto the hitch receiver tube. purchasing a hitch and other necessary
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin towing equipment appropriate for your
connector of the hitch wire harness to vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
protect against possible damage. other than genuine SUBARU towing
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
four-pin connector using terminal grease. the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
1) Hitch harness connector Regularly check that the hitch mounting
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.

(359,1)
Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-19
& Warranties and maintenance & Maximum load limits ! Total trailer weight
S08AL01 S08AL02 S08AL0201
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by WARNING
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will Never exceed the maximum load
be required due to the additional load. limits explained in the following.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under Exceeding the maximum load limits
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty could cause personal injury and/or
and Maintenance Booklet”.) vehicle damage.
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with CAUTION
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings, . Adequate size trailer brakes are
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of required when the trailer and its
driving. Total trailer weight
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight. The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
. Before towing a trailer, check the its cargo load) must never exceed the 8
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
and tongue load. Make sure the ing table.
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
– CONTINUED –

(360,1)
Crosstrek models ! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg) (GVWR)
S08AL0202
When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade 750 lbs (340 kg)
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

(361,1)
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and prevent a change in weight distribution

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) while driving.
S08AL0203
! Tongue load
S08AL0204
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification Gross Axle Weight
label located at the bottom of driver’s side The total weight applied to each axle Tongue load 8
door pillar of your vehicle. (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating does not exceed the maximum value of
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- 200 lbs (90 kg).
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
– CONTINUED –

(362,1)
This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer Hitches

S08AL03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
1) Jack F: Front cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
2) Bathroom scale ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
The tongue load can be weighed with a distribution of the load in the trailer. Never enter the passenger compartment
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration load the trailer with more weight in the through the drilled hole. Exhaust
above. When weighing the tongue load, be back than in the front; approximately 60 gas contains carbon monoxide, a
sure to position the towing coupler at the percent of the trailer load should be in the colorless and odorless gas which is
height at which it would be during actual front and approximately 40 percent in the dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
towing, using a jack as shown. rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as Also, drilling the frame or under-
possible on both the left and right sides. body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole.
while driving.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing

(363,1)
equipment. & Connecting a trailer ! Trailer safety chains

S08AL04 S08AL0402
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches ! Trailer brakes
as they can cause damage to the S08AL0401 WARNING
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
WARNING Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
. Adequate size trailer brakes are trailer without safety chains could
Do not use a trailer hitch other than required when the trailer and its
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine create a traffic safety hazard if the
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) trailer separates from the hitch due
SUBARU hitch is available from your total weight.
SUBARU dealer. to coupling damage or hitch ball
. Do not directly connect your damage.
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
& When you do not tow a trailer to the hydraulic brake system in
S08AL14 In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
your vehicle. Direct connection ball should break or become discon-
CAUTION would cause the vehicle’s brake nected, the trailer could get loose and
. The housing should be kept dirt performance to deteriorate and create a traffic safety hazard.
could lead to an accident. For safety, always connect the towing
and corrosion-free at the points 8
of contact. The surfaces only vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
require cleaning with a cloth. If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight chains. Two chains should be used in
Grease or other lubricants plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs total, one to the right side and the other to
should never be used. (453 kg), the trailer is required to be the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
equipped with its own brake system. crossing each other under the trailer
. If the ball is not installed, the Electric brakes or surge brakes are re- tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
plastic insert should then be commended, and must be installed prop- onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
inserted for protection and to erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con- should disconnect from the hitch ball.
prevent dirt. form with Federal, state/province and/or Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
other applicable regulations. Your tight turn situations into account; however,
When the ball is not used, place the ball SUBARU’s brake system is not designed be careful not to let them drag on the
cap and store securely. to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic ground.
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
– CONTINUED –

(364,1)
! Outside mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
S08AL0403
electrical system requires modifications to when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its road service representative or profes-
capacity and accommodate wiring sional to repair the flat tire.
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera- vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
each time you connect a trailer to your is firmly secured.
vehicle.
& Trailer towing tips
! Tires S08AL05
S08AL0405
CAUTION
WARNING
. For models equipped with the
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tempor- BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
check that the standard outside mirrors ary spare tire is used. The temporary RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
provide a good rearward field of view spare tire is not designed to sustain driving support systems, when
without significant blind spots. If significant the towing load. Use of the tempor- towing a trailer, press the BSD/
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- ary spare tire when towing can result RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors in failure of the spare tire and/or less the system. The system may not
that conform with Federal, state/province stability of the vehicle. operate properly due to the
and/or other applicable regulations. blocked radar waves. For details
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
S08AL0404 refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
8. F7-59.
CAUTION
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . For models equipped with the
Direct splicing or other improper proper inflation pressure should be in RAB (Reverse Automatic Brak-
connection of trailer lights may accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s ing) system:
damage your vehicle’s electrical specifications. Also check federal, state, we recommend that you consult
system and cause a malfunction of province and/or other applicable regula- your SUBARU dealer to deacti-
your vehicle’s lighting system. tions. vate the system when towing a

(365,1)
trailer. hitch mounting are in good condition. If any before starting out on a trip. In an area free
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) problems are apparent, do not tow the of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
when towing a trailer in hilly trailer. backing up.
country on hot days. . Check that the vehicle rests horizon- ! Driving with a trailer
tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle S08AL0502
. When towing a trailer, steering, . You should allow for considerably more
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
stability, stopping distance and stopping distance when towing a trailer.
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
braking performance will be dif- Avoid sudden braking because it may
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
ferent when compared to normal result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
confirm that the load and its distribution are
operation. For safety’s sake, you of control.
acceptable.
should employ extra caution . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
when towing a trailer and you . Check that the tire rating and pressures
erations. If your vehicle has a manual
should never drive at excessive are correct.
transmission, always start out in first gear
speeds. You should also keep the . Check that the vehicle and trailer are and release the clutch at moderate engine
following tips in mind: connected properly. Confirm that: revolution.
. The braking power of the parking – the trailer tongue is connected . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
brake may not be sufficient when properly to the hitch ball. rapid lane changes.
stronger braking power is – the trailer lights connector is con-
. Slow down before turning. Make a
8
needed (e.g., when parking on a nected properly and trailer’s brake
longer than normal turning radius because
steep slope while towing a trai- lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
ler). brake pedal is pressed, and that the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
! Before starting out on a trip ated. . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
S08AL0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– the safety chains are connected
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/ ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
properly.
region. Failure to comply with the proce- weather conditions or the passing of large
– all cargo in the trailer is secured trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
dures set forth will not only compromise safely in position.
your safety, but will also negate your grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
– the outside mirrors provide a good decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
insurance coverage and/or may violate rearward field of view without a sig-
the state road and traffic acts and regula- pace.
nificant blind spot.
tions. . When passing other vehicles, consider-
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn able distance is required because of the
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
– CONTINUED –

(366,1)
added weight and length caused by To reverse around a corner, perform the : Coolant temperature high warning light
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. following procedure.
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can 1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo- (CVT models)
be difficult and requires experience. Never site direction to the way you want to turn.
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the 2. Once the trailer begins to swing If the coolant temperature high warning
bottom of the steering wheel with one around, straighten the steering wheel. light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
hand. 3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc- illuminates, immediately turn off the air
tion. conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line nearest safe location. For further instruc-
with the trailer, then straighten the steering tions and additional information, refer to
again. the following sections.
– “If you park your vehicle in case of
. If the ABS warning light illuminates an emergency” F9-2
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing – “Engine overheating” F9-12
the trailer and have repairs performed – “Coolant temperature low indicator
immediately by your nearest SUBARU light/Coolant temperature high warn-
dealer. ing light” F3-16
! Driving on grades – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
S08AL0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow models)” F3-18
down and shift into lower gear (if neces- . For CVT models, avoid using the
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
engine braking effect and prevent over- uphill slope instead of using the parking
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not brake or foot brake. That may cause the
make sudden downshifts. transmission fluid to overheat.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.

(367,1)
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
8
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” position (CVT models)
and shut off the engine.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(369,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an If no steam is coming from the engine
S09
emergency ............................................................ 9-2 compartment ..................................................... 9-12
Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2 Towing ................................................................... 9-13
Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............... 9-13
Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3
Using a flat-bed truck ........................................... 9-16
Tool locations ........................................................ 9-3
Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-16
Using the jack........................................................ 9-4
Flat tires................................................................... 9-5 Access key fob – if access key fob does not
operate properly ................................................ 9-17
Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5
Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) .............................................. 9-8 Switching power status ........................................ 9-18
Starting engine ..................................................... 9-18
Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
How to jump start ................................................. 9-10 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
opened................................................................ 9-19
Engine overheating............................................... 9-12
If steam is coming from the engine Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
compartment ...................................................... 9-12 does not close ................................................... 9-20
If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-20

(370,1)
9-2 In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, S09AB
S09AA the turn signals do not work. WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
The hazard warning flasher should be original pressure sensor/trans-
used in day or night to warn other drivers mitter being transferred, the low
when you have to park your vehicle under tire pressure warning light will
emergency conditions. illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- able to monitor all four road
vated regardless of the ignition switch wheels. Contact your SUBARU
position. dealer as soon as possible for
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the tire and sensor replacement and/
hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off or system resetting.
by pushing the switch again.

(371,1)
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-3
CAUTION . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire Maintenance tools

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance S09AH
Never use any temporary spare tire is reduced.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
other than the original. Using other maintenance tools.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your . Jack
vehicle. . Jack handle
. Screwdriver
The temporary spare tire is smaller and . Towing hook (eye bolt)
lighter than a conventional tire and is
. Wheel nut wrench
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as & Tool locations
possible because the spare tire is de- S09AH15
signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
porary spare tire periodically to keep the 2) Indicator location mark
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2). . When the wear indicator appears on 9
the tread, replace the tire.
When using the temporary spare tire, note . The temporary spare tire must be used
the following. only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
. Drive with caution when the temporary gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
spare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel- rear wheel and install the temporary spare
eration and braking, or fast cornering, as tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
control of the vehicle may be lost.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 1) Jack handle
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
– CONTINUED –

(372,1)
9-4 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
A jack handle is stored under the cargo & Using the jack
area. A jack and a towing hook are stored S09AH14
in the tool bucket that is located in the 1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
recess of the spare tire wheel. ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
Also, a tool bag that contains a wheel nut shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
wrench and a screwdriver is equipped with or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
the vehicle. Open the tool bag and store (CVT models).
the tools in the tool bucket as illustrated in 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
order that all tools are ready for use at any have everyone get out of the vehicle.
time.
1) Tool bucket
2) Spare tire
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the tire that
you are going to replace.
5. Take out the jack and jack handle.
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

(373,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-5
Flat tires
S09AC
If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire

S09AC01
WARNING
Jack-up points . Use only the jack provided with

7. Insert the jack handle into the jack- your vehicle. The jack supplied
6. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire with the vehicle is designed only
front or rear jack-up point closest to the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle for changing a tire. Never get
that you are going to replace. higher than necessary. under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an 9
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out of
the jacking point due to a jolt and
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
this can result in a severe acci-
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
– CONTINUED –

(374,1)
9-6 In case of emergency/Flat tires
dent. NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
cated before using it.
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
(CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
have everyone get out of the vehicle.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear “Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. strictly follow the instructions.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored Jack-up points
under the cargo area. Refer to “Mainte-
nance tools” F9-3. 8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.

(375,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-7
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
tire.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean illustration.
screw, and turn the handle until the tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle with a cloth. to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on
higher than necessary. 12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
– CONTINUED –

(376,1)
9-8 In case of emergency/Flat tires
on the wrench because you may exceed WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system will
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut activate only when the vehicle is driven.
torque checked at the nearest automotive Never place a tire or tire changing Also, this system may not react immedi-
service facility. tools in the passenger compartment ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
after changing wheels. In a sudden example, a blow-out caused running over
stop or collision, loose equipment a sharp object).
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in WARNING
the proper place.
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
& Tire pressure monitoring never brake suddenly. Instead,
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. perform the following procedure.
models) (1) Keep driving straight ahead
S09AC02
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
1) Support holder safe place. Otherwise an acci-
dent involving serious vehicle
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
damage and serious personal
compartment. Install with the support
injury could occur.
holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt. (3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
NOTE to the COLD tire pressure
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try shown on the vehicle placard
turning the support holder upside on the door pillar on the
down. driver’s side.
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel If this light still illuminates while
vides the driver with the warning message
nut wrench in their storage locations. driving after adjusting the tire
indicated by sending a signal from a
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
cant damage and a fast leak that
tire pressure is severely low.
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

(377,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-9
If you have a flat tire, replace it one minute, promptly contact a Jump starting
with a spare tire as soon as SUBARU dealer to have the sys- S09AD
possible. tem inspected.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a WARNING
wheel rim is replaced without the . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
original pressure sensor/trans- Do not let it come in contact with
mitter being transferred, the low the eyes, skin, clothing or the
tire pressure warning light will vehicle.
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute. If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
This indicates the TPMS is unable oughly flush the exposed area
to monitor all four road wheels. with water immediately. Get med-
Contact your SUBARU dealer as ical help if the fluid has entered
soon as possible for tire and your eyes.
sensor replacement and/or sys- If battery fluid is accidentally
tem resetting. swallowed, immediately drink a
. When a tire is repaired with liquid large amount of milk or water,
sealant, the tire pressure warning and obtain immediate medical
valve and transmitter may not help. 9
operate properly. If a liquid sea- Keep everyone including chil-
lant is used, contact your nearest dren away from the battery.
SUBARU dealer or other qualified . The gas generated by a battery
service shop as soon as possi- explodes if a flame or spark is
ble. Make sure to replace the tire brought near it. Do not smoke or
pressure warning valve and light a match while jump starting.
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if . Never attempt jump starting if the
there is no damage to it and if the discharged battery is frozen. It
sealant residue is properly could cause the battery to burst
cleaned off. or explode.
If the light illuminates steadily . Whenever working on or around a
after blinking for approximately battery, always wear suitable eye
– CONTINUED –

(378,1)
9-10 In case of emergency/Jump starting
protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start

S09AD01
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
. A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.

(379,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative (−) terminal of the
booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery. 9
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

(380,1)
9-12 In case of emergency/Engine overheating
Engine overheating & If no steam is coming from the If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
S09AE engine compartment radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
S09AE02 radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
WARNING 1. Keep the engine running at idling clockwise slowly without pressing down
speed. until it stops. Release the pressure from
Never attempt to remove the radiator 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the the radiator. After the pressure has been
cap until the engine has been shut engine compartment. Refer to “Engine fully released, remove the cap by pressing
off and has fully cooled down. When hood” F11-5. down and turning it.
the engine is hot, the coolant is Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
under pressure. Removing the cap the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
while the engine is still hot could the engine and contact an authorized
release a spray of boiling hot cool- SUBARU dealer for repair.
ant, which could burn you very 3. After the coolant temperature high
seriously. warning light that has blinked or illumi-
nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the For details about the warning light, refer to
road and stop the vehicle in a safe “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
location. Coolant temperature high warning light”
F3-16.
& If steam is coming from the 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
engine compartment check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
“OFF” position and get everyone away mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
from the vehicle until it cools down. NOTE
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- For details about how to check the
er. coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.

(381,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-13
Towing & Towing hooks and tie-down with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
S09AF hooks/holes scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
S09AF01 screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and
If towing is necessary, it is best done by The towing hook should be used only in an pry open the cover.
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial emergency.
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
Use only the specified towing hooks
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
! Front towing hook

S09AF0112
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
out of the cargo area. 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. 9
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
– CONTINUED –

(382,1)
9-14 In case of emergency/Towing
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using ! Rear towing hook

the jack handle. S09AF0105
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
After towing, remove the towing hook from out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. out of the cargo area.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop- 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
er operation of the SRS airbag hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
system in a frontal collision.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

CAUTION with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on
To prevent deformation to the bum-
the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and
per and the towing hook, do not
you will find a threaded hole for attaching
apply excessive load to the towing
the towing hook.
hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from

(383,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-15
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. ! Front tie-down hooks ! Rear tie-down holes
S09AF0106 S09AF0107
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
CAUTION front bumper.
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not 9
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
– CONTINUED –

(384,1)
9-16 In case of emergency/Towing
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. & Towing with all wheels on the
return the plugs to their original places. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier ground
properly with safety chains. Each safety S09AF03
WARNING chain should be equally tightened and care

must be taken not to pull the chains so
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out CAUTION
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation. If your vehicle has a bumper under
guard (optional), be careful not to
scrape it when placing the vehicle
& Using a flat-bed truck on the carrier and when removing
S09AF02
the vehicle from the carrier.
1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in the neutral position (CVT
and MT).
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to . Never turn the ignition switch to
ensure safe transportation. the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” the vehicle is being towed be-
position for CVT models. Shift the shift cause the steering wheel and the
lever into the “1st” position for MT models. direction of the wheels will be

(385,1)
In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 9-17
locked. Access key fob – if access key & Locking and unlocking
S09AP01
. Remember that the brake booster fob does not operate properly
and power steering do not func- S09AP
tion when the engine is not run-
ning. Because the engine is CAUTION
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal Keep metallic objects, magnetic
and steering wheel. sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
CAUTION ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
. If transmission failure occurs, the access key fob and the push-
transport your vehicle on a flat- button ignition switch.
bed truck. 1) Release button
. For CVT models, the traveling The following functions may be inoperable 2) Emergency key
speed must be limited to less because of strong radio signals in the
While pressing the release button of the
than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the surrounding area or a low battery condition
access key fob, take out the emergency
traveling distance to less than 31 of the access key fob.
miles (50 km). For greater speeds
key. 9
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the
and distances, transport your Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
rear gate)
vehicle on a flat-bed truck. emergency key in the procedure described
. Switching power status in “Locking and unlocking from the out-
. Starting engine side” F2-21.
In such cases, perform the following NOTE
procedure. When the battery of the access After locking or unlocking, be sure to
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new attach the emergency key back to the
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access access key fob.
key fob” F11-44.
– CONTINUED –

(386,1)
9-18 In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
& Switching power status . When the keyless access with push- & Starting engine
S09AP02 button start system is deactivated: S09AP03
1. Apply the parking brake. “ACC” 1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT . Under other conditions: “ON” 2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT
models) or the select lever to the “P” models) or the select lever to the “P”
5. When the keyless access with push-
(Park) position (CVT models). (Park) position (CVT models).
button start system is deactivated, press
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models) the push-button ignition switch with the 3. Depress the brake pedal.
or the brake pedal (CVT models). clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake 4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
pedal (CVT models) released. The status
of the push-button ignition switch then
changes to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
4. Hold the access key fob with the 5. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push- buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it. button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com- access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the status of the push-button same time, the push-button ignition switch
ignition switch changes to either of the turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
following. 6. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal (all models)

(387,1)
In case of emergency/Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened 9-19
and the clutch pedal (MT models), press Rear gate – if the rear gate CAUTION
the push-button ignition switch.
cannot be opened
S09AG
Never operate the rear gate open
NOTE lever with fingers because doing so
In the event that you cannot open the rear may cause an injury. Always use a
If the engine does not start even though gate by operating the rear gate opener
the above procedure was followed flat-head screwdriver or a similar
button, you can open it from inside the tool.
precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer. cargo area.
9
1. Remove the access cover at the 3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using the right position using a flat-head screw-
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl driver or a similar tool.
tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.

(388,1)
9-20 In case of emergency/Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close
Moonroof (if equipped) – if the If your vehicle is involved in Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
moonroof does not close an accident
S09AJ S09AR
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle is involved in an Models with “keyless access with
accident, be sure to inspect the push-button start system”:
ground under the vehicle before 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
restarting the engine. If you find that the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
fuel has leaked on the ground, do 2. Restart the engine.
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage. However,
depending on the impact conditions at the
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off
system may not operate.
Perform the following procedures to restart
the engine after the system is activated.

(391,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5
S10
Washing ............................................................... 10-2 Seat fabric ............................................................ 10-5
Waxing and polishing............................................ 10-3 Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-6
Cleaning alloy wheels ........................................... 10-4 Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-6
Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4 Seatbelt ................................................................ 10-6
Most common causes of corrosion ....................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-5 panel, console panel, and switches.................... 10-6
Monitor................................................................. 10-7
10

(392,1)
10-2 Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care the cover surface may be da- to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
S10AA maged. washing brush directly on the camera
& Washing . Since your vehicle is equipped lens. The image quality of the rear view
S10AA01
with a rear wiper, automatic car- camera may deteriorate.
CAUTION wash brushes could become The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
tangled around it, damaging the beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
. When washing the vehicle, the wiper arm and other compo- vehicle at least once a month to avoid
brakes may get wet. As a result, nents. Ask the automatic car- contamination by road grime.
the brake stopping distance will wash operator not to let the
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive brushes touch the wiper arm or Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
the vehicle at a safe speed while to fix the wiper arm on the rear of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
lightly depressing the brake ped- window glass with adhesive tape vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
al to heat up the brakes. before operating the machine. light.
. Do not wash the engine compart- . For models with a rod-type roof Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
ment and area adjacent to it. If antenna, remove the antenna rod and bird droppings should be washed off
water enters the engine air intake before washing your car at a car by using a light detergent, as required. If
or electrical parts, it will cause wash. If the antenna rod remains you use a light detergent, make certain
engine trouble or a malfunction attached, it may scratch the roof. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
of electrical equipment. When reinstalling the removed strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. When washing inner fenders, un- antenna rod, be sure to fully cleaning agents should be promptly
derbody, bumpers and protrud- tighten it. flushed from the surface and not allowed
ing objects such as exhaust to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
pipes and exhaust finishers, be with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
careful to prevent injuries from NOTE remaining water off with a chamois or soft
contacting sharp ends. . When having your vehicle washed in cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
an automatic car wash, make sure brush when washing down underbody,
. Do not use any organic solvents
beforehand that the car wash is of inner fenders and suspension to effec-
when washing the surface of the
suitable type. tively remove mud and dirt off.
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents . The rear view camera lens has a hard
is used to wash the cover sur- coating to help prevent scratches.
face, completely rinse off the However, when washing the vehicle or
detergent with water. Otherwise, cleaning the camera lens, be careful not

(393,1)
Appearance care/Exterior care 10-3
! Washing the underbody CAUTION & Waxing and polishing

S10AA0101 S10AA02
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for Always wash and dry the vehicle before
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor- . Be careful not to damage brake waxing and polishing.
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un- hoses, sensor harnesses, and Use a good quality polish and wax and
derbody components, such as the exhaust other parts when washing sus- apply them according to the manufac-
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, pension components. turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
floor pan and fenders, and suspension. . Be careful not to flush the engine the painted surface is cool.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside bottom for a long time. It may
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water cause damage of some electrical Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful parts. as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
effects of such agents. wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody ! Using a warm water washer deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
S10AA0102
components may accelerate their corro- . Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) mended that a coat of wax be applied at
sion. or more between the washer nozzle and least once a month, or whenever the
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy the vehicle. surface no longer repels water.
roads, wash the mud and sand off the . Do not wash the same area continu-
ously. If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
underbody. Carefully flush the suspension
ished to the point where the luster or tone
and axle parts, as they are particularly . If a stain will not come out easily, wash cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use by hand. Some warm water washers are of face with a fine-grained compound. Never
a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. the high temperature, high pressure type, polish just the affected area, but include 10
and they can damage or deform the resin the surrounding area as well. Always
parts such as moldings, or cause water to polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
leak into the vehicle. grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
– CONTINUED –

(394,1)
10-4 Appearance care/Corrosion protection
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to & Cleaning alloy wheels Corrosion protection
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto S10AA04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of S10AB
paint specialist. any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on Your SUBARU has been designed and
too long, it may be difficult to clean off. built to resist corrosion. Special materials
CAUTION
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean and protective finishes have been used on
Do not use any agents with organic the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
solvents on the surface of the bulb cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly fine appearance, strength, and reliable
assembly cover. However, if a polish with water. Do not clean the wheels with a operation.
or wax with organic solvents is stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
applied to the cover surface, com- washing device. & Most common causes of cor-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax. . Clean the vehicle (including the alloy rosion
S10AB01
Otherwise, the cover surface may be wheels) with water as soon as possible The most common causes of corrosion
damaged. when it has been splashed with sea water, are:
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
roads treated with salt or other agents.
NOTE dirt and debris in body panel sections,
. Be careful not to block the wind- cavities, and other areas.
shield washer nozzles with wax when . Damage to paint and other protective
waxing the vehicle. coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
. Do not wipe the rear view camera or minor accidents.
with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To when:
remove contamination, wipe the cam-
era with a cloth moistened with diluted . It is exposed to road salt or dust control
neutral detergent and then wipe it with a chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
soft, dry cloth. there is more salt in the air, or in areas
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful where there is considerable industrial
not to apply the wax to the rear view pollution.
camera. If it comes in contact with the . It is driven in areas of high humidity,
camera, moisten a clean cloth with especially when temperatures range just
diluted neutral detergent to remove above freezing.
the wax. . Dampness in certain parts of the

(395,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-5
vehicle remains for a long time, even assistance. Cleaning the interior
though other parts of the vehicle may be S10AC
dry. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them. Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
. High temperatures will cause corrosion control panel, audio equipment, instru-
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry Check the interior of the vehicle for water ment panel, center console, combination
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
because that could cause corrosion. Oc- organic solvents.)
& To help prevent corrosion casionally check under the mats to make
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent sure the area is dry. CAUTION
corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar- Do not use sharp instruments or
promptly after driving on any of the age. In such a garage, corrosion can be window cleaner containing abra-
following surfaces. caused by dampness. If you wash the sives to clean the inner surface of
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the rear window. They may damage
. roads that have been salted to prevent
the garage when wet or covered with the conductors printed on the win-
them from freezing in winter
snow, that can cause dampness. dow.
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other & Seat fabric
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door S10AC01
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
very thorough washing. latch should be inspected and lubricated vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum 10
Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
condition of underbody components, such Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
them are found to be rusted, they should thoroughly.
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact If the stain does not come out, try a
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind commercially-available fabric cleaner.
of maintenance and treatment if you need Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –

(396,1)
10-6 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
make sure it does not affect the fabric covered, or the windows shaded, to pre- & Seatbelt
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its vent fading or shrinkage. S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
instructions. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” F1-20.
may be treated with a commercial leather
CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each & Climate control panel, audio
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
panel, instrument panel, con-
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
genuine leather. sole panel, and switches
materials. Doing so could damage S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
the surface and cause the color to control panel, audio equipment, instru-
deteriorate. & Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03 ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum- CAUTION
S10AC02 ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such
quality natural product which will retain its
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or
distinctive appearance and feel for many
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con-
years with proper care.
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary. could damage the surface and
surface can cause the material to become
cause the color to deteriorate.
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber . Do not use chemical solvents that
cloth should be performed monthly, taking Strong cleaning agents such as contain silicone on the vehicle
care not to soak the leather or allow water solvents, paint thinners, window audio system, electrical compo-
to penetrate the stitched seams. cleaner or fuel must never be used nents of the air-conditioner or
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres
woolen fabrics may be used to remove terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If deteriorate. nents.
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be

(397,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-7
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the 10
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(399,1)
Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule.......................................... 11-3 Continuously variable transmission fluid..........11-15
S11
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 11-3 Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
Before checking or servicing in the engine rear differential gear oil....................................11-15
compartment ...................................................... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 11-15
When checking or servicing in the engine Brake fluid............................................................11-15
compartment ...................................................... 11-4 Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-15
When checking or servicing in the engine Recommended brake fluid .................................. 11-16
compartment while the engine is running ............ 11-5 Clutch fluid (MT models).....................................11-16
Engine hood .......................................................... 11-5 Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-16
Engine compartment overview ............................ 11-7 Recommended clutch fluid ................................. 11-17
Engine oil............................................................... 11-8 Brake booster ......................................................11-17
Engine oil consumption ........................................ 11-8 Brake pedal ..........................................................11-18
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap Checking the brake pedal free play ..................... 11-18
and oil filter ........................................................ 11-8
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-18
Checking the oil level............................................ 11-8
Changing the oil and oil filter ................................ 11-9
Clutch pedal (MT models)...................................11-18
Checking the clutch function .............................. 11-18
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-10
Checking the clutch pedal free play .................... 11-19
Synthetic oil........................................................ 11-10
Cooling system ................................................... 11-10 Hill start assist system .......................................11-19
Safety precautions .............................................. 11-10 Replacement of brake pad and lining ................11-19
Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 11-11 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings.......... 11-20
Engine coolant.................................................... 11-11 Parking brake stroke ...........................................11-20
Air cleaner element............................................. 11-12 Tires and wheels .................................................11-21 11
Replacing the air cleaner element........................ 11-13 Types of tires ..................................................... 11-21
Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-14 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .................................................... 11-21
Recommended spark plugs ................................. 11-14
Tire inspection.................................................... 11-22
Drive belts ........................................................... 11-14 Tire pressures and wear ..................................... 11-23
Manual transmission oil ..................................... 11-14 Wheel balance .................................................... 11-25
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-14 Wear indicators .................................................. 11-25

(400,1)
Maintenance and service
Rotational direction of tires ................................. 11-26 Replacing bulbs...................................................11-37

Tire rotation ........................................................ 11-26 Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-37
Tire replacement ................................................. 11-27 Headlights (models with halogen headlights) ...... 11-38
Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-28 Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-39
Alloy wheels ........................................................ 11-28 Parking light ....................................................... 11-39
Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 11-29 Front fog light (if equipped) ................................ 11-39
Adding the windshield washer fluid..................... 11-29 Rear combination lights...................................... 11-39
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... 11-29 Backup light ....................................................... 11-41
Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-30 License plate light .............................................. 11-42
Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-30 Map light ............................................................ 11-42
Window wiper blade rubber................................. 11-31 Vanity mirror light (if equipped)........................... 11-42
Rear window wiper blade assembly..................... 11-32 Dome light and cargo area light .......................... 11-42
Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-33 Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-43
Battery ................................................................. 11-34 Replacing key battery .........................................11-43
Fuses ................................................................... 11-35 Safety precautions.............................................. 11-43
Installation of accessories ................................. 11-37 Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-44
Replacing transmitter battery .............................. 11-45

(401,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions may result to persons not experi-

S11AA S11AB enced in servicing vehicles.
U.S. models When maintenance and service are re- . Always use the proper tools and
The scheduled maintenance items required, it is recommended that all work be make certain that they are well
quired to be serviced at regular intervals done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. maintained.
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte- If you perform maintenance and service by . Never get under the vehicle sup-
nance Booklet”. For details, read the yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use
separate “Warranty and Maintenance with the information provided in this sec- safety stands to support the
Booklet”. tion on general maintenance and service vehicle.
Canada models for your SUBARU. . Never keep the engine running in
The scheduled maintenance items re- a poorly ventilated area, such as
Incorrect or incomplete service could a garage or other closed areas.
quired to be serviced at regular intervals cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
are shown in the “Warranty and Service tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open
Booklet”. For details, read the separate maintenance and service performed by flames around the fuel or battery.
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. you are not eligible for warranty coverage. This will cause a fire.
Except for U.S. and Canada models . Because the fuel system is under
WARNING pressure, replacement of the fuel
Some items of your vehicle are required to filter should be performed only
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For . Always select a safe area when by your SUBARU dealer.
details about your maintenance schedule, performing maintenance on your
read the separate “Warranty and Main- . Wear adequate eye protection to
vehicle. guard against getting oil or fluids
tenance Booklet”.
. Always be very careful to avoid in your eyes. If something does
NOTE injury when working on the vehi- get in your eyes, thoroughly 11
For models with a multi-function dis- cle. Remember that some of the wash them out with clean water.
play (color LCD), you can set a remin- materials in the vehicle may be . Do not tamper with the wiring of
der to be displayed when a scheduled hazardous if improperly used or the SRS airbag system or seat-
maintenance item is almost due. For handled, for example, battery belt pretensioner system, or at-
details, refer to “Maintenance settings” acid. tempt to take its connectors
F3-58. . Your vehicle should only be ser- apart, as that may activate the
viced by persons fully competent system or it can render it inop-
to do so. Serious personal injury
– CONTINUED –

(402,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes- when the engine is running and remote engine start system (a
ter for this wiring. If your SRS remain hot for some time after the dealer option), temporarily place
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner engine has stopped. the remote engine start system in
needs service, consult your near- . Do not spill engine oil, engine service mode to prevent it from
est SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other unexpectedly starting the engine.
fluid on hot engine components.
NOTE This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
& When checking or servicing
SUBARU does not endorse the use of in the engine compartment
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- “ON” position, the cooling fan S11AB03
tems and strongly advises against may operate suddenly even when
performing these services on a the engine is stopped. If your
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap- body or clothes come into con-
proved flushing systems use chemi- tact with a rotating fan, that could
cals and/or solvents which have not result in serious injury. To avoid
been tested or approved by SUBARU. risk of injury, perform the follow-
SUBARU warranties do not cover any ing precautions.
part of the vehicle which is damaged by – Models with push-button start
adding or applying chemicals and/or system:
solvents other than those approved or Always turn the push-button
recommended by SUBARU. ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
& Before checking or servicing operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
in the engine compartment the access key fob out from CAUTION
S11AB01
the vehicle. . Do not contact the drive belt
WARNING
– Models without push-button cover while checking the compo-
. Always stop the engine and apply start system: nents in the engine compartment.
the parking brake firmly to pre- Always remove the key from Doing so may cause your hand to
vent the vehicle from moving. the ignition switch. slip off the cover and result in an
. Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing unexpected injury.
Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a . Do not touch the oil filter until the

(403,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-5
engine has cooled down comple- Engine hood To open the hood:
tely. Doing so may result in a burn S11AC 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
or other injury. Note that the oil windshield, return them to their original
filter becomes very hot when the CAUTION position.
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine . When you open the engine hood,
has stopped. do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
& When checking or servicing shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
in the engine compartment hood and wiper blades.
while the engine is running
S11AB02 . Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
WARNING
closing the engine hood.
A running engine can be dangerous. . Do not push the hood forcibly to
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, close it. It could deform the metal.
hair and tools away from the cooling . Be extremely careful opening the 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
fan, drive belt and any other moving engine hood when the wind is instrument panel.
engine parts. Removing rings, strong. The engine hood could
watches and ties is advisable. close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
11
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
– CONTINUED –

(404,1)
11-6 Maintenance and service/Engine hood
3. Release the secondary hood release WARNING

by moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left. Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

(405,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-7

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine compartment overview (MT models) (page 11-15)
S11AD 2) Fuse box (page 11-35)
3) Battery (page 11-34)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-29)
5) Radiator cap (page 11-11)
6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-9)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-12)
11

(406,1)
11-8 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil break-in period & Locations of the oil level

S11AE . When the engine oil is of lower quality gauge, oil filler cap and oil
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used filter
CAUTION . When engine braking is employed S11AE06
. If the level gauge cannot be (repeatedly)

pulled out easily, twist the level . When the engine is operated at high
gauge right and left, then gently engine speeds (for extended periods of
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be time)
injured accidentally straining . When the engine is operated under
yourself. heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. Use only engine oil with the . When towing a trailer
recommended grade and vis- . When the engine idles for extended
cosity. periods of time
. Be careful not to spill engine oil . When the vehicle is operated in stop
when adding it. If oil touches the and go and/or heavy traffic situations
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad . When the vehicle is used under severe 1) Oil level gauge
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If thermal conditions 2) Oil filler cap
engine oil gets on the exhaust . When the vehicle accelerates and 3) Oil filter
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you & Checking the oil level
S11AE01
& Engine oil consumption should check your oil at least every 2nd 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
S11AE07 fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
Some engine oil will be consumed while
frequently. Different drivers in the same “OFF” position. If you check the oil level
driving. The rate of consumption can be
car may experience different results. If just after turning the ignition switch to the
affected by such factors as transmission
your oil consumption rate is greater than “LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait a few minutes
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
expected, contact your authorized for the oil to drain back into the oil pan
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test before checking the level.
consumption can be increased and thus
under controlled conditions.
require refilling between maintenance in-
tervals:
. When the engine is new and within the

(407,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-9
CAUTION judged by the lowest of the two levels. If . The engine low oil level warning light
the oil level is below the low level mark, may stay illuminated when the engine
If the level gauge cannot be pulled add oil so that the full level is reached. is started straight after topping up or
out easily, twist the level gauge right changing the engine oil. In such cases,
and left, then gently pull it out. park the vehicle on a level surface and
CAUTION wait for more than a minute until the oil
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. . Be careful not to touch the engine level settles, after which the warning
oil filter when removing the oil light will turn off. Refer to “Engine low
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, filler cap. Doing so may result in a oil level warning light” F3-18.
and insert it again. burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly S11AE02
inserted until it stops. . Use only engine oil with the Change the oil and oil filter according to
recommended grade and vis- the maintenance schedule in the “War-
cosity. ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
. Be careful not to spill engine oil changed more frequently than listed in
when adding it. If oil touches the the maintenance schedule when driving
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad on dusty roads, when short trips are
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If frequently made, or when driving in ex-
engine oil gets on the exhaust tremely cold weather.
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
NOTE
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil . Changing the engine oil and oil filter
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
should be performed by a well-trained 11
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
into the engine, you must use the level for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
1) Full level gauge to confirm that the oil level is
2) Low level Fully trained mechanics are on standby
correct. at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level NOTE special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. . To prevent overfilling the engine oil, oils are properly disposed of.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the do not add any additional oil above the . If performing oil replacement your-
level gauge. The engine oil level must be upper level when the engine is cold.
– CONTINUED –

(408,1)
11-10 Maintenance and service/Cooling system
self, observe the local regulations and Cooling system

dispose of waste oil properly.
NOTE
S11AF
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
S11AF04
& Recommended grade and mended engine oil for optimum engine
viscosity performance. Conventional oil may be WARNING
S11AE03
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. Never attempt to remove the radiator
CAUTION cap until the engine has been shut
Use only engine oil with the recom- off and has cooled down completely.
mended grade and viscosity. Since the coolant is under pressure,
you may suffer serious burns from a
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity CAUTION
provide better fuel economy. However, . Vehicles are filled at the factory
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is with SUBARU Super Coolant that
required to properly lubricate the en- does not require the first change
gine. for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
& Synthetic oil should not be mixed with any
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that other brand or type of coolant
meets the same requirements given for during this period. Mixing with a
conventional engine oil. When using syn- different coolant will reduce the
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same life of the coolant. Should it be
classification, viscosity and grade shown necessary to top up the coolant
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine for any reason, use only SUBARU
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil Super Coolant.
and filter changing intervals shown in the If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
Warranty and Maintenance booklet. diluted with another brand or

(409,1)
Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-11
type, the maintenance interval is system. It is recommended that the cooling

shortened to that of the mixing system and connections be checked for
coolant. leaks, damage, or looseness.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol & Engine coolant
S11AF02
contained in the engine coolant ! Checking the coolant level
may damage the paint surface. S11AF0201
WARNING
& Cooling fan, hose and con- Never attempt to remove the radiator
nections cap until the engine has been shut
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling off and has cooled down completely.
fan which is thermostatically controlled to Since the coolant is under pressure, 1) “FULL” level mark
operate when the engine coolant reaches you may suffer serious burns from a 2) “LOW” level mark
a specific temperature. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed. Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
even when the coolant temperature high of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica- “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
light” F3-16. coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration. 11
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-35 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
12.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,
there may be a leak in the engine cooling
– CONTINUED –

(410,1)
11-12 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
CAUTION Air cleaner element

S11AG
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant WARNING
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Do not operate the engine with the
a fire. If engine coolant gets on air cleaner element removed. The air
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe cleaner element not only filters in-
it off. take air but also stops flames if the
. Do not splash the engine coolant engine backfires. If the air cleaner
over painted parts. The alcohol element is not installed when the
contained in the engine coolant engine backfires, you could be
may damage the paint surface. burned.
1) Fill up to this level
! Changing the coolant CAUTION

S11AF0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
Have the coolant changed by your ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
SUBARU dealer if necessary. cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
The coolant should be changed according
negative effect to the engine.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the element is perforated or
removed, engine wear will be excessive
and engine life shortened.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that cleaner element.
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.

(411,1)
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element 11-13
& Replacing the air cleaner ele- cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
ment cleaner case (front).
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under NOTE
extremely dusty conditions, replace it Install the air cleaner element so that
more frequently. It is recommended that the surface with “UPR” printed on it
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. faces upward.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1) Clip
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air 11

cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

(412,1)
11-14 Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
Spark plugs Drive belts Manual transmission oil

S11AH S11AI S11AJ
It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
plugs. It is recommended that you have the the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed accord-
the belt should be done according to the ing to the maintenance schedule in the
The spark plugs should be replaced maintenance schedule in the “Warranty “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
according to the maintenance schedule and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and
CAUTION contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
S11AJ02
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
Make sure the cables are replaced in oils and additives. Never use different
the correct order. brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” F12-8.

(413,1)
Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid 11-15
Continuously variable trans- Front differential gear oil Brake fluid

mission fluid (CVT models) and rear differ- S11AO
S11AY ential gear oil & Checking the fluid level

S11AO01
It is not necessary to check the transmis- S11BL
sion fluid level. Check that there are no WARNING

It is not necessary to check the gear oil
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the level. Check that there are no cracks, . Never let brake fluid contact your
fluid inspection should be performed ac- damage or leakage. However, the oil eyes because brake fluid can be
cording to the maintenance schedule in inspection should be performed according harmful to your eyes. If brake
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. to the maintenance schedule in the “War- fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult ately flush them thoroughly with
your SUBARU dealer for details. clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
& Recommended grade and eye protection is advisable.
viscosity . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
S11BL01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base from the air. Any absorbed moist-
oils and additives. Never use different ure can cause a dangerous loss
brands together. For details, refer to of braking performance.
“Manual transmission, front differential . If the vehicle requires frequent
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6. refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
CAUTION vehicle checked at your SUBARU
Using a differential gear oil other dealer.
11
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance. CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –

(414,1)
11-16 Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
Alcohol contained in the brake reservoir is used for both the brake and Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. clutch systems and has chambers for each S11AP
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system. & Checking the fluid level
S11AP01
when adding it. If brake fluid If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
touches the exhaust pipe, it may recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or only brake fluid from a sealed container.
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
& Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
off. S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake
advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) “MIN” level line you suspect a problem, have the
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in vehicle checked at your SUBARU
this area. dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level the tank.
for the brake system at the shaded area in . Never splash the clutch fluid over
the illustration. For MT models, this painted surfaces or rubber parts.

(415,1)
Maintenance and service/Brake booster 11-17
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the S11AQ
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system
1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the shaded area in the illustration. If
“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
several times, applying the same pedal
off. recommended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
force each time. The distance the pedal
. The fluid level for the clutch Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain- travels should not vary.
system must be checked at the er.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
inboard side of the reservoir. It the engine. The pedal should move slightly
cannot be checked at the out- & Recommended clutch fluid down to the floor.
S11AP02
board side of the reservoir. Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
CAUTION for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
Never use different brands of clutch not change.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing 4. Start the engine again and run for
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if approximately one minute then turn it off.
they are the same brand. Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression. 11
1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line
A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.

(416,1)
11-18 Maintenance and service/Brake pedal
Brake pedal If the free play is not within proper Clutch pedal (MT models)
S11AR
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- S11AS
er.
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play according
reserve distance according to the main- & Checking the brake pedal re- to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and serve distance ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance Booklet”. S11AR02
& Checking the clutch function

& Checking the brake pedal free S11AS01
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
play gagement.
S11AR01
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ When the measurement is smaller than
“OFF” position and firmly depress the the specification, or when the pedal does
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the not operate smoothly, contact with your
brake pedal up with one finger to check the SUBARU dealer.
free play with a force of less than 2 lbf (10
N, 1 kgf).

(417,1)
Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system 11-19
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play S11BF and lining
S11AS02
Ensure that the Hill start assist system S11AT
operates properly under the following

circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
If the Hill start assist system does not The disc brakes have audible wear in-
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with
operate as described above, contact your dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
your finger until you feel resistance, and
SUBARU dealer. pads wear close to their service limit, the
check the free play.
wear indicator makes a very audible
If the free play is not within proper scraping noise when the brake pedal is
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- applied.
er.
If you hear this scraping noise each time 11
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –

(418,1)
11-20 Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke
CAUTION brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- Parking brake stroke
dure. S11AU
If you continue to drive despite the 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
scraping noise from the audible parking brake stroke is out of the specified
brake pad wear indicator, it will range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
result in the need for costly brake located on the parking brake lever.
rotor repair or replacement.
Parking brake stroke:
& Breaking-in of new brake 7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
pads and linings
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After WARNING
replacement, the new parts must be A safe location and situation should
broken in as follows. be selected for break-in driving. Check the parking brake stroke according
! Brake pad and lining to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
S11AT0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal
CAUTION the parking brake is properly adjusted,
lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Pulling the parking brake lever too braking power is fully applied by pulling the
! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear wheels lever up 7 to 8 notches gently but firmly
S11AT0102
to lock. To avoid this, be certain to (approximately 45 lbf [200 N, 20.4 kgf]). If
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approxi- the parking brake lever stroke is not within
pull the lever up slowly and gently.
mately 22 mph (35 km/h). the specified range, have the brake sys-
2. With the parking brake release button tem checked and adjusted at your
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SUBARU dealer.
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220
yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

(419,1)
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-21
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example,
S11AV
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out-
S11AV01
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example:
! All season tires Ti r e s i z e : P 2 2 5 / 6 0 R 1 7 9 8 H a n d
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an & Tire pressure monitoring P225/55R18 97H
adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) Standard tire pressures:
and braking performance in year-round S11AV02
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside Adjusted pressure
or on icy roads. temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the
All season tires are identified by “ALL Front Rear
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
the tire sidewall.
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
! Summer tires 38 37
by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
S11AV0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire If the low tire pressure warning light
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on pressures may cause the low tire pressure illuminates when you drive the vehicle in 11
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or warning light to illuminate. To avoid this cold outside air after adjusting the tire
icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to tire pressures using the method described
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
use of winter (snow) tires. the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
When installing winter tires, be sure to by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for see that the low tire pressure warning light
replace all four tires. every difference of 108F (5.68C) between turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
the temperature in the garage and the pressure warning light does not turn off,
– CONTINUED –

(420,1)
11-22 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
the tire pressure monitoring system may When a tire is replaced, adjustments are as soon as possible.
not be functioning normally. In this event, necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
system inspected as soon as possible. system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- by a SUBARU dealer.
tween tires and the road surface causes sure warning light will illuminate
the tires to warm up. After illumination of steadily after blinking for approxi-
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an If the low tire pressure warning light the TPMS is unable to monitor all
increase in the outside air temperature or does not illuminate briefly after the four road wheels. Contact your
by an increase in the temperature in the ignition switch is turned ON or the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
tires can cause the low tire pressure light illuminates steadily after blink- for tire and sensor replacement and/
warning light to turn off. ing for approximately one minute, or system resetting. If the light
you should have your Tire Pressure illuminates steadily after blinking
System resetting is necessary when the for approximately one minute,
Monitoring System checked at a
wheels are changed (for example, a switch promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are to have the system inspected.
ble.
installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have
this work performed by a SUBARU dealer If this light illuminates while driving,
following wheel replacement. never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
& Tire inspection
S11AV03
It may not be possible to install TPMS ally reducing speed. Then slowly Check on a daily basis that the tires
valves on certain wheels that are on the pull off the road to a safe place. are free from serious damage,
market. Therefore, if you change the Otherwise an accident involving
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
nails, and stones. At the same time,
serious vehicle damage and serious
tires), use wheels that have the same part personal injury could occur.
check the tires for abnormal wear.
number as the standard-equipment
If this light still illuminates while Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
wheels. Without four operational TPMS mediately if you find any problem.
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
sure, a tire may have significant
will not fully function and the warning light
damage and a fast leak that causes
NOTE
on the combination meter will illuminate . When the wheels and tires
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
steadily after blinking for approximately strike curbs or are subjected to
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
one minute.

(421,1)
harsh treatment as when the & Tire pressures and wear on the door pillar on the driver’s
S11AV04
vehicle is driven on a rough Maintaining the correct tire pres- side.
surface, they can suffer damage sures helps to maximize the tires’ Driving even a short distance
that cannot be seen with the service lives and is essential for warms up the tires and increases
naked eye. This type of damage good running performance. Check the tire pressures. Also, the tire
does not become evident until and, if necessary, adjust the pres- pressures are affected by the out-
time has passed. Try not to drive sure of each tire (including the side temperature. It is best to check
over curbs, potholes or on other spare - if equipped) at least once a tire pressure outdoors before driv-
rough surfaces. If doing so is month (for example, during a fuel ing the vehicle.
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s stop) and before any long journey.
speed down to a walking pace or When a tire becomes warm, the air
less, and approach the curbs as inside it expands, causing the tire
squarely as possible. Also, make pressure to increase. Be careful not
sure the tires are not pressed to mistakenly release air from a
against the curb when you park warm tire to reduce its pressure.
the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration NOTE
while driving or find it difficult to . The air pressure in a tire
steer the vehicle in a straight line, increases by approximately 4.3
one of the tires and/or wheels psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the
may be damaged. Drive slowly to tire becomes warm. 11
. The tires are considered cold
the nearest authorized SUBARU Tire placard
dealer and have the vehicle in- when the vehicle has been
spected. Check the tire pressures when the parked for at least three hours
tires are cold. Use a pressure or has been driven less than one
gauge to adjust the tire pressures mile (1.6 km).
to the values shown on the tire
placard. The tire placard is located
– CONTINUED –

(422,1)
WARNING 2) Under inflated tire (tread worn

on shoulders)
Do not let air out of warm tires Rolling resistance is high, so
to adjust pressure. Doing so fuel consumption is also high-
will result in low tire pressure. er.
3) Over inflated (tread worn in the
Incorrect tire pressures detract from center)
controllability and ride comfort, and Ride comfort is poor. Also, the
they cause the tires to wear abnor- tire magnifies the effects of
mally. road-surface bumps and dips,
possibly resulting in vehicle
damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pres-
sures for the vehicle when fully
loaded, adjust the tire pressures to
the values that match the loading
conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
1) Correct tire pressure (tread can cause the tires to deform
worn evenly) severely and to rapidly heat
Roadholding is good, and up. A sharp increase in tem-
steering is responsive. Rolling perature could cause tread
resistance is low, so fuel con- separation, and destruction of
sumption is also lower. the tires. The resulting loss of

(423,1)
vehicle control could lead to Contact your SUBARU dealer & Wear indicators
S11AV06
an accident. if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
& Wheel balance
S11AV05 NOTE
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the The suspension system is de-
wheels will become unbalanced as signed to hold each wheel at a
the tires become worn during use. certain alignment (relative to the
Wheel imbalance causes the steer- other wheels and to the road) for
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at optimum straight-line stability
certain vehicle speeds and detracts and cornering performance.
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta- 1) New tread
bility. It can also cause steering and 2) Worn tread
suspension system problems and
3) Tread wear indicator
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly Each tire incorporates a tread wear
balanced, have them checked and indicator, which becomes visible
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. when the depth of the tread grooves
Also have them adjusted after tire decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
repairs and after tire rotation. tire must be replaced when the 11
tread wear indicator appears as a
CAUTION solid band across the tread.
Loss of correct wheel align- WARNING
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the When a tire’s tread wear indi-
vehicle’s running stability. cator becomes visible, the tire
– CONTINUED –

(424,1)
is worn beyond the acceptable & Rotational direction of tires & Tire rotation
S11AV11 S11AV07
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread
regularly and replace the tires Example of rotational direction Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
before their tread wear indicators marked on the sidewall unidirectional tires
become visible. 1) Front 1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.

(425,1)
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel replace the tires with new ones that are
nuts again and retighten any nut identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
that has become loose.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy recommends replacing all four tires at the
wheels” F11-28. same time.
& Tire replacement WARNING
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they . When replacing or installing tire
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires (s), all four tires must be the same
fitted as standard equipment are optimally for following items.
matched to the characteristics of the (a) Size
Vehicles equipped with unidir- vehicle and were selected to give the best (b) Circumference
ectional tires possible combination of running perfor-
1) Front (c) Speed symbol
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and (d) Load index
Tire wear varies from wheel to construction matching those shown on the (e) Construction
wheel. Move the tires to the posi- tire placard and to have a speed symbol (f) Manufacturer
tions shown in the illustration each and load index matching those shown on
time they are rotated. For the tire the tire placard. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
rotation schedule, refer to the “War- (h) Degrees of wear
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. from controllability, ride comfort, braking For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is 11
performance, speedometer accuracy and
Replace any damaged or unevenly odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire placard. The
worn tires at the time of rotation. rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- tire placard is located on the
After tire rotation, adjust the tires priately changes the vehicle’s ground driver’s door pillar.
pressures and make sure the wheel clearance. If all of four tires are not the same
for items (a) to (h), serious me-
nuts are correctly tightened. All four tires must be the same in terms of chanical damage could occur to
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- the drive train of your car, and
After driving approximately 600 struction, and size. You are advised to
– CONTINUED –

(426,1)
11-28 Maintenance and service/Alloy wheels
affect the following. WARNING Alloy wheels

– Ride S11BM
Use only those wheels that are Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
– Handling
specified for your vehicle. Wheels maged easily. Handle them carefully to
– Braking not meeting specifications could maintain their appearance, performance,
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- interfere with brake caliper opera- and safety.
bration tion and may cause the tires to rub
. When any of the wheels are removed
– Clearance between the body against the wheel well housing dur-
and replaced for tire rotation or to change a
and tires ing turns. The resulting loss of
flat tire, always check the tightness of the
vehicle control could lead to an
It also may be dangerous and wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
accident.
lead to loss of vehicle control, miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
and it can lead to an accident. tighten it to the specified torque.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use NOTE . Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
radial tires together with belted When any of the wheels are removed wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. and replaced for tire rotation or for any wheel.
Doing so can dangerously re- other reason, always check the tight- . Never let the wheel rub against sharp
duce controllability, resulting in ness of the wheel nuts after driving protrusions or curbs.
an accident. approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
any nut is loose, tighten it to the the center cap is replaced, be sure to
specified torque. replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
& Wheel replacement designed for alloy wheels.
S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example, . When stacking and storing removed
to damage, make sure the replacement tires, place shock-absorbing material be-
wheels match the specifications of the tween the tires to protect the wheels from
wheels that are fitted as standard equip- becoming scratched.
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.

(427,1)
Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid 11-29
Windshield washer fluid When there is only a small amount of & Windshield washer fluid
S11AX
washer fluid remaining, the windshield S11AX02
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate. washer fluid is unavailable use clean
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid. water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
& Adding the windshield an anti-freeze type windshield washer
washer fluid fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
S11AX01
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
CAUTION surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it is
Never use engine coolant as washer diluted, as indicated in the following table.
fluid because it could cause paint
damage. Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A) 50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,

check the freezing temperatures in the
table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with 11
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then washer nozzles by operating the washer
add windshield washer fluid. for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
Windshield washer fluid warning light the piping is too low for the outside
(type B)
temperature, it may freeze and block the
– CONTINUED –

(428,1)
11-30 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
nozzles. Replacement of wiper blades carefully return the wiper arms on

S11AZ the windshield by hand. You
CAUTION should not return the wiper arms
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in to the windshield only by the
. Adjust the washer fluid concen- return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
tration appropriately for the out- jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks per arms may be deformed and/or
side temperature. If the concen- the windshield surface may be
tration is inappropriate, sprayed after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer scratched.
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your surface of the windshield (or rear window)
and the wiper blades using a sponge or If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
view, and the fluid may freeze in after following this method, replace the
the reservoir tank. soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-
abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wiper blades using the following proce-
. State or local regulations on dures.
volatile organic compounds may windshield and wiper blades with clean
restrict the use of methanol, a water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield & Windshield wiper blade as-
common windshield washer anti- sembly
freeze additive. Washer fluids with water. S11AZ01
containing non-methanol anti- 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
CAUTION
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather . Do not clean the wiper blades
protection without damaging with gasoline or a solvent, such
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades as paint thinner or benzine. This
or washer system. will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,

(429,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-31
CAUTION & Window wiper blade rubber

S11AZ05
Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-
tion part and then slide it in the opposite
direction of removal to install. After instal-
ling the wiper blade assembly, check that
the connection part is locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
1) Lock knob lower it in position.
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, push the lock knob to release the 11
lock, and then pull out the wiper blade
assembly.
NOTE
Replace the wiper blade rubber according
Do not use a hard object to push the to the following procedure.
lock knob. The lock knob may be
scratched. 1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit
on the underside of the wiper blade is in
the removal position, as shown in the
– CONTINUED –

(430,1)
11-32 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
illustration, so that it can be removed. & Rear window wiper blade as-
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber sembly
through the slit to remove it. S11AZ03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber, window.
perform the removal procedure in the
reverse order. After installation, check that
the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the
end of the cap.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU 3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace- you to remove it from the wiper arm.
ment if necessary.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
lower it in position.
terclockwise.

(431,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-33
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
S11AZ04
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided assembly into place.
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support. with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
them in the new blade rubber.
11
Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support
– CONTINUED –

(432,1)
11-34 Maintenance and service/Battery
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window S11BA and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is . Keep everyone including children
highly flammable and explosive. away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion . Charge the battery in a well-
does occur, wear eye protection ventilated area.
or shield your eyes when working . Battery posts, terminals and re-
near any battery. Never lean over lated accessories contain lead
a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
. Do not let battery fluid contact known to the State of California
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- to cause cancer and reproductive
cause battery fluid is a corrosive harm. Batteries also contain
acid. If battery fluid gets on your other chemicals known to the
skin or in your eyes, immediately State of California to cause can-
flush the area with water thor- cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,

(433,1)
Maintenance and service/Fuses 11-35
replaced, certain internal settings can be Fuses

restored only by pairing the vehicle to a S11BB
smartphone via Bluetooth, or by visiting a
SUBARU dealer. Until those internal set- CAUTION
tings are restored, certain convenience
features, including the “Service Appoint- Never replace a fuse with one having
ment Scheduler,” may be unavailable. a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
1) Cap fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION 11
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
For “SUBARU STARLINK Safety and seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
Security” without navigation system:
When the vehicle battery is discharged or
– CONTINUED –

(434,1)
11-36 Maintenance and service/Fuses
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.
1) Spare fuses 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
1) Good replace it with a spare fuse of the same
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
2) Blown rating.
fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical 6. If the same fuse blows again, this
controls do not operate, inspect the corre- indicates that its system has a problem.
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.

(435,1)
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories 11-37
Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs & Headlights (models with LED

S11BD S11BE headlights)
S11BE18
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
WARNING
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic Bulbs may become very hot while
system to malfunction if they are incor- illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the lights and wait until the
the vehicle. bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could LED headlight warning light (type B)
result in a fire. For the specified The LED headlight warning light illumi-
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
chart” F12-14. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
For models with type B combination
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the 11
SRH OFF indicator appears on the
combination meter when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deacti-
vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
– CONTINUED –

(436,1)
11-38 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
& Headlights (models with ha-

logen headlights)
S11BE47
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth Right-hand side
moistened with alcohol. 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs. Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

(437,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-39
& Front turn signal light & Rear combination lights

S11BE03 S11BE05
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Parking light

S11BE02
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

S11BE04
1) Low beam bulb Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
2) High beam bulb dealer if necessary. 1. Remove the covers.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb and remove the bulb from
the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
11
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the
original place and secure it by clip (left- 2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
hand side). the upper and lower screws that secure the
rear combination light assembly.
– CONTINUED –

(438,1)
3. Slide the rear combination light as- 1) Tail light 1) Guide pins
sembly rearward and remove it from the 2) Rear side marker light 2) Catch
vehicle. 3) Rear turn signal light 3) Clip
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 7. Put the rear combination light assem-
combination light assembly by turning it bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
counterclockwise. pins and a catch with the guide holes and a
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and clip on the vehicle.
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.

(439,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-41
& Backup light

S11BE06
8. Tighten the upper and lower screws. 2. For left side light, turn the bulb socket
9. Reinstall the covers. 1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the clockwise and remove it.
light cover as shown in the illustration, and For right side light, turn the bulb socket
pry the light cover off from the rear gate counterclockwise and remove it.
trim.
11
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.
– CONTINUED –

(440,1)
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it & Vanity mirror light (if
clockwise. equipped)
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate. S11BE34
CAUTION
& License plate light
S11BE07 Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Dome light and cargo area

light
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise S11BE21
and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
1. The license plate lights must be license plate light cover.
pushed outwards, and then pulled out to
be removed. & Map light
S11BE09
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your Dome light
SUBARU dealer.

(441,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery 11-43
Replacing key battery swallow them.

S11BK . There is a danger of an explosion
The access key fob/transmitter battery if the battery is incorrectly re-
may be discharged under the following placed. Replace only with the
conditions. same or equivalent type of the
. The operation of the keyless access battery.
function is unstable . Batteries should not be exposed
. The operating distance of the remote to excessive heat such as bright
keyless entry system is unstable sunlight, fire or the like.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis- NOTE
tance
Cargo area light . Replace only with the same or
Replace the battery with a new one. equivalent type of battery recom-
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of mended by the manufacturer.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. & Safety precautions . Dispose of used batteries according
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. S11BK04 to local laws.
3. Install a new bulb. CAUTION . Mount the battery in the correct
4. Reinstall the lens. orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
& Other bulbs or in the access key fob/transmit- may result in a malfunction.
S11BE29 ter when replacing battery. . It is recommended that the battery
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
Have the bulbs replaced by your . Before replacing the battery, re- 11
move any static electricity. . Use a new battery.
SUBARU dealer if necessary. . After replacing the battery, confirm
. Be careful not to touch or damage that the transmitter functions properly.
the printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
– CONTINUED –

(442,1)
11-44 Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery
& Replacing battery of access

key fob
S11BK01
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head by fitting the projections and recesses
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. together.

(443,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery 11-45
& Replacing transmitter battery

S11BK02
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or
equivalent
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a 5. Put together the transmitter case by
flat-head screwdriver. fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
11
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(447,1)
Specifications
Specifications........................................................ 12-2 Temporary spare tires ........................................... 12-9
S12
Dimensions........................................................... 12-2 Brake disc ............................................................ 12-9
Engine .................................................................. 12-3 Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-10
Fuel ...................................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4 compartment ................................................... 12-10
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 12-12
differential gear oil .............................................. 12-6 Bulb chart............................................................ 12-14
Fluids ................................................................... 12-7 Safety precautions.............................................. 12-14
Engine coolant...................................................... 12-7 Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-15
Electrical system .................................................. 12-8 Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-18
Tires ..................................................................... 12-8
12

(448,1)
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
S12AA
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 175.8 (4,465)
Overall width 71.0 (1,800)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615)
Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)
Tread Front 61.0 (1,550)
Rear 61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

(449,1)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model FB20

(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 122 (1,995)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
S12AA08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
12
– CONTINUED –

(450,1)
& Engine oil

S12AA12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil

S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

(451,1)
! Alternative engine oil

S12AA1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. – Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 conventional oil may be used if
replenishment is needed but should be
changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the
next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC (International Lubricant

tute) classification SN with the Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
words “RESOURCE CONSER- fied with the ILSAC certification
VING” mark (Starburst mark) 12
– CONTINUED –

(452,1)
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear Rear differential gear oil (MT models)
(CVT models) oil (CVT models)
3 3
. SUBARU Extra MT* . SUBARU Extra MT*
Oil grade . API classification . API classification GL-5 API classification GL-5
GL-5 (75W-90)*4 (75W-90)
. 75W-90*
. 90
SAE viscosity
No. and ap- —
plicable tem-
perature
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*1 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Imp qt) Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Manual transmission oil” “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil” F11-15
F11-14
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

(453,1)
& Fluids
S12AA10
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3

Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer. 11.3 US qt (10.7 liters, 9.4 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
fluid (CVT models) mission fluid” F11-15
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake – “Brake fluid” F11-15
fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake – “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
fluid 16
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

S12AA11
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
CVT models 8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
12
– CONTINUED –

(454,1)
& Electrical system

S12AA03
Battery type 75D23L

Alternator 12V-130A
Spark plugs DILKAR7B8 (NGK)
& Tires
S12AA05
Tire size P225/60R17 98H 225/55R18 98H

Wheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.

(455,1)
& Temporary spare tires

S12AA15
U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models Other models

Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17 185/65 R17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure) 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) 42 psi (290 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2)
& Brake disc

S12AA18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer.
12

(456,1)
12-10 Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

S12AB Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
S12AB01 1 Empty
2 20A CIGAR SEAT/H
3 7.5A IG A-1
4 15A AUDIO NAVI
5 15A IG B-2
6 Empty
7 15A 12V SOCKET
8 15A A/C IG
9 7.5A ACC
10 7.5A IG B-1
11 Empty
12 Empty
13 7.5A IG A-3
14 7.5A UNIT +B
15 7.5A METER IG
16 Empty
17 7.5A MIRROR
18 7.5A LAMP IG
19 10A IG A-2
20 10A SRS AIR BAG
21 Empty
22 15A STRG/H

(457,1)
Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-11
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10A DRL
24 Empty
25 Empty
26 10A BACK UP
27 10A A/C +B
28 20A TRAIL R.FOG
29 Empty
30 Empty
31 Empty
32 7.5A ILLUMI
33 7.5A KEY SW A
34 Empty
35 Empty
36 7.5A KEY SW B
37 7.5A STOP
38 7.5A EYE SIGHT
12
– CONTINUED –

(458,1)
12-12 Specifications/Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

S12AB02
Circuit
panel rating
1 7.5A HORN 2
2 7.5A HORN 1
3 15A H/L LO RH
4 15A H/L LO LH
5 Empty
6 10A H/L HI RH
7 10A H/L HI LH
8 10A TAIL
9 10A ODS
10 7.5A OBD
11 7.5A PU B/UP
12 30A JB-B
13 15A HAZARD
14 20A FUEL
15 7.5A D-OP+B
16 10A MB-B
17 15A D/L
18 10A DCM
A) Main fuse 19 20A TCU
20 7.5A CVT SSR
21 15A IG COIL
22 10A AVCS

(459,1)
Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-13
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10A E/G2
24 Empty
25 Empty
26 20A O2 HTR
27 15A E/G1
28 Empty
29 30A BACKUP
30 25A R. DEF
31 20A AUDIO
32 30A VDC SOL
33 25A MAIN FAN
34 25A SUB FAN
35 10A DEICER
36 15A F. FOG, AGS
37 15A BLOWER
38 15A BLOWER
39 Empty
40 30A F. WIPER
12
41 15A F. WASH
42 15A R. WIPER
43 Empty
44 Empty

(460,1)
12-14 Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
S12AC
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.

(461,1)
Specifications/Bulb chart 12-15
& Bulb chart

S12AC04
12
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D and E are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –

(462,1)
12-16 Specifications/Bulb chart
Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12V-60W HB3
Front turn signal light (models with LED headlight) 12V-8/28W 7444NA
2) Low beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12V-55W H11
3) Vanity mirror light (if equipped) 12V-2W –
4) Map light 12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W
7) Parking light/Front turn signal light (models with halogen
headlight)/Front position light (models with halogen headlight) 12V-8/28W 7444NA
8) Front fog light (if equipped)
Models without steering responsive fog lights system 12V-19W H16
Models with steering responsive fog lights system 12V-55W H11
9) Cargo area light 12V-5W W5W
10) Backup light 12V-21W W21W
11) Rear side marker light 12V-5W W5W
12) Tail light 12V-5W W5W
13) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
14) License plate light 12V-5W W5W

(463,1)
Specifications/Bulb chart 12-17
Wattage Bulb No.

A) Low and high beam headlight (models with LED headlight) – –
B) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – –
C) Front position light (models with LED headlight)/Daytime
running light (models with LED headlight) – –
D) High-mounted stop light – –
E) Stop light – –
12

(464,1)
12-18 Specifications/Vehicle identification

1) Vehicle identification number (under the
Vehicle identification floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
S12AD 2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label

(467,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A. .............................................................. 13-2 Vehicle load limit – how to determine ...............13-11
S13
Tire information..................................................... 13-2 Calculating total and load capacities varying
Tire labeling.......................................................... 13-2 seating configurations ..................................... 13-12
Recommended tire inflation pressure .................... 13-4 Uniform tire quality grading standards............. 13-14
Glossary of tire terminology.................................. 13-5 TREADWEAR...................................................... 13-15
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 13-10 TRACTION AA, A, B, C........................................ 13-15
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle TEMPERATURE A, B, C....................................... 13-15
load capacities.................................................. 13-10 Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ...................... 13-16
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires .............. 13-10
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit............ 13-11
13

(468,1)
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:

S13AA S13AB
The following information has been & Tire labeling

S13AB01
compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with
S13AB0101
(4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating
selecting the proper tire for your Descriptions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of S13AB010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break-
tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements.
designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
S13AB010101
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

(469,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-3
Example: WARNING individual elements.

. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean Mark
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (2) Tire Size
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(3) Tire Type Code
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- (4) Date of Manufacture
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs The first two figures identify the
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 week, starting with “01” to represent
or otherwise altered from
kg). the first full week of the calendar
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING
treaded, or otherwise al- sent the year. For example, 0101
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- means the 1st week of 2001.
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment ! Other markings
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and The following makings are also
S13AB0103
does not mean the vehicle can speeds. placed on the sidewall.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load. ! Tire Identification Number ! Maximum permissible infla-
(TIN) tion pressure
S13AB010301
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical S13AB0102
The maximum cold inflation pres-
system describing a tire’s capability Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard sure to which this tire may be
to travel at established and prede- inflated. For example, “300 kPa 13
termined speeds. sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h) the TIN with a breakdown of its
– CONTINUED –

(470,1)
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is attached to
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” the driver’s side door pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grad- Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg ing (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-14.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
S13AB02
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire in-
vehicle. Putting a load rated flation pressure
tire on any vehicle does not S13AB0201
For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated
refer to “Tires” F12-8. The vehicle placard shows original
load.
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
S13AB0202
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
S13AB010303
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
Applicable construction of this tire.
seating capacity and loading infor-
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL mation.
BELTED RADIAL”
! Adverse safety conse-
! Construction quences of under-inflation
S13AB010304
S13AB0203
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

(471,1)
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight
S13AB03
flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
inflation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
S13AB0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a short the rim. . Cracking
distance warms up the tires and . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
increases the tire pressures. Also, A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
the tire pressures are affected by components in the bead. extending to cord material.
the outside temperature. It is best to . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
check tire pressure outdoors before A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
driving the vehicle. When a tire cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
becomes warm, the air inside it laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
expands, causing the tire pressure less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air 13
to increase. Be careful not to mis- line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
takenly release air from a warm tire . Carcass optional engine.
to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –

(472,1)
. Extra load tire a vehicle. . Measuring rim

A tire designed to operate at higher . Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
loads and higher inflation pressure A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
than the corresponding standard turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
tire. on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
. Groove pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
The space between two adjacent . Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
tread ribs. The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
. Innerliner rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
face of a tubeless tire that contains . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
the inflating medium within the tire. The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the
. Innerliner separation sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section.
The parting of the innerliner from . Maximum load rating . Open splice
cord material in the carcass. The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread,
. Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation sidewall, or innerliner that extends
(1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire. to cord material.
whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight . Outer diameter
or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of: The overall diameter of an inflated
and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight new tire.
is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight . Overall width
same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight The linear distance between the
wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight exteriors of the sidewalls of an
(2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
inflated tire, including elevations
of an asymmetrical tire that has a pressure
due to labeling, decorations, or
particular side that must always The maximum cold inflation pres- protective bands or ribs.
face outward when mounting on sure to which a tire may be inflated.

(473,1)
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special trim. ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a . Radial ply tire . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) A pneumatic tire in which the ply Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. cords that extend to the beads are flanges.
. Ply laid at substantially 90 degrees to . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel the centerline of the tread. The linear distance between the
cords. . Recommended inflation pres- exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation sure inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound The cold inflation pressure recom- due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
between adjacent plies. mended by a vehicle manufacturer. tective bands.
. Pneumatic tire . Reinforced tire . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- A tire designed to operate at higher That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or loads and at higher inflation pres- tread and bead.
other materials, that, when sures than the corresponding stan- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, dard tire. The parting of the rubber compound
provides the traction and contains . Rim from the cord material in the side-
the gas or fluid that sustains the A metal support for a tire or a tire wall.
load. and tube assembly upon which the . Snow tire
. Production options weight tire beads are seated. A tire that attains a traction index
The combined weight of those . Rim diameter equal to or greater than 110, com-
installed regular production options Nominal diameter of the bead seat. pared to the ASTM E-1136 Stan-
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in . Rim size designation dard Reference Test Tire, when 13
excess of those standard items Rim diameter and width. using the snow traction test as
which they replace, not previously described in ASTM F-1805-00,
considered in curb weight or acces- Standard Test Method for Single
– CONTINUED –

(474,1)
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight city.

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered . Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Surfaces, and which is marked with Load on an individual tire that is
an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least determined by distributing to each
one sidewall. axle its share of the maximum
. Test rim loaded vehicle weight and dividing
The rim on which a tire is fitted for by two.
testing, and it may be any rim listed . Vehicle normal load on the tire
as appropriate for use with that tire. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread determined by distributing to each
That portion of a tire that comes into axle its share of the curb weight,
contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread rib cupant weight (distributed in accor-
A tread section running circumfer- dance with Table 1 that is appended
entially around a tire. to the end of this section) and
. Tread separation dividing by 2.
Pulling away of the tread from the . Wheel-holding fixture
tire carcass. The fixture used to hold the wheel
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) and tire assembly securely during
The projections within the principal testing.
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-

(475,1)
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –

(476,1)
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust axle’s GAWR are shown on the
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure vehicle certification label located at
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- the bottom of driver’s side door
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the pillar.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening The GVWR and front and rear
check the tires for abnormal wear. sequence for the wheel nuts, refer GAWRs are determined by not only
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-5. the maximum load rating of tires but
and replace the tires before their also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tread wear indicators become visi- & Determining compatibility of cle’s suspension, axles and other
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in- tire and vehicle load capaci- parts of the body.
dicator becomes visible, the tire is ties
S13AB06 Therefore, this means that the
worn beyond the acceptable limit The sum of four tires’ maximum vehicle cannot necessarily be
and must be replaced immediately. load ratings must exceed the max- loaded up to the tire’s maximum
With a tire in this condition, driving imum loaded vehicle weight load rating on the tire sidewall.
at even low speeds in wet weather (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- maximum load ratings of two front & Adverse safety conse-
plane. Possible resulting loss of tires and of two rear tires must quences of overloading on
vehicle control can lead to an exceed each axle’s maximum handling and stopping and on
accident. loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original tires
S13AB07
. To maximize the life of each tire equipment tires are designed to Overloading could affect vehicle
and ensure that the tires wear fulfill those conditions. handling, stopping distance, and
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The maximum loaded vehicle vehicle and tire performance in the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). weight is referred to Gross Vehicle following ways. This could lead to
For information about the tire rota- Weight Rating (GVWR). And each an accident and possibly result in
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” axle’s maximum loaded capacity is severe personal injury.
F11-26. Replace any damaged or referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
unevenly worn tires at the time of ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each . Heavy and/or high-mounted

(477,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-11
loads could increase the risk of luggage load capacity. For exam- Vehicle load limit – how to
rollover. ple, if the “XXX” amount equals determine
. Stopping distance will increase. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 S13BU
. Brakes could overheat and fail. lb passengers in your vehicle, the The load capacity of your vehicle is
. Suspension, bearings, axles and amount of available cargo and determined by weight, not by avail-
other body parts could break or luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. able cargo space. The load limit of
experience accelerated wear that (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.) your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight placard attached to the driver’s side
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded door pillar. Locate the statement
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not “The combined weight of occupants
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed
and luggage load capacity calcu- XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
rect Load Limit vehicle’s placard.
S13AB08 6. If your vehicle will be towing a The vehicle placard also shows
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be seating capacity of your vehicle.
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult The total load capacity includes the
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this total weight of driver and all pas-
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and sengers and their belongings, any
placard. luggage load capacity of your ve- cargo, any optional equipment such
2. Determine the combined weight hicle. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
of the driver and passengers that carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
will be riding in your vehicle. a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of can be calculated by the following
the driver and passengers from method. 13
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
available amount of cargo and weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –

(478,1)
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine
of optional equipment + tongue load indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
of a trailer (if applicable)) with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
For information about vehicle load- Example 1B
should never exceed 900 lbs or
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
408 kg”.
F8-12.
For example, if the vehicle has one
& Calculating total and load occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
capacities varying seating plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
configurations kg).
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
For example, if a person weighing

2. Calculate the available load ca- 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
pacity by subtracting the total vehicle (bringing the number of
weight from the vehicle capacity occupants to two), the calculations
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is 3. The result of step 2 shows that a

(479,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-13
Example 2A trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve- pacity.
hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
3. The total weight now exceeds weight of occupants and cargo
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 should never exceed 408 kg or
kg), so the cargo weight must be 900 lbs”.
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
For example, the vehicle has one 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 be carried.
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs 13
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
– CONTINUED –

(480,1)
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
Example 2B Uniform tire quality grading

standards
S13AC
This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
For example, if a person weighing tween tread shoulder and maximum
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 2. Calculate the available load ca- section width.
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same pacity. For example:
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 TEMPERATURE A
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the The quality grades apply to new
child to use, the calculations are as pneumatic tires for use on passen-
follows. ger cars. However, they do not
1. Calculate the total weight. 3. The total weight now exceeds apply to deep tread, winter type
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
kg), so the cargo weight must be ary use spare tires, tires with
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.

(481,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- excessive temperature can lead to
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of sudden tire failure.
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. The grade C corresponds to a level
A tire marked C may have poor of performance which all passenger
& TREADWEAR traction performance. car tires must meet under the
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING dards No. 109.
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to Grades B and A represent higher
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- levels of performance on the la-
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, boratory test wheel than the mini-
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accelera- mum required by law.
would wear one and one-half (1- tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
1/2) times as well on the govern- WARNING
or peak traction characteris-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tics. The temperature grade for this
The relative performance of tires tire is established for a tire that
depends upon the actual conditions is properly inflated and not
of their use, however, and may & TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04 overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the loading, either separately or
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of in combination, can cause
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat heat buildup and possible tire
when tested under controlled con- failure.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. 13
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those Sustained high temperature can
grades represent the tire’s ability to cause the material of the tire to
stop on wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, and

(482,1)
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting safety defects also obtain other information about

(U.S.A.) motor vehicle safety from http://
S13AH www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can

(1,1)
Index
14

(2,1)
14-2 Index
A B
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3 Battery
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33 Drainage prevention function ................................... 2-24
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
Access key fob ............................................................ 2-2 Replacement (access key fob) ............................... 11-44
Warning light ......................................................... 3-25 Replacement (transmitter) ..................................... 11-45
Accessories ............................................................. 11-37 Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-34
Accessory power outlet ................................................ 6-7 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-33
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12 Brake
Air conditioner Assist.................................................................... 7-32
Automatic climate control.......................................... 4-6 Booster ....................................................... 7-32, 11-17
Manual climate control.............................................. 4-7 Disc ...................................................................... 12-9
Air filtration system .................................................... 4-11 Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-7 Pad .................................................................... 11-20
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-24 Parking ....................................................... 7-43, 11-20
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-22 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
Alloy wheel .............................................................. 11-28 System ................................................................. 7-32
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-4 Brake system............................................................. 7-32
Antenna...................................................................... 5-2 Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33 Braking ..................................................................... 7-31
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-25 Tips ...................................................................... 7-31
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-10 Breaking-in of new brake pads................................... 11-20
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18 BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-53
Auto on/off headlights................................................. 3-64 Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-57
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ............................. 3-77, 3-78 OFF indicator................................................ 3-32, 7-58
Automatic headlight beam leveler OFF switch ............................................................ 7-59
Warning light ......................................................... 3-31 Warning indicator .......................................... 3-32, 7-59
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Warning volume ..................................................... 7-57
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ............................................... 1-14 Bulb
Chart .................................................................. 12-14

(3,1)
Index 14-3
Replacement ........................................................ 11-37 Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-27
C Chime
Cargo area Key........................................................................ 3-5
Cover ................................................................... 6-13 Light ..................................................................... 3-63
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-42 Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-15 Cigarette lighter .......................................................... 6-8
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cleaning
Center console ............................................................ 6-6 Alloy wheels .......................................................... 10-4
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Ventilation grille...................................................... 4-10
Flat tire................................................................... 9-5 Climate control system................................................. 4-2
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9 Automatic ............................................................... 4-6
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17 Manual................................................................... 4-7
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ....................................................... 3-44, 3-48, 3-60
light....................................................................... 3-15 Clutch
Checking Fluid ................................................................... 11-16
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18 Coat hook ................................................................. 6-12
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-18 Combination meter display (color LCD)......................... 3-33
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-19 Compass.......................................................... 3-77, 3-78
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-24
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-15 Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-16 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-18
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-29 Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................... 11-8 Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-25 Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16
Installation of a booster seat ................................... 1-33 Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................... 1-29 Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-34 Cruise control ............................................................ 7-48
Top tether anchorages............................................ 1-38 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30

(4,1)
14-4 Index
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-31 E

ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-10
D Electrical system ........................................................ 12-8
Daytime running light system ...................................... 3-69 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .......... 7-34
Defogger .................................................................. 3-86 Warning ................................................................ 3-21
Defrosting ................................................................. 4-10 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-14
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-86 Engine
Differential gear oil Compartment overview ........................................... 11-7
Front .......................................................... 11-15, 12-6 Coolant ....................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Rear........................................................... 11-15, 12-6 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2 Hood .................................................................... 11-5
Disarming the alarm system........................................ 2-26 Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ....................... 7-33 Oil ................................................................ 11-8, 12-4
Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-42 Overheating........................................................... 9-12
Door Starting & stopping .......................................... 7-9, 7-11
Locks ................................................................... 2-21 Event data recorder ........................................................ 8
Open warning light................................................. 3-22 Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
Unlock selection function ........................................ 3-39
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-14 F
Driving Flat tires..................................................................... 9-5
AWD vehicles.......................................................... 8-4 Floor mat .................................................................. 6-11
Drinking ..................................................................... 6 Fluid level
Drugs ........................................................................ 6 Brake.................................................................. 11-15
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4 Clutch ................................................................. 11-16
Off road .................................................................. 8-6 Continuously variable transmission......................... 11-15
Pets .......................................................................... 7 Fog light
Snowy and icy roads................................................ 8-9 Bulb.......................................................... 11-39, 12-14
Tips................................................. 7-23, 7-30, 8-2, 8-4 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7 Switch................................................................... 3-71
Winter .................................................................... 8-8 Front
Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6

(5,1)
Index 14-5
Seatbelt pretensioners............................................ 1-21 High beam assist warning indicator .............................. 3-30
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39 High beam indicator light............................................. 3-30
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-65
Consumption indicator ............................................ 3-40 Hill descent control ............................................ 7-38, 7-40
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-45, 11-19
Gauge .................................................................. 3-10 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-22
Requirements.................................................. 7-3, 12-3 Warning light ......................................................... 3-22
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-35 HomeLink®................................................................. 3-78
Fuses and circuits.................................................... 12-10 Hook
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-15
G Coat ..................................................................... 6-12
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13 Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-12
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5 Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).......................... 8-13 Horn ......................................................................... 3-89
Hose and connections .............................................. 11-11
H
Hazard warning flasher.......................................... 3-8, 9-2 I
Headlight Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-70 Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-37 Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-12
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14 Immobilizer ................................................................ 2-15
Control switch ....................................................... 3-63 Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-29
Flasher ................................................................. 3-66 Indicator light
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31 BSD/RCTA OFF ............................................ 3-32, 3-35
Welcome lighting function ....................................... 3-64 BSD/RCTA warning ....................................... 3-32, 3-35
High Beam Assist ...................................................... 3-66 Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-16
High Beam Assist function .......................................... 3-66 Cruise control ........................................................ 3-30
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Cruise control set ................................................... 3-31
High beam assist function........................................... 3-66 Front fog light ........................................................ 3-31
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Headlight............................................................... 3-31

(6,1)
14-6 Index
High beam ............................................................ 3-30 L

High beam assist ................................................... 3-30 Lap belt pretensioner .................................................. 1-22
High beam assist warning....................................... 3-30 Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-6
Hill descent control ................................................ 3-32 License plate light .................................................... 11-42
Hill start assist OFF ............................................... 3-22 Light
Immobilizer ........................................................... 3-29 Backup ............................................................... 11-41
Security ................................................................ 3-29 Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-42
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-30 Control switch ........................................................ 3-63
Steering responsive fog lights OFF .......................... 3-31 Daytime running..................................................... 3-69
Turn signal............................................................ 3-30 Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-42
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................ 3-24 Front fog ..................................................... 3-71, 11-39
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ......................... 3-23 Front side marker ......................................... 3-64, 12-14
X-MODE ............................................................... 3-32 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5
Inside mirror.............................................................. 3-77 License plate ....................................................... 11-42
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2 Map .............................................................. 6-2, 11-42
Parking ............................................................... 11-39
J Rear combination ................................................. 11-39
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5 Rear side marker light........................................... 11-39
Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9 Stop ................................................................... 11-39
Tail ..................................................................... 11-39
K Turn signal .................................................. 3-72, 11-39
Key ............................................................................ 2-2 Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-42
Number plate .......................................................... 2-2 Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-12
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5 Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22
Replacement ......................................................... 2-15 Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18
Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-2 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-34
Disabling keyless access functions .......................... 2-12
Warning chimes and warning indicator ..................... 3-25 M
When access key fob does not operate properly ....... 9-17 Maintenance
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-17 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule............................................................... 11-3

(7,1)
Index 14-7
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-20 Outside
Tools ...................................................................... 9-3 Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-86
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning Mirrors .................................................................. 3-85
light)...................................................................... 3-15 Temperature indicator .................................... 3-44, 3-47
Manual Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12
Transmission......................................................... 7-21
Transmission oil.................................................... 11-14 P
Manual mode ............................................................ 7-26 Parking
Map light .......................................................... 6-2, 11-42 Brake.................................................................... 7-43
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-19 Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-20
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-8 Light ................................................................... 11-39
Mirror defogger.......................................................... 3-86 Tips ...................................................................... 7-44
Mirrors...................................................................... 3-77 Periodic inspections..................................................... 8-4
Moonroof .......................................................... 2-32, 9-20 Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3
Multi-function display (black and white) ........................ 3-40 Power
Multi-function display (color LCD) ................................ 3-45 Outlets ................................................................... 6-7
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-85
N Steering ................................................................ 7-30
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2 Steering warning light ............................................. 3-23
Windows ............................................................... 2-28
O Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-24, 1-70
Odometer ................................................................... 3-9 Preparing to drive........................................................ 7-8
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 Push-button
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Oil level Starting and stopping engine ............................ 7-9, 7-11
Engine.................................................................. 11-8
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15 R
Rear differential gear............................................. 11-15 RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18 OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32
Oil pressure warning light ........................................... 3-17 Warning indicator ................................................... 3-32

(8,1)
14-8 Index
Rear Dome light........................................................... 11-42

Combination lights ................................................ 11-39 Front fog light ...................................................... 11-39
Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6 Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-39
Gate............................................................. 2-30, 9-19 Halogen headlight ................................................ 11-38
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39 Headlight............................................................. 11-37
Rear window LED headlight ...................................................... 11-37
Defogger .............................................................. 3-86 License plate light ................................................ 11-42
Wiper and washer switch........................................ 3-76 Map light ............................................................. 11-42
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-32 Parking light ........................................................ 11-39
Recommended Rear combination light .......................................... 11-39
Brake fluid ............................................................ 12-7 Rear side marker light........................................... 11-39
Continuously variable transmission fluid ................... 12-7 Rear turn signal light ............................................ 11-39
Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4 Stop light............................................................. 11-39
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6 Tail light .............................................................. 11-39
Rear differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6 Vanity mirror light ................................................. 11-42
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8 Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11
Refueling .................................................................... 7-5 Roof rails .................................................................. 8-14
Remote engine start system........................................ 7-14 Roof tent ................................................................... 8-14
Remote keyless entry system...................................... 2-17
Replacement S
Access key fob battery .......................................... 11-44 Safety
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-13 Precautions when driving ............................................ 4
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-19 Symbol ..................................................................... 3
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ........ 2-20 Warnings................................................................... 2
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-45 Seat
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30 Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Replacing Heater................................................................... 1-10
Battery of access key fob ...................................... 11-44 Seatbelt ................................................................ 4, 1-12
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-37, 12-14 Fastening .............................................................. 1-14
Backup light ......................................................... 11-41 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-20
Cargo area light.................................................... 11-42 Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-21

(9,1)
Index 14-9
Safety tips............................................................. 1-12 Steering Responsive Headlight .................................... 3-69
Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-13 Steering wheel
Security Heater................................................................... 3-88
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-24 Power ................................................................... 7-30
Immobilizer ........................................................... 2-15 Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-87
Indicator light......................................................... 3-29 Stop light................................................................. 11-39
Select lever Storage compartment .................................................. 6-5
Position indicator ................................................... 3-30 Sun visors .................................................................. 6-3
Shift lock function .................................................. 7-28 Sunshade.................................................................. 2-34
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-12 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-39
Shoulder pretensioners............................................... 1-21 Synthetic leather upholstery......................................... 10-6
Snow tires....................................................... 8-10, 11-21
Snowy and icy roads.................................................... 8-9 T
Sounding a panic alarm.............................................. 2-19 Tachometer ................................................................ 3-8
Spark plugs..................................................... 11-14, 12-8 Temperature warning light
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18
Speedometer............................................................... 3-8 Coolant ................................................................. 3-16
SRS Temporary spare tire............................................ 9-2, 12-9
Curtain airbag ....................................................... 1-60 Tether (child restraint system) ............................. 1-34, 1-38
Frontal airbag........................................................ 1-49 Tie-down hooks/holes ................................................. 9-13
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-60 Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Chains .................................................................. 8-11
airbag)............................................................... 4, 1-39 Inspection............................................................ 11-22
SRS airbag system Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23
Monitors ............................................................... 1-68 Replacement ....................................................... 11-27
Servicing .............................................................. 1-69 Rotation .............................................................. 11-26
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15 Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-11 Types.................................................................. 11-21
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 7-42, 9-8, 11-21
Steering responsive fog lights system .......................... 3-71 Warning light ......................................................... 3-18
OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-31 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-21

(10,1)
14-10 Index
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3 Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-23

Top tether anchorages........................................ 1-34, 1-38 System ................................................................. 7-35
Towing...................................................................... 9-13 Warning light ......................................................... 3-23
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-16 Ventilator.................................................................... 4-2
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16
Hooks................................................................... 9-13 W
Weight.................................................................. 8-19 Warning and indicator lights......................................... 3-12
Trailer Warning chimes
Connecting ........................................................... 8-17 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-25
Hitch ............................................................ 8-16, 8-22 Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Towing tips............................................................ 8-24 Warning light
Trailer towing ............................................................ 8-18 ABS...................................................................... 3-20
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9 Access key ............................................................ 3-25
Turn signal All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-22
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-30 AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18
Lever.................................................................... 3-72 Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-31
Brake system......................................................... 3-21
U BSD/RCTA ............................................................ 3-32
USB power supply ....................................................... 6-9 Charge.................................................................. 3-17
CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-15
V Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-16
Valet mode................................................................ 2-27 Door open ............................................................. 3-22
Vanity mirror................................................ 6-4, 6-5, 11-42 Engine low oil level................................................. 3-18
Light.................................................................... 11-42 Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-22
Vehicle Icy road surface ..................................................... 3-32
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-25
Identification........................................................ 12-18 LED headlight ........................................................ 3-31
Symbols .................................................................... 4 Low fuel ................................................................ 3-22
Vehicle Dynamics Control Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-18
OFF indicator light ................................................. 3-24 Oil pressure........................................................... 3-17
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-37 Power steering....................................................... 3-23

(11,1)
Index 14-11
RAB ..................................................................... 3-32 X
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13 X-MODE ................................................................... 7-38
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-15 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Steering responsive fog lights ................................. 3-31
Steering Responsive Headlight................................ 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-23
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-18
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance....................................... 8-19
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-25
Welcome lighting function ........................................... 3-64
Wheel
Alloy.................................................................... 11-28
Balance ............................................................... 11-25
Nut tightening torque...................................... 12-8, 12-9
Replacement ........................................................ 11-28
Windows................................................................... 2-28
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-29
Wiper and washer switches .................................... 3-74
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-86
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-8
Tires........................................................... 8-10, 11-21
Wiper and washer...................................................... 3-73
Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-86

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA
& Fuel: & Engine oil:
S99AA01 S99AA04
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 Use only the following oils.
RON) or higher. . API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
& Fuel octane rating: . or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
S99AA02
certification mark (Starburst mark)
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number. For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and & Engine oil capacity:
S99AA05
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti 4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
Knock Index (AKI).
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
& Fuel tank capacity: based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
S99AA03
16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal) After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.
& Cold tire pressure:

S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

2019 Crosstrek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Crosstrek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(1,1)

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 3/ 5

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 3/ 5

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

not to take illegal drugs in the first place WARNING

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Seatbelt warning light 3-13 Automatic headlight

CHECK ENGINE Hill start assist warning

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Mark Name Page

Hill descent control in- 3-32

Low fuel warning light 3-22

Low tire pressure

Windshield washer 3-18

BSD/RCTA warning 3-32

BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 3-32

RAB warning indicator 3-32

RAB OFF indicator (if 3-32

Icy road surface warn-

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Item Page reference

English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec models: Eng-

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Item Page reference

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Item Page reference

Security Relocking (if 20 seconds/30 seconds/

Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 6-3

Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 3-64

One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 3-73

*: You can also set this while driving.

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

北米Model "A1340BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 2

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

Seats always used in the upright posi-

Side collisions 3 4 – – – * **2